United States
            Environmental Protection
            Agency	
&EPA
        Office of
        Administration and
        Resources Management (2304)
July 2004
EPA FACILITIES MANUAL, VOLUME 2

Architecture and
Engineering Guidelines
                                        Printed on Recycled Paper

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Foreword
                                              Foreword

The EPA Facilities Manual is comprised of four distinct, yet complementary resources for planning and managing
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) facilities.  These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to
determine design intent, requirements, and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities.  The use of one volume
without reference to the other three would result in an incomplete understanding of the requirements for EPA
facilities.
Volume 1:    The Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines contain information on space planning, space
             estimation, environment, materials, furniture, process, and maintenance. EPA's Office of
             Administration and Resources Management developed this document to help EPA facilities managers,
             space managers, and line personnel plan and use their space.

Volume 2:    Architecture and Engineering Guidelines  (referred to as the A&E Guidelines) provide guidance for
             facilities management, engineering, planning, and architecture professionals in the design and
             construction of new EPA facilities and the evaluation of existing facilities.

Volume 3:    The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health  Requirements
             outlines safety and health considerations for owned or leased EPA facilities. The Manual's goal is to
             maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against injury, illness, and loss of life.

Volume 4:    The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Environmental Management
             Guidelines, establishes environmental specifications  to be addressed by designers and managers of
             EPA facilities and related building systems.

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                         July 2004
Table of Contents
                      Architecture and Engineering  Guidelines
                                             CONTENTS
Introduction

1 - General Requirements
1.1    Overview
      1.1.1     Facility Design Process
      1.1.2     Design Principles
1.2    Pre-Design Process
1.3    Design Submittals
      1.3.1     15 Percent Submittal
      1.3.2     35 Percent Submittal
      1.3.3     60 Percent Submittal
      1.3.4     95 Percent Submittal
      1.3.5     100 Percent Submittal
1.4    Design Considerations
      1.4.1     General
      1.4.2     Environmental Design Requirements
      1.4.3     Expansion and Flexibility
      1.4.4     Aesthetics
      1.4.5     Interaction
      1.4.6     Amenities
      1.4.7     Handicapped Access
      1.4.8     Exterior Building Materials
      1.4.9     Confined Spaces
1.5    Structural Design Requirements
      1.5.1     General
      1.5.2     Calculations
      1.5.3     Loads
      1.5.4     Structural Systems
1.6    Architectural Requirements
      1.6.1     Laboratory Zone
      1.6.2     Administrative-with-Support Zone
      1.6.3     Building Support Zone
1.7    Special Room/Space Requirements and
      Concerns
      1.7.1     Restrooms
      1.7.2     Janitor Closets/Custodian Space
      1.7.3     Shop  Facilities
      1.7.4     Library
      1.7.5     Chemical  Storage
      1.7.6     General Storage
      1.7.7     Food  Service
      1.7.8     Outside Research Facilities
      1.7.9     Fire Department Access
1.8    Security
      1.8.1     Entrance Requirements
      1.8.2     Access and Egress
      1.8.3     Exterior Spaces
1.9   Quality Assurance/Quality Control
1.10  Commissioning Requirements

2 - Site Work
2.1   Scope of Project
      2.1.1     General
      2.1.2     Development Codes
2.2   Site Influences
      2.2.1     Land Resources
      2.2.2     Transportation Systems
      2.2.3     Environmental Considerations
2.3   Site Investigations
      2.3.1     Site Surveys
      2.3.2     Site Evaluation
      2.3.3     Geotechnical Investigation
      2.3.4     Groundwater Investigation
2.4   Site Development
      2.4.1     Surveying
      2.4.2     Site Planning and Design
      2.4.3     Facility Siting
      2.4.4     Site Preparations
      2.4.5     Dewatering
      2.4.6     Shoring and Underpinning
      2.4.7     Earthwork
      2.4.8     Waterfront Construction
2.5   Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements
      2.5.1     General
      2.5.2     Professional Qualifications for Site
               Design
      2.5.3     General Site Requirements
      2.5.4     Hardscape Requirements
      2.5.5     Recreational Requirements
      2.5.6     Irrigation
2.6   Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement
      2.6.1     Access and Circulation
      2.6.2     Parking and Loading Facilities
      2.6.3     Pedestrian Access
      2.6.4     Airports and Heliports
2.7   Stormwater Management
      2.7.1     Street Drainage
      2.7.2     Watershed Development
      2.7.3     Erosion and Sedimentation Control
      2.7.4     Stormwater Retention and Detention
      2.7.5     Conveyance
      2.7.6     Stormwater Quality
      2.7.7     Floodplain and  Wetlands
               Development

-------
July 2004
              Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                            Table of Contents
      2.7.8     Coastal Development
2.8   Utilities and Support Services
      2.8.1     Water Distribution System
      2.8.2     Wastewater Collection Systems
      2.8.3     Natural Gas Distribution Systems
      2.8.4     Electrical Distribution Systems
      2.8.5     Telecommunications Systems
      2.8.6     Solid Waste Collection Systems

3 - Concrete
3.1   General Requirements
      3.1.1     Design and Construction
      3.1.2     Codes
      3.1.3     Use of Coal Fly Ash in Concrete
3.2   Concrete Formwork
3.3   Concrete Reinforcement
      3.3.1     Reinforcement Materials
      3.3.2     Reinforcement Details
3.4   Cast-in-Place Concrete
      3.4.1     General
      3.4.2     Materials, Testing and Quality Control
      3.4.3     Tolerances
      3.4.4     Selecting Proportions for Concrete
                Mixes
      3.4.5     Mixing,  Transporting and Placing
      3.4.6     Climatic Considerations
      3.4.7     Post-tensioned Concrete
3.5   Precast/Prestressed Concrete
      3.5.1     Structural
      3.5.2     Architectural
3.6   Cementitious Decks for Building
      3.6.1     General
      3.6.2     Materials, Design and Construction
3.7   Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
3.8   Concrete Inspection and Testing

4 - Masonry
4.1   General Requirements
      4.1.1     Design and Construction
      4.1.2     Codes and Specifications
4.2   Mortar  and Grout
      4.2.1     General
      4.2.2     Mortar
      4.2.3     Grout
4.3   Unit Masonry
4.4   Masonry Accessories
4.5   Masonry Inspection and Testing
      4.5.1     Special Inspection

5- Metals
5.1   General requirements
5.2   Structural Steel
5.3   Steel Joists
      5.3.1     Codes and Specifications
      5.3.2     Intended Use
      5.3.3     Support of Vibrating Equipment
5.4   Steel Decks
5.5   Miscellaneous Metals
      5.5.1     Definition
      5.5.2     Codes and Specifications
5.6   Light-Gauge Steel
5.7   Preengineered Metal Buildings
      5.7.1     Codes and Specifications
      5.7.2     Loads
5.8   Structural Steel Inspection and Testing

6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1   General Requirements
6.2   Partitions
      6.2.1     Ceiling-High Partitions
      6.2.2     Wood Stud Partitions
      6.2.3     Less-than-Ceiling-High Partitions
6.3   Use of Wood and Plastic

7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.1   General Requirements
7.2   Design Characteristics
7.3   Thermal Resistance
7.4   Moisture Transport
7.5   Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
      7.5.1     Panel and Curtain Walls
      7.5.2     Spandrel Wall

8 - Doors and Windows
8.1   Doors
      8.1.1     General
      8.1.2     Exterior Doors
      8.1.3     Interior Doors
      8.1.4     Fire Doors
8.2   Windows
      8.2.1     General
      8.2.2     Fixed Window Systems
      8.2.3     Safety of Storefront  and  Curtain Wall
                Systems
      8.2.4     Window Height
      8.2.5     Glazed Panels in Interior Partitions
                and Walls
8.3   Permanent Window Coverings
      8.3.1     General
      8.3.2     Sun Shading
      8.3.3     Security

9 - Finishes
9.1   Interior Finishes
      9.1.1     Trim and Incidental Finishes
      9.1.2     Final Finishing Material
      9.1.3     Airspace
      9.1.4     Combustible Substances

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                                 July 2004
Table of Contents
9.2   Wall Materials
      9.2.1     Wall Finishes
      9.2.2     Wall Covering and Finishes
9.3   Finished Ceilings
      9.3.1     General
      9.3.2     Ceilings Not Along Exit Path
      9.3.3     Ceiling s Alon g Ex it Path
      9.3.4     Ceiling Finishes
      9.3.5     Open Ceilings
9.4   Floor Treatments
               General
               Carpet
               Resilient Tile
               Seamless Vinyl Flooring
               Ceramic Tile Flooring
               Special Flooring
               Exposed Concrete Flooring

               General
               Reflectance Values
               Wall and Ceiling Colors
               Accent Areas
               Lead-Based Paint
      9.4.1
      9.4.2
      9.4.3
      9.4.4
      9.4.5
      9.4.6
      9.4.7
9.5    Painting
      9.5.1
      9.5.2
      9.5.3
      9.5.4
      9.5.5
9.6    Window Covering
      9.6.1     Blinds
      9.6.2     Blackout Shades
      9.6.3     Draperies and Curtains

10 - Specialties
10.1   Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and
      Tack Boards
10.2   Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
      10.2.1    General
      10.2.2    Door Identification
      10.2.3    Room Numbering
      10.2.4    Building Directory
10.3   Portable Fire Extinguishers
      10.3.1    Fire Extinguisher Locations
10.4   Laboratory Casework
      10.4.1    General
      10.4.2    Cabinet Assemblies
      10.4.3    Base Cabinets
      10.4.4    Wall Cabinets
      10.4.5    Shelving
      10.4.6    Vented Storage Cabinets
      10.4.7    Countertops
      10.4.8    Laboratory Fume Hoods
      10.4.9    Environmental Rooms

11 - Equipment
11.1   Design
11.2   Catalog Cut Sheets
11.3   Layout and Clearances
11.4  Floor Preparation
11.5  Structural Support
11.6  Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
11.7  Equipment Specifications
11.8  High-technology equipment
11.9  Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
11.10 Equipment Consultants

12 - Furnishings
12.1  Furnishings

13 - Special Construction
13.1  Noise Control
      13.1.1    Vibration Insulation
      13.1.2   Piping and Ducting Systems
      13.1.3   Sound Dampening
13.2  Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
      13.2.1    FireWalls
      13.2.2   Fire Barrier Walls
      13.2.3   Openings
13.3  Vertical Opening and Shafts
      13.3.1    Atriums
      13.3.2   Shafts
      13.3.3   Monumental Stairs
      13.3.4   Escalators
      13.3.5   Penetrations
13.4  Fire Protection
                                                              13.4.1
                                                              13.4.2
                                                              13.4.3
                                                              13.4.4
                                                              13.4.5
                                                              13.4.6
               General
               Water Supplies
               Size and Zoning
               Systems
               Operation
               Codes
                                                        14 - Conveying Systems
                                                        14.1   General
                                                        14.2   Elevators
                                                              14.2.1
                                                              14.2.2
                                                              14.2.3
                                                              14.2.4
                                                              14.2.5
                                                        14.3   Escalators
               Elevator Recall
               Smoke Detectors
               Capture Floor
               Signage
               Chemical Transport Use
                                                        15 - Mechanical Requirements
                                                        15.1   General
                                                        15.2   References
                                                        15.3   Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning
                                                              Design Criteria
                                                              15.3.1    General
                                                              15.3.2    Ve ntilation R equ ireme nts
                                                              15.3.3    Equipment Design Temperatures
                                                              15.3.4    Equipment Sizing

-------
July 2004
              Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Table of Contents
      15.3.5    Load Calculations
      15.3.6    Waste Heat Recovery
      15.3.7    Energy Efficiency
15.4  Automatic Control Systems
      15.4.1    General
      15.4.2    Humidity Control
      15.4.3    Simultaneous Heating and Cooling
      15.4.4    Mechanical Ventilation Control
      15.4.5    Energy Conservation Control Schemes
      15.4.6    Automatic Control Dampers
      15.4.7    Variable-Air-Volume Systems Fan
               Control
      15.4.8    Fire and Smoke Detection and
               Protection Controls
      15.4.9    Gas-Fired Air-Handling Unit Control
      15.4.10  Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled
               Condenser System Controls
      15.4.11  Central Controls and Monitoring
               Systems
      15.4.12  Energy Metering
      15.4.13  DDC Hardware Requirements
      15.4.14  DDC Software Requirements
15.5  Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning
      Systems
      15.5.1    General
      15.5.2    Air-Conditioning Systems
      15.5.3    Water Chillers
      15.5.4    Condensers/Condensing Units
      15.5.5    Cooling Towers
      15.5.6    Building Heating Systems
      15.5.7    Heating Equipment
      15.5.8    Two-Pipe Combination heating and
               Cooling Systems
      15.5.9    Water Distribution Systems
      15.5.10  Pumps and Pumping  Systems
      15.5.11  Steam Distribution Systems
      15.5.12  Air-Handling and Air Distribution
               Systems
      15.5.13  Fans/Motors
      15.5.14  Coils
      15.5.15  Walk-In Environmental and Cold
               Storage Rooms
      15.5.16  Central Plant Heat Generation and
               Distribution
15.6  Ductwork
      15.6.1    General
      15.6.2    Fabrication
      15.6.3    Access Panels
      15.6.4    Insulation
      15.6.5    Fire Dampers
15.7  Laboratory Fume Hoods
      15.7.1    Laboratory Control Design
               Considerations
      15.7.2    Hood Requirements
      15.7.3    Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume
               Hood
      15.7.4    Variable-Air-Volume (VAV) Hoods
      15.7.5    Radioisotope Hoods
      15.7.6    Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods
      15.7.7    Special Purpose Hoods
      15.7.8    Horizontal Sashes
      15.7.9    Noise
      15.7.10  Exhaust System
      15.7.11  Effluent Cleaning
15.8   Other Ventilated Enclosures
      15.8.1    Glove Boxes
      15.8.2    Biological Safety Cabinets
      15.8.3    Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets
15.9   Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems
      15.9.1    Dry Filtration
      15.9.2    Absolute Filtration
      15.9.3    Air-Cleaning Devices for Special
               Applications
      15.9.4    Operation
      15.9.5    Maintenance Access
      15.9.6    Location of Air Intake
      15.9.7    Air Flow Characteristics Study
15.10 Plumbing
      15.10.1  General
      15.10.2  Water Supply
      15.10.3  Drain, Waste and Vent Lines
      15.10.4  Backflow Preventers
      15.10.5  Safety Devices
      15.10.6  Laboratory Safety Devices
      15.10.7  Laboratory Service Fittings
      15.10.8  Glassware Washing Sinks
      15.10.9  Centralized Laboratory Water Systems
      15.10.10 Drinking F ountains
      15.10.11 Toilet Facilities
      15.10.12 Shower Stalls
      15.10.13 Hose Bibbs
      15.10.14 Water Conservation Elements and
               Techniques
      15.10.15 Single Pass Cooling
15.11 Acid Neutralization System
15.12 Laboratory Gases and  Processed Piping Systems
      15.12.1  Nonflammable and Flammable Gas
               Systems
      15.12.2  Compressed-air Systems
      15.12.3  Vacuum Systems
15.13 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning
      15.13.1  Co ntracto r Requirements
      15.13.2  Scope of Work
      15.1 3.3  Testing and  Balancing Procedures
      15.1 3.4  Testing and  Balancing Devices
      15.13.5  Reporting

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                         July 2004
Table of Contents
15.4  Commissioning

16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1  General
      16.1.1    Code Compliance
      16.1.2    Electrical Installations
      16.1.3    Energy Conservation in Design
      16.1.4    Coordination of Work
      16.1.5    Power Factors
      16.1.6    Handicapped Accessibility
               Requirements
      16.1.7    Materials and Equipment Standards
      16.1.8    Env ironm ental R equ ireme nts
16.2  Primary Distribution
      16.2.1    Ductbanks and Cable
      16.2.2    Switches
      16.2.3    Overhead Power Supply Lines
      16.2.4    Transformers
      16.2.5    System Redundancy
16.3  Service Entrance
      16.3.1    Overhead Services
      16.3.2    Underground Services
      16.3.3    Service Capacity
      16.3.4    Metering
      16.3.5    Service Entrance Equipment
16.4  Interior Electrical Systems
      16.4.1    Basic Materials and Methods
      16.4.2    Conductors
      16.4.3    Raceways
      16.4.4    Neutral Conductor
      16.4.5    Panelboards and Circuit Breakers
      16.4.6    Motor Controllers and Disconnects
      16.4.7    Grounding
      16.4.8    Laboratory Power Requirements
16.5  Interior Lighting Systems
      16.5.1    Illuminance Levels
      16.5.2    Lighting  Controls
      16.5.3    Lamps and Ballasts
      16.5.4    Emergency Lighting (Generators and
               Battery Units)
      16.5.5    Energy Conservation
      16.5.6    Glare
      16.5.7    Automatic Data Processing Areas
16.6  Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
      16.6.1    Mounting
      16.6.2    Fluorescent Fixtures
      16.6.3    Light Diffusers
      16.6.4    Location
16.7  Exterior Lighting Systems
      16.7.1    General
      16.7.2    Parking Lot Lighting
      16.7.3    Building Exterior Lighting
      16.7.4    Traffic Control Lighting
      16.7.5   Roadway Lighting
      16.7.6   Exterior Electric Signs
16.8  Emergency Power System
      16.8.1   General
      16.8.2   Emergency Loads
      16.8.3   Uninterruptible Power Supply
16.9  Lighting Protection Systems
      16.9.1   Minimum Scope
      16.9.2   Additional Scope
      16.9.3   Master  Label
16.10 Seismic Requirements
      16.10.1  Seismic Review
16.11 Automatic Data Processing Power Systems
      16.11.1  Computer Power
      16.11.2  Non-UPS/PDU Outlets
      16.11.3  Lighting
      16.11.4  Grounding
16.12 Cathodic Protection
      16.12.1  Investigation and Recommendation
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways,
      Enclosures)
      16.13.1  Corrosive Atmosphere
      16.13.2  Saltwater Atmosphere
      16.13.3  Extreme Cold
16.14 Communication Systems
      16.14.1  Telecommunications/Data Systems
      16.14.2  Video Conference Rooms
      16.14.3  Recording Systems
      16.14.4  Satellite Dishes
      16.14.5  Television Broadcast Systems
      16.14.6  Microwave Communications
      16.14.7  Other
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems
      16.15.1  Fire Alarm Systems
      16.15.2  Safety Alarm Systems
      16.15.3  Security Systems
      16.15.4  Disaster Evacuation Systems
      16.1 5.5  Exit Lighting and Markings
16.16 Commissioning

APPENDICES

Appendix A:   Codes,  Regulatory Requirements,
               Reference Standards, Trade
               Organizations, and Guides

Appendix B:   Commissioning Guidelines
1.1    Definition of Commissioning
      1.1.1.    Description of the Process
      1.1.2.    Selection of Commissioning Authority
      1.1.3.    EPA Property (Owned and Leased)
               Commissioning
1.2    Commissioning Process

-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Table of Contents
      1.2.1.    Pre-Design Phase
      1.2.2.    Design Phase
      1.2.3.    Bidding/Contract Negotiation Phase
      1.2.4.    Construction Phase
      1.2.5.    Warranty Review and Seasonal
               Testing
      1.2.6.    Final Commissioning Report
      1.2.7.    O&M Staff Training and
               Documentation
      1.2.8.    Commissioning Process Matrix
1.3.   Preventive Operation and Maintenance Program
1.4   Retro Commissioning and Continuous
      Commissioning
1.5   Commissioning and LEED™ Building Rating
1.6   Definitions

Appendix C:    Room Data Sheets

Appendix D:    Abbreviations and Acronyms
INDEX

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Introduction
                                             Introduction

PURPOSE

The Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (hereafter referred to as either the A&E Guidelines or this Manual) are
a compilation of standards and guidelines to be used in the design and construction of new Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) facilities (including additions and alterations) and the evaluation of existing facilities. This Manual
shall be used in conjunction with the Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual (the Safety Manual}
as the basis for the Program of Requirements (POR) and Solicitation for Offers (SFO). This Manual is also intended
to be used, with the concurrence of EPA, to develop construction documents for public bidding and/or the award of
construction contracts to meet relevant building code and EPA facilities requirements.

The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish a consistent, Agency-wide level of quality and excellence in the
planning, design, and construction of all EPA facilities projects. It is not intended to deter use of more stringent or
greater performance criteria for design.  Project-specific design and construction requirements that are not in conflict
with the requirements of this document should be met in developing the final program. The generic information and
requirements described herein must be verified and further defined and refined.

USE OF THIS MANUAL

This Manual does not relieve the architects, engineers, and consultants of any of their responsibilities as design
professionals. It is intended only to clarify and supplement existing codes and requirements to facilitate the design
process for the design professional and the offerer.  The architect, engineers, and consultants who will be involved in
the design of an EPA-occupied laboratory, office, or storage facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields of
expertise and shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all portions of
the project comply with all established applicable codes, regulations, and practices for laboratory facilities, as well as
with this Manual.

Citations of standards, codes, or references within this Manual should be assumed to refer to the most current
edition. Years and publication dates specifically stated in the Manual reflect the version in use when the Manual was
written and published.  When using this Manual, the user should verify that the documents referenced are the most
current and have not been superseded.

ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL

This document is generally organized according to the Masterformat, published by the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI). The 16-section format should be familiar to many in the fields of architecture,  planning, engineering,
and construction. When used throughout this Manual, the term "new construction" shall be understood to include
additions and alterations to existing buildings.

The paragraphs in each  section of this Manual are considered to be subsections and are identified by a hierarchical
numbering system.  When a paragraph is not numbered, it should be considered part of the preceding subsection.
When subsections from this Manual are used in the project-specific manual, the subsections shall have the same
numbers that they have in this Manual. Because the subsections of the project-specific manual are not renumbered,
the project-specific  manual can be directly compared and referenced to subsections in this generic Manual.  When
subsections from this Manual are not used, those numbers are omitted from the project-specific manual. As an
alternative, the project-specific manual may contain all subsection numbers from this Manual, with the notation "this
subsection not used" inserted after those numbers not included in the project-specific manual.

END OF INTRODUCTION

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
                            Section 1  - General  Requirements
1.1     Overview

1.1.1    FACILITY DESIGN PROCESS
        This section presents EPA generic space requirements, identifies the types of spaces anticipated for the
        various functions of an EPA facility, identifies general technical requirements, and gives general guidance
        for actual layout. The design professional must work in close coordination with EPA to produce the final
        building layout in accordance with this document and the guidance gained through consultation with EPA.
        Appropriate local, state, and federal regulatory agencies shall also be consulted.

1.1.2    DESIGN PRINCIPLES
        The design of EPA facilities shall follow the following general principles:

        •   The design of any proposed EPA facility shall meet the specified program requirements while being
            functional and flexible—capable of keeping pace  with the changes that are continually occurring in
            EPA programs.
        •   EPA facilities shall comply with the requirements of this Manual, relevant national, state and local
            codes, and GSA's Public Building Service guideline  PBS-P100.
        •   The facility design must provide a high degree of energy efficiency and demonstrate sustainable design
            principles.
1.2    Pre-Design Process
        The pre-design process for EPA facilities, including space acquisition and planning requirements, is
        generally discussed in Volume 1 of the EPA Facilities Manual.  The pre-design process will generate
        various planning documents, studies, evaluations, and reports.  The results and conclusions of these
        documents shall be properly addressed and incorporated into the facility design and construction phases of
        the project.  The following considerations will be defined during the facility planning phase of the project
        and will be included in documents for guidance to the design professional.

        •   A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so
            composed.
        •   An overview of each component of the facility or campus
        •   A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the
            project and how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory
        •   A brief overview of the scope of the specific  project requirements
        •   A brief description of the facility concept (i.e., number of floors, floor area, number of
            laboratories/special spaces, offices, location of site, acreage, characteristics)
        •   An environmental design intent document, which identifies the sustainable design goals and initial
            concepts. Gather typical meteorological year (TMY) data.
        •   A general description of the various facility spaces and area requirements to be utilized during the
            design of the facility and also the pertinent area requirements for the exterior areas of the project.
        •   Quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and space identification and sizes
        •   Room data sheets for all facility spaces developed in accordance with the requirements of Volume 1,
            Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines and Appendix C of this volume (for laboratories).  The
            room data sheets must indicate specific room or laboratory requirements and identify appropriate
            installed equipment.
        •   Preliminary scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.
                                                    1-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

        The design professional will be responsible for ensuring that the facility final design conforms to the
        specifications outlined in the planning phase documents and this Manual.
1.3    Design Submittals
        The A-E shall submit required construction drawings, specifications, cost estimates, and design
        analyses/calculations to EPA-FMSD at interim stages of development.  Not all projects will require
        submission at each of the stages indicated below; applicable submittals for each project shall be specifically
        indicated in the Solicitation for Offers (SFO) and/or Program of Requirements (FOR).  If submittals are
        found to be unacceptable at any stage, the A-E shall revise and resubmit them at no additional cost to EPA.

1.3.1    15 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        This schematic submittal stage is required on complex projects and/or where architectural design elements
        require coordination with interior design development or development of exterior design considerations.
        The 15% submittal ensures that the A-E demonstrate an understanding of the scope of the project and
        adherence to project criteria,  formats, and conventions. At  this stage, the A-E will submit, for example:

        •   Vicinity plan showing  existing and new topography and utilities, access roads,  extent of parking and
            site circulation,  and relationships to other buildings
        •   Photographs of the site and surroundings.
        •   Single line floor plans  showing all walls, openings, rooms and built-in features
        •   Facility organization plans and/or sections, showing main circulation paths and the locations of shared
            and specialized  spaces.
        •   Building sections and typical wall sections showing floor-to-floor heights
        •   Exterior elevations showing fenestration and exterior building materials
        •   Space tabulation by room indicating net square footage, architectural treatment, and utilities
        •   Environmental design plan, including energy goals and strategy for achieving LEED™ Certification
            under the U.S. Green Building Council program (see 1.4.2.1).
        •   Energy model baseline simulations.
        •   Cost estimate reflecting the cost of the  intended project and the  cost of alternate schemes/solutions
            presented, including the  cost for providing expansion contingency
        •   Code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
        •   Credentials of proposed Commissioning Authority.

1.3.2    35 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 35% submittal includes design development documents and supporting design calculations to clearly
        show the adequacy of project design and functional arrangements. This submittal includes, for example:

        •   Site development plans delineating all buildings in the  area, proposed parking locations, roads,
            sidewalks, curbing, fencing, landscaping, storm drainage, and routing of water, sewer, gas, and other
            utilities
        •   Architectural plans showing complete functional layout, room designations, critical dimensions, all
            columns, and built-in equipment for each building section
        •   Analysis of LEED™ Certification potential, with checklist identifying the points  to be sought and the
            strategies and steps necessary to achieve them.  Energy-model report and recommendations.
        •   Life safety plans showing fire subdivisions and fire separation ratings throughout the building
        •   Preliminary furniture layouts for conference rooms, libraries,  and similar spaces
        •   Mechanical plans delineating proposed layout of systems, location and preliminary arrangements of all
            major items of mechanical equipment, and basic outline of control system requirements (materials,
            methods, and sequence of operation)
        •   Plumbing plans  showing proposed fixture locations and basic riser diagrams
                                                     1-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

        •    Electrical plans showing proposed electrical service and distribution array (preliminary one line
             diagram), lighting fixture patterns, and receptacle locations
        •    Preliminary riser diagram for communication and fire alarm systems
        •    List of applicable specifications for all materials, types of work, and architectural, structural, and
             mechanical systems
        •    Itemized cost estimates identifying all intended work
        •    Basis of Design Report
        •    Final scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.

1.3.3    60 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 60% submittal includes contract documents and supporting materials that clearly show the development
        of the project at the 60% stage. The objective is to provide EPA with sufficient drawings, cost estimates,
        and specifications to evaluate the A-E's adherence to detail and systems criteria, to review coordination
        between disciplines, and to ensure that comments made during previous reviews were understood and
        incorporated. The 60% submittal shall include, for example:

        •    Completed title sheet, drawing  index, and legend sheets
        •    Detailed site and utility plans
        •    Detailed building floor plans with all walls, partitions, dimensions, door and window schedules and
             details, plumbing fixtures,  and fixed equipment or items (e.g., fume hoods,  sinks, cabinets)
        •    Composite floor plans (when applicable) showing construction phasing when required
        •    Developed roof plan and exterior elevations
        •    Developed finish schedule
        •    Updated LEED™ checklist, including preliminary calculations  for points sought
        •    Completed fire protection/life safety plans
        •    Detailed calculation of heating and cooling loads, piping, ductwork, and equipment sizing associated
             with the HVAC system
        •    Detailed outline of control system requirements  (materials, methods, and sequence of operation) and
             basic ladder diagrams and  temperature control schematics indicating remote sensors, panel mounted
             controllers, and thermostats
        •    Detailed calculations for the sizing of the following plumbing systems: domestic hot and cold water,
             waste and vent, natural and liquified petroleum gases, vacuum, compressed air, distilled and deionized
             water, medical gases, and other specialty systems
        •    Detailed description of the fire suppression system and its controls, including activation, interlocks with
             HVAC system, and connection to  detection and  alarm systems
        •    Detailed description of electrical system design, including: lighting system(s), wiring system and
             location of proposed use, lighting protection system, grounding, basic characteristics of panelboards
             (including short circuit and voltage drop calculations), electrical metering, and electrical schedule
        •    Systems commissioning  plan and preliminary commissioning specification
        •    Detailed cost  estimate using quantity take-offs and unit prices.

1.3.4    95 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 95% submittal shall include contract documents and supporting material that can be considered
        biddable documents by EPA. This  submittal includes, for example:

        •    Contract drawings and specifications that are 100% complete for all disciplines (architectural,
             structural,  mechanical, electrical)
        •    Final calculations for all systems and equipment
        •    Final energy control system drawings, including the drawing index, control system legend, valve
             schedule, damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence of operation
             and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay wiring diagram,
             communication network and block diagram, and direct digital control  (DDC) panel installation and
             block diagram

                                                     1-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                            Section 1 - General Requirements

        •   List of proprietary items, long lead items and/or items that because of their uniqueness, critical
            tolerance in manufacture and/or installation, require particular scrutiny during construction
        •   Final architectural finish boards showing samples of proposed finishes
        •   Detailed cost estimate using quantity take-offs, unit prices, and labor costs. The cost estimate shall be
            sufficiently accurate at this stage that EPA can begin funding procedures.
        •   Draft LEED™ submittal, including all required information except that to be collected during
            construction

1.3.5    100 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        This submittal shall provide all final drawings,  specifications, and cost estimates ready for contract award.
        With this submittal, the A-E shall also include an estimate of the time necessary to complete the project in
        calendar days and shall include manufacturer's catalog cuts and published data of major items specified and
        used as basis of the design.


1.4    Design Considerations

1.4.1    GENERAL
        The facility should blend in with its natural and man-made environment.  The building itself and all of its
        systems—architectural, mechanical, and electrical—shall be as flexible and adaptable as possible because
        functions and related laboratory operations often change.  The proposed building(s) and systems shall allow
        for future space adjustments with minimal disruption to ongoing activities.

1.4.2    ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
        EPA facility design and construction must meet all requirements of EPA Facilities Manual, Volume 3,
        Safety and Health Manual and Volume 4, Environmental Management Guidelines and other environmental
        requirements of this volume.  EPA facility design must also meet the requirements of Executive Order
        13101, Greening the Government Through Waste Prevention,  Recycling, and Federal Acquisition;
        Executive Order 13123, Greening the Government Through Efficient Energy Management; Executive
        Order  13 148, Greening the Government Through Leadership in Environmental Management; or any
        subsequent or superseding Executive Orders  relating to the protection of the environment.

        The architectural and engineering design of the facility shall use proven methods,  strategies, and
        technologies  exhibiting respect for, and protection of, the environment.  These methods, strategies, and
        technologies include the use of nonhazardous recycled construction materials and construction materials
        produced with minimal expenditure of energy;  and use of insulation, fire protection, and refrigeration
        systems that avoid use of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting chemicals. The facility
        shall be designed to meet the requirements of the EPA Internal Pollution Prevention Program.

1.4.2.1      GREEN BUILDING CERTIFICATION
            EPA is a recognized leader in energy conservation, pollution prevention and other sustainable building
            practices.  As  such, it is necessary to  identify and incorporate these features in the design and
            construction of new and renovated facilities to the fullest extent possible.  As one means of evaluating
            and measuring achievements in these areas, all EPA buildings must be certified through the Leadership
            in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System (*TM)  of the U.S. Green
            Building Council.  Projects are encouraged to xceed basic LEED green building certification and to
            achieve the highest level of LEED certification available for  each project undertaken. Specific
            achievement levels for each design and construction project will be  indicated in the SFO and POR. For
            more information about this certification, please visit the following web site:
            http://www.usgbc.org/programs/leed.htm.
                                                    1-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

1.4.2.2       ENERGY-CONSCIOUS DESIGN
             Fundamental design decisions related to energy conservation shall be made during the planning stages.
             New facilities shall meet energy efficiency standards set by the American Society of Heating,
             Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 90.1,  1999) and also shall be Energy Star
             certified. The building design and all construction features (materials and methods of installation,
             including mechanical and electrical systems) shall provide concepts that will reflect reduced energy
             consumption.  The new design shall also utilize passive design techniques to minimize heating and
             cooling loads.  These techniques include:

             •    Siting of facilities using prevailing wind and existing vegetation views (sun angle light and shading
                 study).

             •    Efficient design of building form and envelope in response  to climate

             •    Reducing cooling load and electrical  lighting load through use of daylighting

                     The use of natural but controlled daylighting shall be maximized to the extent that it does not
                     conflict with other EPA energy conservation objectives.  EPA values natural light and
                     considers it part of a good working environment. The building organization and design
                     concept shall consider bringing natural light into personnel spaces.

                     Size, number,  and location of windows shall be determined on the basis of need for natural
                     light and ventilation and of other energy considerations.  All  windows in heated or air-
                     conditioned spaces shall be double-glazed, insulated windows. Low E glass should be used
                     for all exterior windows.  Laboratory windows shall be fixed-pane, nonoperative windows.
                     Use of operable windows in all non-laboratory function is encouraged. In an air-conditioned
                     building where windows are operative, these windows  must have a removable operating
                     handle.

             •    Encouraging open plan concepts, with enclosed offices/rooms clustered and located off the
                 windows, for HVAC efficiency and daylight penetration.

             •    Reducing solar heat gains through orientation and proper design of solar-shading devices
                 combined with proper selection and location of building materials. Laboratory windows in
                 particular are sensitive to solar gain and  should be shaded on the exterior from direct rays with
                 appropriate shading devices.

             •    Allowing occupant control of sunlight and glare at different times of the day/year through the use
                 of interior shading  devices such as light shelves, shades and/or blinds.

             •    HVAC systems designed for an integrated, energy-conserving facility.

             All EPA buildings shall be designed to promote the use of natural light and to afford optimum use of
             energy-efficient lighting systems (e.g., electronic ballasts, task lighting). These include Energy Star
             lighting, light fixtures controlled by sensors, and other devices that save energy without jeopardizing
             safety or the light quality required for visual tasks.

1.4.2.3       CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
             EPA wishes to take a very active role in the selection of the materials used in the project and during the
             construction process. The design professional, in close coordination with EPA, shall carefully examine
             the environmental sensitivity of materials  and products specified for construction and build-out for the
             new facility. EPA will  encourage minimal use of products that are insensitive to the environment
             during and after manufacture and should consider local manufacturers (<500 miles) if available and

                                                     1-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

            cost effective.  Construction materials shall have the highest practicable percentage of recovered
            materials as indicated in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG).  The specifications
            shall include environmental performance characteristics or other criteria to manage construction
            substitutions.

1.4.2.4      ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
            EPA seeks to limit the presence of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in close proximity to people within
            the new facility.  Prudent avoidance is required in the routing of electrical power. EPA recommends
            that the routing of power throughout the facility be well away from people and offices; for instance,
            elevator electrical chases and other electrical chases should be located away from offices and on
            exterior walls to the maximum extent feasible.

1.4.2.7      WATER CONSERVATION
            EPA requires that the design of new facilities minimize water consumption through the use of water-
            saving measures. Facility design should follow the Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) ten
            water efficiency improvement best management practices developed pursuant to  E.O. 13123. The
            facility design  should consider the use of low impact development and stormwater management
            strategies, including gray water recycling and xeroscaping, where feasible.

1.4.2.8      CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION
            EPA recognizes that practices during the construction process  can further the project's environmental
            goals, or compromise them. The design and the careful product selections must be protected during the
            construction period from damage, dirt, chemicals and moisture. To ensure good  indoor air quality at
            occupancy, it is important that pollutants do not get into the building's air handling systems, which
            would circulate them throughout the  finished space. In the specifications, the design professional will
            require the contractor to submit a construction protection plan  that addresses the  following:

            •    Preventing dust, dirt and smells from migrating into finished  space from areas under construction
            •    Sealing ductwork  and equipment until dust-producing activities are complete
            •    Keeping absorbent materials sealed or offsite until painting, adhesive application or similar
                 activities are complete
            •    Using low-toxic cleaning supplies
            •    Collecting worker refuse (e.g., food, beverages)
            •    Preparing  an erosion and sedimentation control plan that follows the practices in EPA's  Storm
                 Water Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3 (EPA Document #EPA-832-R-92-005)
            •    Minimizing the disturbance to the site's natural features (e.g., trees, erosion control).

1.4.2.9      CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE
            Planning and on-site management can result in the reduction of construction waste generated, and the
            diversion of construction and demolition waste from landfills through salvage and recycling.  With new
            construction and existing building renovations, the design professional will work will EPA to identify
            opportunities for reuse, salvage or recycling. Goals for recycling  of construction and demolition waste
            will be incorporated into the contract documents.  The facility design should incorporate waste
            prevention strategies, such as the use of modular components, designing to standard material sizes,
            considering prefabricated components, specifying mock-ups for tricky,  repetitive details, planning for
            anticipated changes and material recycling of any construction/demolition waste  (at a minimum: wood,
            metals, and paper).

            The contractor shall recycle as much material as possible throughout all project phases. To accomplish
            this, the contractor shall: (1) submit a waste handling plan detailing how the  waste stream will be
            separated and managed; and (2) provide onsite instruction on the appropriate separation, handling,
            recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all  parties at the appropriate  stages of the
            project.  See  for more information.

                                                     1-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

1.4.3    EXPANSION AND FLEXIBILITY
        Providing for future expansion and change is an integral part of the requirements for any new EPA project.
        The design professional shall review and/or confirm with EPA all anticipated expansion needs and shall
        recommend methods of accommodating expansion to meet these anticipated needs, as well as addressing
        future expansion beyond the anticipated needs.  The design professional shall be responsible for
        recommending the direction(s) of expansion, after consultation with EPA.  All expansion shall be
        accommodated in a logical manner, both programmatically and by construction  sequencing.

        •    Corridor layout and circulation patterns shall enhance flexibility and aid in  future expansion. Open
             plans, which allow greater flexibility in expansion and general facility changes, are encouraged where
             feasible, practical, and permitted by EPA.

        •    Floor plans that encircle a department with permanent corridors, stairs, mechanical and electrical
             rooms,  or other fixed building elements that are difficult to relocate should  be avoided. Column-free
             functional areas should be maximized, and use of transfer beams should be  minimized.

        •    Anticipated expansion must be reviewed by representatives of all disciplines on the project.

        •    Expansion space shall be designed for each type of space used in the facility and for parking facilities.
             The design professional shall review the space requirements developed during the planning of the
             facility and identify  areas that appear to be inadequately addressed for future expansion. Special
             attention should be given to the anticipated needs of technical or specialized space, because these are
             the most expensive to expand  later.

        •    Electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other support systems should be designed and sized to permit
             modification and expansion with the least cost and least disruption to overall operations.

        •    Design drawings that show existing building and site conditions along with  proposed building and site
             designs are  required to show both proposed building and expansion areas.  All drawings shall be at the
             same scale.  Enlarged studies of selected areas may be included. However,  EPA desires a complete
             overview massing of the entire site for each proposed design, with  expansion and flexibility clearly
             defined.

1.4.4    AESTHETICS
        Aesthetics refers to the nature of both the interior and exterior of the facility. Aesthetic considerations
        should include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

        •    Contextual relationship of the adjacent buildings and environment.  Color, texture, and massing of
             building components should be investigated.  Historical and contextual details should be considered.

        •    The landscape  design shall integrate site and building into one concept.

        •    The sequence of access, entry, and use of the building from the viewpoint of both staff and visitor must
             be considered.

        •    The interior finishes must be integrated into a single concept for the entire facility.  This shall include
             all visible materials. Typical finishes, such as office/laboratory flooring and wall finishes,  should be
             standardized to the extent practical, not only for consistency but also for maintenance efficiency and
             waste prevention.

        •    Consider accent and background colors,  with special attention to their psychological effect on people.

        •    Special aesthetic consideration should be given to all building entrance lobby spaces

                                                     1-7

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                              Section 1 - General Requirements

         •    Consideration shall be given to lighting from the view of both visual comfort and aesthetics. Visual
             comfort probability (VCP) for lighting fixtures should be a factor in selection. .

1.4.5     INTERACTION
         Appropriate interaction space shall be incorporated where feasible. Design considerations to promote
         office group or researcher interaction shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

         •    Communication is a function of both organization and proximity. People communicate more if they
             work on a similar project or are in close proximity to each other.  Research has shown that
             communication drops off dramatically after 30 meters (approximately 90 feet). It is desirable in
             laboratory facilities to cluster researchers in  30-meter-diameter groups, with shared facilities in
             between these research clusters, hi office settings, a mixture of enclosed offices  and open plan
             workstations in close proximity encourages group interaction and communication.

         •    Building form has an influence on communication.  Whenever possible, personnel that need to
             communicate should be located in close proximity on the same floor.  Research has shown that
             components of less than 10,000 square meters (108,000 square feet) should be located on one floor if
             possible.

         •    In laboratory facilities, the laboratory director shall be located strategically among his or her research
             staff.  The director's office is best located toward the center of the facility.  From an interaction
             perspective, a corner office with the best view is not the best location for the director's office.

         •    Offices arranged in a cluster may  be a better form to promote communication and interaction than
             offices arranged in a linear configuration. Buildings that are arranged in odd shapes to provide all
             private offices with an outside window often compromise communication.  Solutions that provide for
             both natural light  and  office clusters should be strongly considered.  Additionally, clustering offices off
             the windows allows a better distribution of natural light, HVAC,  and window access to those in
             workstations.

         •    When offices are  put near laboratories, the researchers  located in these offices have a greater sense of
             territoriality than if offices are farther away.

         •    Direct access should be provided  to managers.  Locating secretaries directly outside the manager's door
             often inhibits a subordinate from initiating informal contact with that manager.

         •    Library space appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be  located strategically to promote
             professional interaction and efficiency.

         •    Shared building facilities can be used as a tool to promote greater communication. Place the shared
             facilities to provide maximum intergroup communication.  Shared building facilities should be located
             by proximity and  in locations that enhance the users' ability to positively influence interaction.

1.4.6     AMENITIES
         Amenities are spaces and/or features that provide an enjoyable environment for staff and visitors. A
         workplace that encourages communication, interaction, and collaboration among its users enhances worker
         productivity and increases employee retention. Strategic location of common support areas (i.e., conference
         rooms, restrooms, coffee and vending  areas, clerical support services, and supplies) and carefully
         considered circulation patterns shall be incorporated to  foster meaningful interaction.  Building  amenities
         must be  dedicated, neutral spaces that  are protected from encroachment and future conversion. An amenity
         exceeds  the minimum  functional requirements established by the program and may include the following:

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1  - General Requirements

        •    Interaction spaces, lounges, and break areas should be strategically located to foster maximum
             interaction while being convenient to both offices and laboratories.

        •    Conference and meeting room spaces appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be provided
             in close proximity to the users. The meeting room spaces should be of various sizes and shapes to
             accommodate a wide range of conference needs. At least one of these conference rooms should be
             designed to accommodate teleconferencing and other audiovisual use.

        •    Lunchroom facilities should be sized specifically to each facility.  Quality design of food service areas,
             concession areas, and seating areas with exterior views will contribute to an enhanced quality of life.  It
             is also important to provide a place to safely consume food and drink outside of the laboratories,
             offices, and other work areas. Refrigerator space must be integrated into coffee  and vending areas to
             eliminate the temptation to store lunches in refrigerators within the laboratories.  Consideration should
             be given to appropriate microwave and oven appliances. A "white board" for impromptu conversations
             should be considered.

        •    In laboratory buildings, attempt to locate lockers and toilets close to laboratories and offices in such a
             manner that clothing and valuables are easily accessible to the staff.  These facilities could be
             contiguous in most cases. Avoid placement of lockers in corridors. Where appropriate, the toilet/locker
             combination should accommodate a shower. The shower could satisfy staff after exercise and be used
             to stabilize a chemical accident victim prior to medical assistance.

        •    Space for an employee wellness center with appropriate facilities should be considered.

        •    Provide special attention to artwork and/or photos and how they are to be integrated into the design.
             The solution should include an integrated design for the display of EPA materials, which can be easily,
             quickly and inexpensively changed. This could accommodate research material in laboratory buildings,
             or ongoing EPA projects in other buildings.

        •    For reasons of safety, day or elder care facilities should not be included inside a laboratory facility.

1.4.7    HANDICAPPED ACCESS
        The design and layout of an EPA facility must ensure that the facility is accessible to the physically
        challenged, in accordance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) (1988) adopted by the
        GSA in 41 CFR Parts  101-19.6, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all other applicable
        federal, state, and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities required to be  accessible to and
        usable by physically challenged people (barrier-free design).  Where different laws and standards are in
        conflict, the most stringent code shall apply.  If there is difficulty in determining which code is most
        stringent, the Government reserves the right to  make the final decision on  the interpretation of all codes.

1.4.7.1       GENERAL ACCESSIBILITY
             General access to the facility and any portion thereof shall be based on practical design and  shall
             comply with all applicable standards, guidelines, and codes, including ADA and GSA 41 CFR Parts
             101 -19.6. Other aspects of general access  are as follows:

             •   Avoid crossing pedestrian and vehicular circulation paths.

             •   Provide adequate circulation space at points of traffic congestion and provide architectural features
                that emphasize overall circulation patterns and major entrances.

             •   Avoid confusing corridor systems and extensions of through corridors from department to
                department.
                                                     1-9

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

             •    Avoid horseshoe-shaped major corridor systems that require excessive walking distances.

             •    Avoid dead-end departmental corridors.

             •    Minimize single-loaded corridors.

             •    Eliminate major corridors through elevator lobbies or through other areas that tend to concentrate
                 circulation patterns.

             •    Locate vertical transportation so that it is visible from major entrances

             •    Provide clear directional signage for wayfinding, and departmental directories that can be changed
                 easily.

1.4.7.2       LABORATORY ACCESSIBILITY
             Accommodating the handicapped in a laboratory demands a design that is flexible, adaptable, and
             practical. The environment must function properly within handicapped regulatory requirements of the
             law and must offer safety for the users.  Casework in all laboratories  shall be capable of being modified
             to meet accessibility requirements at minimum cost. Some general criteria for handicapped
             accommodation in laboratories are as follows:

             •    The handicapped-accessible workstation shall provide a work surface that is 30 inches above the
                 floor, with all wheelchair clearances below. Adjustable work surfaces that provide a range of
                 height adjustments shall be considered for all such workstations.

             •    Utilities, equipment, and equipment controls for laboratory furniture should be within easy reach of
                 persons who are physically handicapped and have limited mobility. Controls shall have single-
                 action levers or blade handles for easy operation.

             •    Aisle widths and clearances shall be adequate for maneuvering of wheelchair-bound individuals.
                 Aisle widths of 60 inches are required.

             •    Handicapped-accessible workstations shall be located as close to laboratory exits and safety
                 showers as possible.

1.4.8    EXTERIOR  BUILDING MATERIALS
        The external treatment and materials utilized shall be of proven long-term durability and require minimum
        maintenance.  The quality of materials shall be  consistent with the image and dignity appropriate to a U.S.
        agency.  Material selection should be based on an anticipated 100-year life cycle.  In selecting building
        materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria as well as to the requirements and
        recommendations for recycled content contained in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines
        (referred to hereafter as CPG) and Recovered Material Advisory Notices (see www.epa.gov/cpg).

1.4.8.1       EXTERIOR ELEMENTS
             Mechanical, electrical, transportation, and equipment elements that are to be located on the exterior of
             the facility shall be integrated elements of the design.  These elements include air intake and exhaust
             vents, exterior lights, utility connections, plumbing vents, fuel tank vents, liquid oxygen tanks,
             transformers, trash compactors, containers, loading docks, condensers, cooling towers, and mechanical
             equipment.

             For laboratory buildings, mechanical equipment should not be located on roofs, due to vibration
             concerns, unless  it is totally impractical to do otherwise.  If mechanical or other equipment is  located
             on the roof, particular attention must be paid to the vibration and to isolating such vibration inside the

                                                     1-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

            building.  The equipment must also be aesthetically screened. Screening shall be designed to
            aesthetically hide the equipment and to prevent the entrance of rain into the fresh-air intakes of the
            facility and to prevent entrainment of laboratory exhaust air into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and
            adjacent facilities.  Location of all exterior elements on EPA facilities shall meet the security guidelines
            in Section 1.8 and the requirements of Volume 3 of the EPA Facilities Manual {Safety, Health, and
            Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health Requirements).

1.4.8.2      DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
            The design characteristics of wall schemes shall be evaluated in terms of aesthetics, function, and cost
            effectiveness with respect to the following:

            •    Moisture transport

            •    Thermal performance

            •    Aesthetic appropriateness

            •    Historic considerations (if applicable and  appropriate)

            •    Durability (life cycle maintenance costs)

            •    Exterior wall termination  at the roof or top of parapet walls (including penthouse)

            •    Construction and control joint locations, considering impact on construction sequence and building
                 movement due to expansion and contraction

            •    Corner conditions, especially material relationships at the intersection of vertical planes and the
                 continuity of wall supports and flashings

            •    Load transfer of the wall to  the structure, including consideration of structural frame exposure and
                 lateral wall supports

            •    Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration

            •    Window placement relative to the wall,  secondary connection requirements, material adjacencies,
                 window washing, glass type and thickness, daylighting, and life safety hardware.

            Refer to Section 7, Thermal and Moisture Requirements, of this Manual for additional information on
            exterior building requirements in relation to  thermal and moisture protection.

1.4.9    CONFINED SPACES
        As much as possible, all areas with limited access or no ventilation shall be designed to ensure that the area
        is  not and will not become a confined space as defined by 29 CFR ง1910.146.  Refer to the Safety Manual
        for ventilation requirements for storage rooms.


1.5    Structural  Design Requirements

1.5.1    GENERAL
        This section applies to the structural  elements of buildings and other incidental structures. The structural
        elements include, but are not limited to, the following:
                                                    1-11

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                              Section 1 - General Requirements

        •    All floor, roof, and wall framing members and slabs
        •    All piers, walls, columns, footings, piles, and similar elements of the substructure
        •    All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress,
             strength, and deflection requirements.

1.5.1.1       MATERIAL, FRAMING SYSTEMS, AND DETAILS
             Material, framing systems, and details shall be compatible with the following:

             •    Clear space and span requirements
             •    Serviceability requirements
             •    Applicable fire protection classification, applicable local building code, and/or NFPA 220,
                 as applicable
             •    Security requirements.
             •    Foundation conditions
             •    Future  expansion requirements
             •    Architectural requirements
             •    Climatic conditions
             •    Structural design loads for the specific  facility and location
             •    Site conditions
             •    Material reuse and recycling
             •    CPG requirements and recommendations, as appropriate.

1.5.1.2       CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND LABOR
             Local availability of construction materials  and labor force shall be considered in the selection of the
             structural system.

1.5.1.3       DESIGN CRITERIA
             The structural design drawings shall indicate the design criteria; the structural materials and their
             strengths, with applicable material standards; the design loads, including loads that can occur during
             construction; and the allowable foundation loads that were used in the design.

1.5.2    CALCULATIONS
        Calculations shall be prepared and presented as  stated in the following paragraphs.

1.5.2.1       GENERAL
             All design (including calculations) shall be  performed  and checked by a structural engineer registered
             within the project state.  All calculations shall be on 8!/2-by-l 1 -inch paper. Calculations  shall be
             indexed and every page numbered. Dividers shall be placed between distinct sections. A summary
             shall be included describing the type  of structure and indicating the live load capacity of each floor and
             roof.

1.5.2.2       MANUALLY PREPARED  CALCULATIONS
             Manually prepared calculations  shall be neat and legible.  Each sheet shall indicate the structural
             consultant's firm name, address, and  telephone number.  Each sheet shall indicate the designer's name
             or initials, the checker's name or initials, and the date prepared.  Design assumptions regarding live
             loads, material strengths, conditions of fixity, etc.,  shall be clearly  stated.  Calculations shall be
             sufficiently cross-referenced that a third party can review the calculations without requiring  additional
             information.

1.5.2.3       COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
             Computer software used for structural analysis and design shall be from a nationally recognized
             vendor.  Each separate run shall indicate software licensee, project  name and number, engineer's  name,
             and date. Additional manual  annotation shall be provided, if necessary, to adequately cross-reference

                                                    1-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

             computer printouts,  so that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional
             information.

1.5.3    LOADS
        Structures and their elements shall be designed for the loads prescribed in these criteria unless applicable
        codes or ordinances provide more stringent requirements. The most stringent requirement shall be used.

1.5.3.1       DEAD LOADS
             Dead loads are loads that remain permanently in place. They shall include the weights of all permanent
             materials and equipment (including the structure's own weight) supported in, or on, a structure.  Load
             calculations shall include an allowance for any loadings that are anticipated to  be added at a later date.
             Initially assumed loads shall be revised so that the final design reflects the configuration shown on the
             drawings.

             •    The minimum allowance for the weights of partitions, where partitions are likely to be rearranged
                 or relocated, shall be as follows:

                     For partition weights of 150 pounds per linear foot (plf) or less, an equivalent uniform dead
                     load may be used, determined on the basis of the room dimensions (normal to the partition)
                     and the partition weight in pounds per linear foot,  but not less than 20 pounds per square foot
                     (psf).

                     For partition weights above 150 plf, the actual loads shall be used.

                     Partitions that are likely to be rearranged or relocated should be calculated as live loads for
                     load factor design.  A factor of 1.1  shall be  applied to the live loads due to movable partitions
                     before application of building code-required live-load factors.

             •    The unit weights of materials and construction assemblies for buildings and other structures shall
                 be those given in American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Standard 7-02.  Where unit weights
                 are neither established in that standard nor determined  by test or analysis,  the weights shall be
                 determined from data in the manufacturer's drawings or catalogs.

             •    Design dead loads shall include the weight of all permanent service equipment. Service equipment
                 shall include plumbing stacks, piping, heating and air-conditioning equipment, electrical
                 equipment, flues, fire sprinkler piping and valves, and  similar fixed furnishings. The weight of
                 service equipment that may be removed with change of occupancy of a given area shall be
                 considered as live load.

1.5.3.2       LIVE LOADS
             Live loads shall include all loads resulting from the occupancy and use of the structure whether acting
             vertically down, vertically up, or laterally. The weight of service equipment that may be removed with
             change of occupancy of a given  area (e.g., fume hoods) shall be considered as  live load.  The design
             professional must secure any special requirements for floor loading from the Project Officer with the
             understanding that building codes, local codes, and agencies having jurisdiction regulate these
             requirements. Analysis in the early planning stages of a project is required to establish the loadings for
             specific pieces of equipment since these equipment loads may exceed the design floor loads. The
             timing and sequencing that the equipment is placed into the building must  be considered; this will
             affect the design or construction phasing.  The travel path of the equipment into the building must also
             be considered. The  most stringent floor loading requirements shall govern. Operating, moving,
             stopping, and impact forces shall be considered part of the  live loads.  Live loads shall include neither
             dead loads nor loads from the environment,  such as wind, tornado, earthquake, thermal forces, earth
             pressure, and fluid pressure.

                                                    1-13

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                            Section 1 - General Requirements

            •    Live loads for buildings and other structures shall be those produced by the intended use or
                 occupancy. In no case shall they be less than the minimum uniform load or concentrated load
                 stipulated in ASCE Standard 7- 02, or required by the local building code, whichever is more
                 stringent. A minimum of 60 psf of hanging load shall be included for any central energy plant or
                 major mechanical room where significant hanging loads are anticipated.

            •    Live loads on roofs shall be as stipulated in ASCE Standard 7-02,  or as required by local building
                 codes, whichever is more stringent.  Live loads on roofs shall include the minimum roof live loads
                 or the snow loads  and snow drifts or possible rain loads stipulated in the code, whichever produces
                 the more severe effect. An allowance of 10 psf shall be included in the design of all roofs to allow
                 for one re-roofing in the future.  If a planted roof is being considered as a sustainable design
                 feature, the load for the roofing system and retained water shall be included.

            •    In continuous framing and cantilever construction, the design shall consider live load on all spans,
                 as well as arrangements of partial live load that will produce  maximum stresses in the supporting
                 members.

1.5.3.3      SNOW LOADS
            Snow loads shall be as calculated in compliance with the provisions of ASCE Standard 7-02, or the
            requirements of local building codes, whichever is more stringent.

1.5.3.4      WIND LOADS
            Wind load design for buildings  and other structures shall be determined in accordance with the
            procedures in ASCE Standard 7-02, or local codes, whichever is more  stringent, using site-specific
            basic wind speeds.

            •    Exposure "C,"  as defined in ASCE Standard 7-02, shall be used as a minimum for all construction
                 unless it can be shown that the necessary permanent shielding will be provided by natural terrain
                 (not including shielding from trees or adjacent buildings).

            •    Building additions shall be designed as parts of a totally new building without regard to shielding
                 from the original building and without regard to lesser wind resistance for which the original
                 building may have been designed.  The possibility that the original portion of the building may
                 require strengthening because of an increase in the wind loads acting on it shall be considered.

1.5.3.5      SEISMIC LOADS
            To comply with Executive Order  12699, Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted or Regulated
            New Building Construction, the completed design for all new construction projects shall be submitted
            along with proper certification from a structural engineer registered in the state of performance that the
            design substantially meets or exceeds the seismic safety level in the current edition of the National
            Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Provisions for  Seismic Regulations
            for New Buildings and Other Structures.

1.5.3.6      OTHER LOADS
            Other load requirements are as follows:

1.5.3.6.1         EQUIPMENT  SUPPORTS
                 Equipment supports shall be designed to  avoid resonance resulting from the harmony between the
                 natural frequency of the structure and the operating frequency of reciprocating or rotating
                 equipment (e.g., fume hood exhaust fans, vacuum pumps) supported on the structure.  The
                 operating frequency of supported equipment shall be determined from manufacturers' data before
                 completion of structural design.  Resonance shall be prevented by designing equipment isolation
                                                    1-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

                 supports to reduce the dynamic transmission of the applied load to as low a level as can
                 economically be achieved in the design.

1.5.3.6.2         FOUNDATION OR OTHER RETAINING STRUCTURES
                 Every foundation or other wall serving as a retaining structure shall be designed to resist, not only
                 the vertical loads acting on it, but also the incident lateral earth pressures and surcharges, and the
                 hydrostatic pressures corresponding to the maximum probable groundwater level.

1.5.3.6.3         RETAINING WALLS
                 Retaining walls shall be designed for the earth pressures and the potential groundwater levels
                 producing the highest stresses and overturning moments.  When a water-pressure-relief system is
                 incorporated into the design, only earth pressures need be considered.  In cohesive soils, the long-
                 term consolidation effects on the stability of the walls shall be considered.  Lateral earth pressures
                 shall be determined in accordance with accepted structural and geotechnical engineering practice.

1.5.3.6.4         STRESSES AND MOVEMENTS
                 The design of structures shall include the effects of stresses and movements resulting from
                 variations  in temperature. The rise and fall in the temperature shall be determined for the localities
                 in which the structures are to be built. Structures shall be designed for movements resulting from
                 the maximum seasonal temperature change.

1.5.3.6.5         CREEP AND SHRINKAGE
                 Concrete and masonry structures shall be investigated for stresses and deformations induced by
                 creep and  shrinkage. For concrete and masonry structures, the  minimum linear coefficient of
                 shrinkage  shall be assumed to be 0.0002 inch per inch, unless a detailed analysis indicates
                 otherwise.  The theoretical  shrinkage displacement shall be computed as the product of the linear
                 coefficient and the length of the member.

1.5.3.6.6         VIBRATION-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
                 The design professional shall be responsible for verifying the requirements of, and for, installation
                 of vibration-sensitive equipment in all laboratory areas.  The structural system in laboratory areas
                 shall be designed to accommodate and control specific high localized frequency loads and
                 vibration inputs from the general building systems to these sensitive areas. Five controls must be
                 pursued:

                 •    Use of physical separation to keep powerful sources of vibration well clear of the laboratory
                     space.

                 •    Identification and isolation of particular services that involve running speeds close to the
                     natural frequencies of the floor.

                 •    Identification and additional isolation of sources that, although they do not match the running
                     speed of equipment and primary structural response frequencies, may produce sufficient
                     vibration to cause a threat to the building.

                 •    Identification, and, where possible, appropriate attenuation, of powerful transient impulses
                     from services (e.g., switching in or out).

                 •    Providing structural stiffness  to reduce the peak acceleration responses caused by footfall-
                     induced vibration.
                                                     1-15

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

1.5.3.7       LOAD COMBINATIONS
             Combination of loads, allowable stresses, and strength requirements for buildings and incidental
             structures shall be as stipulated in the governing local building code.

1.5.4    STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
        The following paragraphs concern the basic supporting systems of buildings.

1.5.4.1       FOUNDATIONS
             The provisions of the local governing building code shall be the minimum requirements for foundation
             design. The potential adverse effects of frost heave and movements due to expansive soils shall also be
             considered in the design.  For all structures, the requirements of standard design criteria shall be met
             with respect to determining subsurface conditions, recommending foundation type, establishing
             allowable soil-bearing pressure, determining seismic potential, and differential settlement.

             Where concrete slab-on-grade construction is  used, the slab shall be placed on a capillary water barrier
             overlying a compacted subgrade. A moisture  retardant shall be used under the slab, where moisture
             conditions warrant.  Excess loads, or equipment subject to vibration, shall be supported by separate
             pads isolated from the rest of the floor slab with flexible joints.

1.5.4.2       FRAMING SYSTEMS
             Buildings shall be framed to  allow for simple formwork, fabrication, and  construction procedures.
             Structural systems shall be designed for ductile modes of failure to the extent feasible.

             In the selection of a framing  system, consideration shall be given to the structure's functional
             requirements, including:

                         Column-free areas
                         Floor-to-ceiling heights
                         Number of stories
                         Elevator, escalator, crane, and hoist installations
                         Heavy loads
                         Other requirements pertaining to the specific facility.

                 For framed floors, the economy of prefabricated systems shall be considered, especially systems
                 that simplify the installation of mechanical, electrical, and communications services.

1.5.4.3       LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEMS
             Lateral load-resisting systems shall be provided to resist the effects of wind, earthquake motions,
             thermal forces, soil pressures, and dynamic forces caused by rotating,  reciprocating, or moving
             equipment. Use systems recognized by the local building code. In the absence of local building code
             criteria, use structural systems recognized by the International Building Code for use in resisting
             seismic loads.

1.5.5    BUILDING MOVEMENT JOINTS
        Devices, usually in the form of joints, shall be designed into  buildings to control movement.

1.5.5.1       CONTROL JOINTS
             Control joints shall be provided in all materials subject to drying shrinkage.  Control joint size and
             spacing shall be based on a rational analysis.

1.5.5.2       EXPANSION JOINTS
             Expansion joints shall be provided in all materials subject to thermal expansion.  Expansion joint size
             shall be based on a rational analysis.  In the absence of local building code requirements,  building

                                                    1-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

             expansion joints shall be provided as recommended in Technical Report No. 65 Expansion Joints in
             Buildings (National Academy of Sciences, 1974).

1.5.5.3       SEISMIC JOINTS
             When seismic design is required, building expansion joints shall be seismic type.  Buildings shall be
             separated adequately to prevent contact during an earthquake that would damage the structural systems
             of the buildings.
1.6    Architectural  Requirements
        Facility components shall be organized in a functional and aesthetic manner, according to a modular design
        concept that addresses the needs of all users of the facility.  All administrative functions and all technical
        functions shall be grouped into separate organizational blocks of space while keeping them sufficiently
        close together to facilitate and encourage employee interaction.

        EPA facilities are generally separated into three definable zones: laboratory (where applicable),
        administrative, and building support.  This division allows not only the most flexibility for facility design
        but also the most cost effective construction.  In reference to the interior space of a building or facility, the
        following definitions apply:

        •    Rooms and spaces refer to individual divisions of space, each one usually defined or enclosed by
             partitions or walls.

        •    Blocks are groups or series of rooms or spaces, usually having similar orientation and adjacencies.

        •    Zones are composed of two or more blocks of spaces, often providing the same or similar functionality.

        The building design concept shall establish the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments of the facility
        to facilitate required programmatic relationships.  Multiple floor facilities with repetitive support areas
        should consider vertical stacking and clustering of similar functions and  structural loading requirements to
        reduce costs, quantity of penetrations through floors, and system vulnerabilities. Floor plate areas shall be
        optimized to accommodate the required occupancies  and to allow for future expansion or alterations.

1.6.1    LABORATORY ZONE
        In research facilities, this zone includes all laboratories and laboratory support blocks within an individual
        branch or section.  Laboratory-related office blocks shall be located in close proximity to related
        laboratories and laboratory support blocks. These offices shall be across from related  laboratory  space or in
        "clusters" along a laboratory-related corridor. Window exposure for both offices and laboratories should  be
        maximized.

1.6.1.1       LABORATORY MODULES
             The laboratory block(s) shall utilize a modular laboratory planning concept to maximize flexibility and
             adaptability of research space.  The laboratory module represents the fundamental planning and
             organizing element.  The repetitiveness and regularity of size,  shape, and arrangement of space
             provides the ability to convert and renovate space quickly on the basis of each investigator's  unique set
             of laboratory design requirements and demands.  As  changes are required, the modular planning
             approach allows the expansion, subdivision, or reconfiguration of rooms without disturbing adjacent
             spaces  or altering or forcing shutdown of, central building utility systems.

             •    The width of the laboratory module shall be at least 11 feet, from  the centerline of the walls
                 framing the laboratory module. The depth of a laboratory module should not be less than 26 feet
                 or more than 33 feet. Within these limits, size shall be determined on the basis of task
                                                    1-17

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

                 requirements and shall be consistent throughout a given block of laboratory rooms within a
                 laboratory building. Laboratories with heavy instrumentation requirements may require the wider
                 module due to  equipment wire and service access. The design professional shall study the
                 requirements, evaluate the equipment and instrumentation needed for each laboratory, and either
                 use the planning module size or propose other module sizes that architecturally and operationally
                 will provide the required features.

             •    The structural  system  shall allow for future changes in various mechanical and utility services.
                 Floor-loading capability shall be uniform throughout the building to permit space usage
                 conversions.

             •    Laboratory systems capacity must be determined on the basis of a common per-module
                 denominator that anticipates future needs.  In this determination, each module represents a unit of
                 capacity for the building system (e.g., gallons of water, watts of power, cubic feet per minute [cfm]
                 of supply and exhaust air).  This generic method of calculating systems distribution ensures
                 adequate building utility systems capacity and prevents costly shutdown and reconstruction of
                 primary building systems components.

             •    Modular laboratory design shall integrate primary building systems (HVAC, piping, electrical
                 power, and communications) into a distribution loop with modulated, consistent, recurring points
                 of distribution  relative to each planning module. These points of distribution give each module
                 access to all laboratory systems; any additional services required in the future can easily be
                 extended from the main distribution loop to the point of use. Each module shall have a readily
                 accessible disconnect from each building system.

             •    Building systems must be readily accessible for maintenance and servicing.  Components that
                 require routine servicing should be located in corridor ceiling spaces or other spaces outside the
                 laboratory perimeter.  Servicing building systems components inside the laboratories is disruptive
                 and difficult because of the amount of scientific equipment that must be protected. Whenever
                 systems components are placed above  ceilings, a lay-in type ceiling should be used, or access
                 panels installed, to facilitate access for servicing and maintenance.

                 •    An important consideration for the laboratory design is the distribution of services on a
                     modular basis  within the laboratory. Special design attention shall be paid to location of
                     structural members related to penetrations for services along the walls and near the benches
                     located in  the center of the laboratory.

1.6.1.2       LABORATORY SUPPORT BLOCK
             Laboratory support space shall suit the needs of the specific laboratory.  In some cases, a service
             corridor is used for laboratory support. In  some cases, special support spaces are needed between
             laboratories.  The laboratory support block is defined as the space that houses common, or shared,
             activities or equipment, such as analytical instrumentation, specialized equipment, environmental
             rooms, and glassware preparation areas, that indirectly support laboratory activities.  These spaces can
             be interspersed between laboratories, supporting a specific activity, or can be grouped together adjacent
             to a block of laboratories.  Particular attention shall be paid to functional relationships among
             laboratory support  spaces and laboratories, with an emphasis on the efficiency of the travel path of
             personnel, tasks, and material within a particular zone and between zones.

1.6.1.3       TECHNICAL SPACE
             Research support personnel (i.e., technicians, postdoctoral employees, laboratory assistants) should be
             provided with work space outside of the laboratory room in order to minimize long-term exposure to
             laboratory chemicals and the hazards presented by their use.  Technician space, such as shared offices,
             alcoves, and cubicles, does not have to be directly outside of the laboratory as long as it can be placed

                                                     1-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

             reasonably close to the laboratory.  Some desktop work space should also be provided in the laboratory
             for lab oratory-related reporting and documentation that should not be done at the laboratory bench.
             These workstations, where provided, must be so located as to minimize exposure to noxious, or
             otherwise hazardous, conditions. The supply air and exhaust distribution system within the laboratory
             must be carefully coordinated with the designed work space to provide one or more "clean air" zones.
             In some instances, a physical separation, or barrier, may be required between the work space and the
             laboratory bench.

1.6.2    ADMINISTRATIVE ZONE
        Administrative zones include office spaces and support service areas.  The administrative offices shall be
        designed considering: circulation patterns of staff and staff interaction, visitors expected at the facility and
        their potential circulation patterns, and proximity of administration support  functions, especially the
        resource center and meeting rooms, to administrative offices.

        In laboratory buildings, the administrative zone should be physically separated from the laboratory zone  in
        the same building.  Building links between the administrative zone and the laboratory zone shall house
        pleasant and comfortable interaction spaces, such as a lounge.

        Administrative support spaces include, but are not limited to, the spaces described below:

1.6.2.1       CONFERENCE ROOM
             Conference room areas must be  sized in proportion to the  number of staff and conference activities
             anticipated.  The proper and adequate design of conference space for administrative areas and research
             areas reduces travel time and promotes  interaction. "Satellite conference rooms" can also double as
             "satellite resource centers" for periodicals related to special laboratory groups.

             Conference areas that  are centrally located for general  administrative meetings are  often designed to be
             subdivided with the  use of folding sound-resistant doors.  A vending area and related seating area may
             be coordinated adjacent to the main conference area to provide a broader use of the conference area.
             When conference areas and food-related areas are  adjacent to one another, walls and doors  must
             provide adequate sound control.  CO2 monitors should be  considered for the HVAC control.

1.6.2.2       TELECONFERENCE ROOM
             The teleconference room shall be designed to meet the specific teleconferencing needs of the facility.
             Additional issues to resolve include:

             •    Number of participants anticipated
             •    Special lighting requirements
             •    Special acoustic requirements
             •    CO2 monitors should be considered for the HVAC control.
             •    Acoustic isolation from adjacent spaces
             •    Storage requirements
             •    Control room requirements
                     Determine  whether a common control room for two conference rooms is required
                     Define control room requirements
                     Identify equipment requirements
                     Is a control room even  required.

1.6.2.3       STORAGE
             Storage areas adjacent to administrative offices are required to hold paper stock and miscellaneous
             equipment storage and for collecting old corrugated cardboard. Special attention shall be exercised
             regarding the need for storage space to hold extra supplies related to administrative conference space
             (e.g., tables,  chairs,  overhead projectors, slide projectors,  and easels).

                                                    1-19

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                              Section 1 - General Requirements

1.6.2.4       COPIER
             Copier area shall be provided in close proximity to administrative areas. It shall be located to promote
             researchers/staff interaction. Area shall be enclosed and directly exhausted to the outside to provide
             adequate air quality.  Adequate space adjacent to the copier is needed for proper storage, placement of
             mixed office paper and toner cartridge recycling bins, and collating or layout areas for sorting copies.

1.6.2.5       COFFEE/VENDING
             A coffee/vending area shall be strategically located within a short travel distance from the area
             serviced. The coffee/vending area should be located to promote communication and researcher
             interaction. Adequate area shall be provided to accommodate separate bins for collecting newspapers
             and commingled bottles and cans for recycling. Often coffee/vending areas are co-located with
             concession purchased items. Special attention must be given to designing concession areas for both
             functional use and good aesthetic design. If there will be microwaves or other cooking appliances, the
             area shall be enclosed and exhausted directly to the outdoors for good indoor air quality.

1.6.2.6       COMPUTER ACCESS / PRINTER OUTPUT
             Computer areas including computer staff offices, paper storage and computer tape storage are often
             designed into a "computer suite."  Often,  the "suite" will include printer output areas.

                 The computer area shall be located as centrally as possible to reduce travel as well as wiring to
                 computer terminals. The computer printer output areas are good interaction areas for staff and
                 should be located to promote  interaction.

                 Special care is required to design both floor loading and fire ratings for film and paper storage
                 areas. Special fire protection consideration is required for the computer areas.  A preaction fire
                 protection system shall be a part of the  fire protection analysis for these areas.

                 Computer areas will probably have access flooring that may require accessible ramps (ADA
                 compliance required) to these areas.  Special  acoustical consideration  is required in computer and
                 printer output areas. If a glass wall is used to view into the computer area, adequate attention shall
                 be given to fire protection of this glass wall.

                 Adequate space adjacent to printers shall be allocated for placing bins for recycling  mixed office
                 paper and boxes for collecting used laser toner cartridges for recycling.

1.6.2.7       VISITOR INFORMATION CENTER
             If the facility will be open to domestic and/or foreign visitors, a visitor center should be considered. A
             visitor center shall include, at a minimum, the following amenities:

             •    Relaxation area
             •    Projection/sound equipment
             •    Large screen television with video cassette recorder (VCR)
             •    Coffee area.

1.6.3    BUILDING SUPPORT ZONE
        The building support zone design shall house  a receiving dock, facility physical plant, mechanical
        equipment, and central storage.  Its location shall be determined in accordance with the site master plan and
        should optimize service vehicle circulation. In laboratory facilities, the building support zone should be
        located adjacent to the laboratory zone to facilitate the movement of equipment and material to and from the
        laboratories.

        Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the  size,  function, and material
        requirements of each laboratory.  The truck turning radius to loading facilities should be appropriate to the

                                                    1-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

        truck size anticipated. The loading dock might include a leveling device for accommodating different size
        trucks.  A covered loading/unloading area is desirable. The loading dock area shall be considered for video
        monitoring for security purposes.  Issues to resolve are as follows:

        •   Nitrogen storage requirements and location; note security fence requirements
        •   Breakout area size
        •   Bulk mail process defined
        •   Access for emergency vehicle and ramps
        •   Truck parameters (dock height, leveler requirements)
        •   Security requirements
        •   Concrete paving for loading dock area
        •   Dumpster and compaction requirements
            Area for waste stream separation and recycling.

        For laboratory facilities, an isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility (HMSF) shall be also located
        near this zone to facilitate transportation and handling of explosive/flammable materials, toxic chemicals,
        and biohazardous waste before disposal at an off-site location by a licensed contractor.


1.7    Special Room/Space Requirements and Concerns

1.7.1    RESTROOMS
        Each  men's and women's restroom should have shower stalls and adequate lockers for the operation and the
        number of people, men and women, to encourage staff to bike or walk to work. Restrooms shall conform to
        ADA and/or UFAS requirements,  as applicable. All sanitation finishes shall be non-permeable, non-
        corrosive, and easily maintainable. Restrooms shall be equipped with exhaust ventilation to the outside.

1.7.2    JANITOR CLOSETS/CUSTODIAL SPACE
        Janitor closets shall be provided in sufficient numbers to service the various areas of the building(s).  Each
        floor  or block shall have at least one janitor closet with mop  sink. These rooms shall be equipped with
        exhaust ventilation to  atmosphere  and louvered doors.  Custodial space shall contain adequate storage space
        for cleaning equipment and supplies. Besides the custodial space located on each floor, a central custodial
        office, locker rooms and storage space shall be considered during the early phases  of design. This area shall
        be located in close proximity to other building services areas.

1.7.3    SHOP FACILITIES
        Shop  facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function. The shop facilities shall
        be remotely located from vibration, noise, and dust-sensitive areas.

1.7.4    LIBRARY
        The library shall be located with good access to storage, services elevator, and conference facilities.
        Additional issues are as follows:

        •   Type of library storage
        •   Computer terminals required
        •   Study carrels required
        •   Work space required
        •   Floor loading/structural  requirements.

1.7.5    CHEMICAL  STORAGE
        Chemical storage shall be provided and be in compliance with the requirements of Chapter 4 of the Safety
        Manual.
                                                    1-21

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 1 - General Requirements

1.7.6    GENERAL STORAGE
        General storage is usually required on every floor. General storage facilities are the most typically
        forgotten or undersized spaces in EPA facilities.  In Government facilities, where it is difficult to resolve
        equipment disposition, adequate storage space is critical.  Additional issues to resolve:

        •    Locate storage internal to the building, maximizing underused space for occupied functions
             Ensure good access to service elevator
        •    Size rooms with freezers or other bulky equipment relative to equipment dimensions and layout
        •    Check corridor and elevator dimensions for movement of equipment
        •    Resolve signal runs to central control area as required by program
             Ensure space to collect corrugate cardboard for recycling.

1.7.7    FOOD SERVICE AND DINING
        Food service must be located with good access to the loading dock and the service elevator.  The food
        service and dining shall be as centrally located as possible with an exterior view if possible.  Additional
        issues to resolve:

        •    Quantity of seating required
        •    Type of food service to be provided
        •    Secondary uses of food service spaces
             Placement of separate recycling bins for collecting newspaper and commingled bottles and cans.

1.7.8    OUTSIDE RESEARCH FACILITIES
        Any outside research space related to a laboratory facility shall  be constructed and designed to be of a
        quality that is in keeping with the research complex environment.

1.7.9    FIRE CONTROL ROOM
        A fire control room is required inside high-rise buildings.  In conjunction with local and EPA requirements,
        the local fire marshal shall be consulted to address and resolve any special concerns. Special attention shall
        also be provided to the elevator/service elevator design and its function in a fire fighting mode.  Special
        consideration shall be given to the removal of fire victims from the building.


1.8    Security

1.8.1    ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
        All entrances to the facility must be clearly defined.  There shall be only one main entrance, although access
        to this main entrance may be from a variety of directions.  The following are general design requirements
        for the main entrance:

        •    The main entrance shall be consistent with the design of the facility.  The design of the space(s) and the
             material selection shall express EPA's and the facility's position in the world environmental
             community. Materials shall be high quality and durable.

        •    All entry spaces should be open, airy, and inviting to the entrant.  All major entries should have
             vestibules and walk-off grilles to capture dirt, unless these  are prohibited by historic preservation
             requirements.

        •    The main entrance must be easily recognizable and  allow easy transition to other facility areas by first-
             time users  of the facility.
                                                     1-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements

                 Each main entrance should be designed for incorporation of security equipment as defined in the
                 FOR. Security equipment may include card readers, x-ray equipment and metal detectors.

1.8.2    ACCESS AND EGRESS
        The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall
        conform to requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, and/or local codes, whichever
        is most stringent, and shall allow fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security
        for personnel, property, and experiments.  The facility, buildings, and interior modules shall have
        controllable access, which should ensure a reasonably safe and secure working environment.

        A security control station shall be at the main entrance, and security personnel shall have good visual
        control over the building's main entrance and lobby space, as well as monitor control over all other exits
        and entrances. Often a full-time security station is not economically justified by the amount of staff and
        visitor traffic through the main entrance of the facility. The receptionist may need to fulfill the security role.
        Administrative areas shall be in close proximity to the security control to provide reception function
        activities to support the security control staff.

1.8.3    EXTERIOR  SPACES
        The exterior spaces on the property shall be adequately secured to eliminate the potential of unauthorized
        individuals gaining access to the property.  Potentially hazardous or accident prone exterior areas shall be
        secured by adequate perimeter security.
1.9    Quality Assurance/Quality Control
        The design and construction contractor shall be responsible for quality control and shall establish and
        maintain an effective quality control system. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures,
        and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements. The
        Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan
        proposed to implement these requirements.  The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control,
        instructions, test, records, and forms to be used.

        At a minimum the plan shall include:

        •    A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority.

        •    The name, qualifications (in resume format),  duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person
             assigned a CQC function.

        •    Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and  managing required samples, submittals, including
             those of subcontractors, off-site fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents.

        •    Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name,
             specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, and person responsible for each test.
        •    Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective
             action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.

        For construction contracts, the system shall cover all construction operations, both on-site and off-site, and
        shall be keyed to the proposed construction operations sequence.  Construction will be permitted to begin
        only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature
        of work to be started.
                                                     1-23

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                  Section 1 - General Requirements
1.10   Commissioning Requirements
       Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning guidelines.
END OF SECTION 1
                                             1-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
                                      Section 2 - Site Work

2.1     Scope of Project

2.1.1    GENERAL
        The location, type of building and support facility proposed, impact on site development, and general scope
        of work shall be described for the project. The description shall include such elements as access roads,
        parking areas, and loading and unloading areas, utilities, water supply, storm and wastewater.

2.1.2    DEVELOPMENT CODES
        All site work must comply with the applicable federal, state, city, and local zoning and building codes and
        with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility
        Standards (UFAS).  Refer to Appendix A for some of the many codes, regulations, trade organizations,
        publications, and guides that may be applicable. When codes and/or regulations conflict, the most stringent
        standard shall govern. Information on applicable codes must be provided as stated in the following
        subsections.

2.1.2.1      ZONING
            A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impact on site development
            shall be given for the proposed project.

2.1.2.2      BUILDING CODES
            Description of the applicable building codes  shall be provided, with any specific references to seismic,
            floodplain, or coastal development as it relates to site development.

2.1.2.3      ADA REQUIREMENTS
            The proposed project will comply with  current federal (28 CFR Parts 35 and 36), state, and local ADA
            guidelines for the physically disabled.


2.2     Site Influences

2.2.1    LAND RESOURCES
        Information shall be provided on the geography, geology, climate, typical meteorological data, and
        hydrology of the site areas.

2.2.1.1      SITE VICINITY
            The geographic location of the project shall be described. Site location with respect to designated
            floodplains will be noted.  EPA facilities shall not be located within the 100-year floodplain.
            Appropriate information on the local area economy, business, and industry shall also be provided.

2.2.1.2      PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY
            A general description of known site geology and physiography shall be provided. Appropriate
            information shall be taken from the preliminary geotechnical investigation if this has been performed
            and is available when information is being gathered for this document.  Seismic effects and the
            geological, foundation, and tsunami (seawave) hazards often associated with earthquakes must be
            considered. Probability with respect to  severity and frequency of ground shaking varies from one
            geographic region to another; regions in which there are similar hazard factors are identified as seismic
            zones. Refer to the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program to determine the seismic zone in
            which the site is located.
                                                    2-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 2 - Site Work

2.2.1.3       CLIMATOLOGY
             The specific climatic conditions of the proposed site shall be described, especially precipitation and
             predominant wind directions and highest expected wind gust on the site. Where available, local
             precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for specific site hydrologic modeling.

2.2.1.4       HYDROLOGY
             A general description of site hydrology shall be provided. This  description shall include data taken
             from the preliminary geotechnical investigation and the Soil Conservation Service soil survey. The
             following specific site information shall be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the project:

             •    Geographic location
             •    Precipitation frequency data
             •    Drainage area
             •    Soil and cover
             •    Runoff distribution
             •    Groundwater
             •    Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record should be developed and used for each
                 locale. The design storm events shall be based on a study of precipitation frequency, runoff
                 potential, and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed. Where
                 available, stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels.  Where
                 stream gauge data are inadequate or unavailable, rainfall information shall be taken from
                 documented sources, such as National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/U.S. Weather
                 Bureau Technical Paper No. 40. Design storm precipitation values taken from documented
                 sources or derived by published engineering methodology shall be used to  estimate design  flood
                 discharges.

2.2.2    TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
        The transportation requirements of the project and the project's relationship to and effect on existing
        roadways shall be described.

2.2.2.1       AIR
             A general description of project requirements for heliports or airfields shall be provided.

2.2.2.2       LAND
             A general description of the proposed project and its location relative to existing roadways shall be
             provided.  Development of the proposed facility and the impacts on the existing roadway system shall
             be addressed. This assessment shall include references to the traffic impact analysis if such  an analysis
             is required for the project. For sites located in metropolitan areas with extensive public transportation
             systems, access  to public transportation is desirable. A general description of proposed pedestrian and
             bicycle transportation systems should be included.

2.2.2.3       WATER
             A general description of project requirements relative to boating shall be provided, including
             requirements for marinas, docking and/or storage facilities, seawalls and refueling facilities. Applicable
             permitting requirements of federal, state, and local  agencies shall also be addressed.

2.2.3    ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
        The project's effects on the  surrounding environment, including air quality, water quality, and noise levels
        shall be addressed.   Communities involved should be given the opportunity to participate in the
        identification of ways to reduce adverse environmental effects that negatively affect human health. A
        written Environmental Protection Plan for the construction effort shall be required.

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

2.2.3.1      AIR QUALITY
            The impact of the proposed project on air quality shall be addressed.  The assessment shall include all
            sources of air emissions and compliance with the requirements of federal, state, and local agencies.

2.2.3.2      WATER RESOURCES
            The proposed project's impact on available water resources, including both ground and surface waters,
            shall be addressed.

2.2.3.3      NOISE POLLUTION
            Any noise pollution that will be associated with the proposed project, its impact on surrounding
            development, and the project's compliance with applicable zoning and land development codes on
            noise pollution  shall be addressed.

2.2.3.4      REDEVELOPMENT
            EPA encourages building on previously developed land, rather than on undeveloped property.  If
            brownfield sites are considered, remedial actions must be identified and resolved per EPA guidelines
            prior to construction.


2.3     Site Investigation

2.3.1     SITE SURVEYS
         The design professional shall be responsible for providing site investigations, land (metes and bounds)
         surveys, and an environmental assessment of the site. Site investigations,  land surveys, and environmental
         assessments shall be performed by professional engineers registered in the state of performance and/or land
         surveyors, as applicable.

         At a minimum, the survey(s) shall show legal property boundaries, easements, and legal restrictions, as well
         as all man-made and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and permanent),
         horizontal and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas. Land surveys should conform to
         the requirements of General Services Administration (GSA) document PBS-P100 and the minimum
         standard detail requirements for ALTA/ACSM  Land Title Surveys (1999), as applicable.

         The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property,  and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
         the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes),  all control
         and property  surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional land
         surveyor registered  in the state in which the site is situated.

2.3.1.1      PRELIMINARY SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
            Preliminary subsurface exploration shall be performed by a registered geotechnical engineer. The
            registered geotechnical engineer shall supervise  all required testing, review and analyze all data and
            samples, and submit a report. All tests  shall be performed by independent testing laboratories.
            Subsurface investigations should conform to the requirements of GSA document PBS-P100 Appendix
            A, as applicable.

2.3.1.2      ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
            Design and environmental professionals selected by EPA will evaluate the effects that the additions and
            improvements will have on the local environment. Under the purview of the National Environmental
            Policy Act (NEPA), an environmental assessment (EA) may also be required,  which will determine the
            need for an environmental impact statement (EIS). The EA should conform to EPA environmental
            assessment requirements, as applicable. The preparation of the environmental assessment, if required,
                                                    2-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 2 - Site Work

             may be included as a part of the professional services contract.  See also Chapter 9 of the
             Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual).

2.3.1.3       OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
             The facility shall meet the indoor air quality requirements described in Section 15 of this document. To
             address these requirements, the primary strategy for indoor air quality control is source control of
             outdoor pollutant sources. Effective source control requires that potential sources be clearly identified
             and addressed. The sources of air pollutants that must be considered are adjacent and nearby stationary
             pollution sources, for example, exhausts from other research facilities or from commercial buildings
             such as dry-cleaning establishments or restaurants, nearby roadways, parking lots, loading docks, trash
             storage, and garage and their motor vehicle traffic patterns. Consideration must be given to variations
             in the potential sources over time, including daily, weekly, and seasonal patterns.  Temporal and spatial
             variations in wind direction and velocity, traffic patterns, and emissions from industrial processes that
             affect air quality at the site must be  considered. The  locations and forms of adjacent buildings that
             might result in local wind patterns causing reentrainment of the facility's own exhausts must be
             considered and addressed. The potential impact that ponds, cooling towers,  cooling coil drip  pans, and
             other potential sites of microbial contamination may  have on IAQ must also  be considered. Previous
             land uses, such as agriculture or industry, might result in emissions from contaminated soil or
             groundwater as a potential source of indoor air pollutants. Some examples of potentially significant
             prior uses are wood preservation and treatment; solid or hazardous waste handling, storage, treatment,
             or disposal; dry-cleaning processes; leather, paint, or chemical manufacturing; refrigerated storage;
             gasoline storage  or dispensing; and  agriculture. Even nearby building demolition can result in
             significant site contamination through release of building materials such as asbestos into air or into soil,
             which may remain on-site  or be backfilled onto it. The design professional must include consideration
             of the following  factors:

                 •    Prior history of the site
                 •    Off-site and on-site sources of pollution
                 •    Soils and soil gases (including radon, organic chemicals, metals, and microbes)
                 •    Ambient air quality
                 •    Landscaping (including highly sporulating types of plantings).

2.3.2    SITE EVALUATION
        The ultimate purpose of the site evaluation is to provide EPA with sufficient pertinent data to allow a
        complete evaluation of the physical conditions  of the given project site.

2.3.2.1       SITE DATA COLLECTION
             Using the information developed above and in other  sources required by this document, the design
             professional shall consider planning and zoning criteria  for the subject property.  This consideration
             shall include the investigation of all potential site development regulations such as density limitations,
             building setbacks, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other development
             guidelines set forth in any  applicable campus, site, or facility master plan or  elsewhere in this
             document.

             An on-site investigation and review shall be conducted,  which shall include representatives of the
             client, the design professional, and the preconstruction testing and inspection company.  A site
             representative shall verify land features indicated on the survey.  Photographs shall be taken at various
             locations to provide a visual record  to aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.

2.3.2.2       SITE RESOURCE INVENTORY AND  ANALYSIS
             A site resource inventory and analysis shall be prepared, which shall include investigation of soil
             information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology  and drainage analysis, topographic and
             elevation analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site. A

                                                      2-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

             "buildable area" plan shall be developed by compiling information from the various analysis drawings.
             This plan shall indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction.  The site inventory and
             analysis shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

             •    The site overview will include, but will not be limited to, location, parcel delineation and acreage,
                 existing zoning, and adjoining land uses.

             •    Physical site characteristic analyses include, but are not limited to, slope analysis, elevation
                 analysis, existing vegetation identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site
                 analysis, buildable areas analysis, wetland  analysis, solar and shadow studies, and analysis of
                 prevailing winds.

             •    Utilities include, but are not limited to, stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer,
                 electrical power and communications, and  mechanical systems.

2.3.3     GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
         For permanent structures, subsurface conditions shall be determined by means of borings  or other methods
         that adequately disclose soil and groundwater conditions. Data obtained from previous subsurface
         investigations shall be used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are deemed
         necessary. Subsurface investigations shall be performed under the direction of a licensed professional
         geotechnical engineer. Groundwater levels must be  recorded when initially encountered and after they have
         been allowed to stabilize. In earthquake-prone areas, appropriate geological investigations  shall be made to
         determine the contribution of the foundation (subsurface) to the earthquake loads imposed on the structure.
         These investigations shall include, but shall not be limited to, a recommendation of foundation type,
         determinations of allowable soil bearing capacity, and assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity
         on the soil mass. A settlement analysis under different design loads shall be performed where differential
         settlement may cause structural, architectural, or any other type of building damage.

2.3.3.1       TESTING AND SAMPLING METHODS
             Testing and sampling shall comply with American Society for Testing and Materials  (ASTM)
             standards, including ASTM D-1586, ASTM D-1587, and ASTM D-2113.  Soil samples shall be taken
             below the  existing grade and at each change in  soil stratification or consistency. The depth of soil
             samples shall be determined by the geotechnical engineer after consultation with the project engineer
             on site-related design requirements.

2.3.3.2       TEST REPORTS
             All data required by ASTM or the other standard test methods used shall be obtained, recorded in the
             field, and referenced to boring numbers. Soil shall be visually classified in the field logs in accordance
             with ASTM D-2488, but the classification for final logs shall be based on the field information, results
             of tests,  and further inspection of samples in the laboratory by the geotechnical engineer preparing the
             report. At  a minimum, the report shall:

             •    Include a chart illustrating the  soil classification criteria and the terminology and symbols used in
                 the boring logs.

             •    Identify the ASTM or other recognized standard sampling and test methods used.

             •    Provide a plot plan giving dimensioned locations of test borings.

             •    Provide vertical sections plotted showing (1) material encountered, (2) reference to known datum,
                 (3) number of blows per linear foot  (N value), and (4) groundwater level for all holes where
                 groundwater is encountered. Data for groundwater shall include both the initial groundwater level
                 and the static groundwater level.

                                                     2-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                        Section 2 - Site Work

            •    Note the location of strata containing organic materials, weak materials, or other inconsistencies
                 that might affect engineering conclusions.

            •    Describe the existing  surface conditions.

            •    Summarize the subsurface conditions.

            •    Provide pavement structural design data, including results of California bearing ratio tests or
                 modulus of subgrade  reaction tests.

            •    Provide a profile and/or topographic map of rock or other bearing stratum.

            •    Analyze the probable variations in elevations and movements of subsurface water due to  seasonal
                 influences.

            •    Report all laboratory  determinations of soil properties, including shrinkage and expansion
                 properties.

2.3.4    GROUNDWATER INVESTIGATION
        A groundwater investigation shall be made before selection of a dewatering control system. The
        investigation shall examine the character of subsurface soils, groundwater conditions and quality, and the
        availability of an electric power source. The source of seepage  shall be determined and the boundaries and
        seepage flow characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site shall be analyzed in
        accordance with the mathematical, graphic, and electroanalogous methods discussed in Technical  Manual
        5-818-5, Dewatering and Groundwater Control (November 1 983), U.S. Army Corp of Engineers. Field
        reports identifying groundwater elevations and other relevant features should be provided to the
        construction contractor responsible for dewatering and groundwater investigation.


2.4    Site Development

2.4.1    SURVEYING
        The following surveys must be conducted, and the following survey documentation provided, for each site.

2.4.1.1      GENERAL
            Construction,  control, property, and topographic surveys shall be conducted in coordination with the
            appropriate EPA authority and the Project Architect/Engineer. Where feasible, surveying support
            available from EPA contractors shall be used. Survey field notes shall be legibly recorded on standard
            (8!/2-by-l 1-inch) field-note forms. Field notes and final plots of surveys shall be furnished to  the
            appropriate EPA authority. Any boundary surveys and recorded maps shall be forwarded to the
            appropriate EPA authority.

            The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent
            with the nature and importance of each survey.  Surveys shall conform to the requirements of
            applicable local and state  statutes), and shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a
            professional land surveyor registered in the state in which the subject site is situated.

2.4.1.2      SURVEY CONTROL
            The appropriate EPA authority shall be responsible for establishing, recording, and perpetuating
            primary on-site horizontal and vertical control monumentation. In addition, the appropriate EPA
            authority shall be responsible for correlating primary site-specific horizontal and vertical
            monumentation with that of other appropriate agencies. All surveying and mapping shall conform to
                                                    2-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                          July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
            the standards listed in Table 2.4.1.2, Survey Standards and/or state survey standards, whichever are
            more stringent.

 Table 2.4.1.2 Survey Standards	
 Survey Standard
Survey Type
 TEC-1110-1-147
 ETL-1110-1-150
 EM-1110-1-1000
 EM-1110-1-1001
 EM-1110-1-1002
 EM-1110-1-1003
 EM-1110-1-1005

 EM-1110-1-1006
 EM-1110-2-1003
 EM-1110-1-1807
CORPS Construction
Global Positioning System (GPS)/Dredging
Photogrammetry
Geodetic control
Monumentation
GPS control
Topographic and field supervision and maintenance
[FY-94]
Land boundary [FY-95]
Hydrographic survey
Computer-aided drafting design (CADD) (volumes 1-4)
2.4.1.3  MONUMENTATION
            Requirements with respect to monumentation are as follows.

2.4.1.3.1         TEMPORARY CONTROL
                For temporary control monuments:

                •   Where the scope and complexity of the project warrants, the placement, number, and location
                    of temporary horizontal and vertical control monuments in new development areas shall be
                    coordinated with the existing system and approved.

                •   A minimum of two intervisible control monuments shall be placed along, or adjacent to, right-
                    of-way lines. These temporary control monuments shall be tied to an established grid. The
                    surveyor who sets such monumentation shall submit legible notes,  drawings, and reproducible
                    documentation to the appropriate EPA authority. The location and construction of all
                    temporary monuments in the immediate vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the
                    construction drawings.

                •   Temporary control monuments shall be 5/8-inch-diameter mild steel bars or 3/4-inch-diameter
                    iron pipe with a minimum length of 2 feet or plastic hubs.  These monuments shall be set flush
                    with, or within 0.2 feet of, the ground surface. Manhole rims, markings chiseled in concrete,
                    PK  nails in asphalt, and lead and tack in bedrock shall be suitable as alternative  temporary
                    monumentation when approved.

                •   Three guard posts with reflective-paint striping shall be installed adjacent to temporary control
                    monuments in high-traffic areas to prevent vehicular damage. Temporary control monuments
                    shall be set in conformance with the accuracy standards of the U.S. Corps of Engineers.

2.4.1.3.2         PERMANENT  CONTROL
                For permanent control monuments:

                •   The placement, number, and location of permanent survey monuments for horizontal and
                    vertical control shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the appropriate EPA authority.
                                                   2-7

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 2 - Site Work

                     The location and description of the nearest permanent survey monument shall be provided on
                     construction drawings. These monuments shall be tied to an established state plane coordinate
                     system.

                •    Any surveyor who sets a permanent survey monument shall submit legible notes, sketches, or
                     other reproducible documentation that shows the location of the new monument relative to the
                     on-site horizontal and vertical control network, to the applicable state plane coordinate
                     system, to the North American Datum (NAD) of 1983, and to the National Geodetic Vertical
                     Datum (NGVD) of 1929. The convergence, scale factor, and elevation on the monument shall
                     also be shown.

                •    Permanent survey monuments shall be considered properly positioned and represented only
                     after the appropriate EPA authority has approved all survey procedures and calculations and
                     has verified conformance to the Corps of Engineers standards and specifications.

                •    Permanent survey monuments shall be identified as prescribed by Corps of Engineers
                     standards.

                •    These identification numbers shall be documented within the  survey field notes and shown on
                     the design drawings and within related documents.  Temporary point identification for
                     permanent survey monuments may be assigned by the surveyor; however, permanent point
                     identification shall only be  assigned to such monuments by the appropriate EPA authority.
                     Permanent survey monuments shall not be removed without prior authorization from the
                     appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.1.3.3        BENCHMARKS
                For benchmarks:

                •    A minimum of one permanent benchmark for vertical control shall be established in each new
                     development area. A minimum of three benchmarks shall be established if there are no
                     existing benchmarks within a 3-mile radius of each new development area.  Elevations shall be
                     referenced to the North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) of 1983 or to the NGVD of 1929.
                     Level section misclosures between fixed benchmark elevations  shall equal or exceed third-
                     order accuracy, as defined in the Federal Geodetic Control Committee  (FGCC) Standards and
                     Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks.

                •    Permanent benchmarks shall be identified in the same manner as permanent survey
                     monuments. Permanent benchmarks shall not be removed without prior approval by the
                     appropriate EPA authority. The location and description of all benchmarks in the immediate
                     vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the  construction drawings.

2.4.1.3.4        UTILITY, ROADWAY, AND PARKING AREA SURVEYS
                Surveys of utilities, roadways, and parking areas shall be conducted according to the following
                requirements:

                •    Coordinates and elevations shall be determined for utilities, roads, and parking areas at their
                     principal points of definition. This information shall be provided on the construction drawings.
                     The principal points of definition for utility systems shall be utility poles, obstructions,
                     manholes, valve boxes, culverts, and other appurtenances for heating and cooling lines,
                     sewers, and overhead and underground power and telephone systems.

                •    Principal points of definition for potable water, and natural gas, distribution systems shall be
                     valve boxes, main line intersects, elbows, and fire hydrants.

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

                 •    The principal points of definition for roads shall be roadway centerline intersects. Road
                     alignment surveys shall include stationing, bearings, and curve information tied to these
                     principal points of definition. Where applicable, the following information shall also be
                     provided on the construction drawings:

                         Stations and  deflection angles for each point of intersection.
                         Right-of-way lines and markers.
                         Spot elevations (centerline, edge of pavement, and at intersects) at maximum intervals of
                         100 feet.
                         Other improvements (e.g.,  drainage inlets, wheelchair ramps, fire hydrants, sidewalks, and
                         curb and gutter).
                         Topographic features within project limits.
                         Elevation contours.
                         Overhead and underground utility crossings (plan and profile).
                         Roadway drainage crossings.
                         Location and description of underground utility witness markers.

2.4.1.3.5         UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
                 Where exact routes of underground  utilities are not defined within record  drawings, the appropriate
                 EPA authority shall coordinate necessary electronic line detection and exploratory excavation
                 activities.  Such utilities shall be located by survey and documented on the construction drawings.

2.4.1.3.6         CONSTRUCTION STAKING
                 Construction staking for new EPA facilities shall comply with local standards and with practices
                 approved by the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.2     SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
         In the development of a site proposed for construction, it is necessary, at a minimum, to address, analyze,
         and assess all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Site
         Planning and Landscape Design,  GSA document PBS-P100,  as applicable.

2.4.2.1      IMPACT
            The following  issues are to be studied in assessing the impact of a project on a given site or the man-
            made or natural environment:

            •    On-site capacities of present and future utilities

            •    Existing buildings (discussion shall  include any need for temporary facilities and services to these
                 buildings)

            •    Existing site utilities (discussion shall include any need for utility relocation and shutdown)

            •    Stormwater run-off, wastewater discharge (including acid wastewater)

            •    Existing traffic  patterns  and vehicles, including emergency and service vehicles

            •    Availability and proximity of public transportation

            •    Need for traffic phasing and control-plan requirements

            •    Existing parking structures and surface parking (discussion shall include any need for temporary
                 parking areas and additional capacity)
                                                     2-9

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 2 - Site Work

             •    Exhaust discharge

             •    Energy usage (e.g., building placement/orientation, sun and shadow, analysis of prevailing wind
                 patterns)

             •    Need for an environmental impact statement.

2.4.2.2       DEVELOPMENT
             The following issues must be taken into account in determining whether the proposed development is
             appropriate and compatible with  its natural environment and surrounding community.

             •    Preserving  surrounding neighborhoods and communities.  Laboratory facilities shall be located in
                 areas where local zoning permits; however, facilities  should be no less than one-quarter mile from
                 existing residential developments and shall be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not
                 direct fumes exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments.

             •    Preserving  the character of the site, to the maximum possible extent, by retaining natural features,
                 such as ground forms, trees,  and other natural vegetation.

             •    Using the existing site to best advantage by locating and orienting buildings so that they are
                 compatible with natural site  features.

             •    Developing functional relationships between site access points,  parking lots, buildings, service
                 areas, and all other project site elements.

             •    Providing for orderly future  expansion of facilities by considering logical expansion of buildings,
                 parking, and support services.

             •    Reviewing  and assessing the impact of development with respect to any approved campus master
                 plan and site infrastructure master plan.

2.4.2.3       DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
             The following issues must be considered in planning any EPA  facility or site.

2.4.2.3.1         ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
                 Sun angles, light and shadow studies, prevailing winds, existing topography, microclimatic
                 conditions, and major wooded areas shall be carefully analyzed to contribute to a more energy-
                 efficient solution.  Energy conservation should be enhanced by careful consideration and
                 evaluation of the orientation of buildings. Climate assets should be maximized and climate
                 liabilities minimized

2.4.2.3.2         VIEWS
                 Proper orientation of facilities to capitalize on major vistas is strongly encouraged. Views into the
                 site from major roadways  should be carefully designed to be attractive and reflective of EPA's
2.4.2.3.3         TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE
                 A design shall be provided that works with, and not against, the existing grades.  Significant
                 positive drainage away from any existing or new construction is a primary concern.  The design
                 shall preserve, as much as is practical, any major existing drainage patterns.

                 •    The natural grades of the site should be used to develop multilevel entry points, if possible.
                     Positive drainage away from all portions of the building is required.

                                                     2-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

                 •    The location of the 100-year floodplain shall be determined, and if this is present on the site,
                     the boundaries should be delineated on all surveys and site plans.

                 •    The impact of development on stormwater runoff must be assessed, including absorption and
                     retention..

2.4.2.3.4         ADJACENT LAND USE
                 In siting a facility, consideration should be given to existing land uses or potential development
                 nearby, because such land use may affect or restrict the facility design. Existing and proposed
                 traffic patterns shall be considered in the design  of site access and driveway locations.

2.4.2.3.5         NOISE, FUMES, AND ODORS
                 Adjacent land uses may contribute noise, fumes, and odors; these uses shall be considered in the
                 site development process.  Noise or odors may be severe enough to disqualify a site from
                 consideration; therefore, a thorough analysis of neighboring facilities must be undertaken to ensure
                 compatibility of the proposed facility with the existing adjacent land uses and environment.

2.4.2.3.6         VIBRATION
                 If there are adjacent land uses that produce vibrations that can be measured on a proposed site, the
                 extent of the vibration and whether it will affect  the proposed program shall be determined.

2.4.2.4       HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
             All applicable publicly available documents shall be  reviewed for any on-site historical or
             archaeological information.  Any public record indicating historically or archaeologically sensitive
             areas on-site must be reported to EPA before any design is initiated. Archaeologically and historically
             sensitive areas on-site must be  completely avoided until, and after, a thorough investigation has been
             completed and findings documented that provide direction on whether the area(s) in question may be
             used or must be preserved for future exploration.

2.4.2.5       COMMUNITY ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
             Environmental justice issues, as established by EPA, shall be addressed and the requirements of any
             required community review processes ascertained. A report shall be provided to EPA early in the
             design process and well before any community review is required on the project.  All community
             reviews  are over and above any EPA design review; reviews shall not be combined. Requirements  of
             community review panels may  include, but are not limited to, the following:

             •    Separate plans prepared to specifically highlight or emphasize that group's concern.

             •    Research and data collection to be used in generating special reports and in the environmental
                 assessment.

             •    Presentation graphics for a formal submission or presentation during the review process.

             •    Documentation of the review and approval process, submission requirements, deadlines for  each
                 portion of the process, and the sequence that must be followed.

             •    Identification of the methodologies, research, and data needed to identify and evaluate populations
                 at disproportionately high  environmental or human health risks and to ensure that these needs are
                 considered in developing any EPA facility.

2.4.3     FACILITY  SITING
         This subsection addresses facility siting issues and requirements.
                                                    2-11

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                         Section 2 - Site Work

2.4.3.1       GENERAL
             A site development plan shall be used to locate new facilities on existing or new sites in order to ensure
             effective site utilization and avoid future conflicts between existing and new facilities.

             •    During facility siting, an environmental assessment shall be prepared before the initiation of a
                 Government action that may significantly affect the environment.

             •    To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited in floodplains  or in areas subject to flash floods;
                 facility siting shall minimize destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands.

             •    In selecting the particular site on an acquired or predetermined campus style site for new facilities,
                 the conditions and requirements of Section 3.2.2 of the Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines
                 and the following shall be considered:

                     Programmatic and operating efficiency.
                     Endemic plant and animal species.
                     Past use of site and existence of known Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
                     and/or Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA)
                     sites.
                     Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements.
                     Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils and contamination from
                     other exterior sources, natural or man-made).
                     Hazardous operations and consequences of potential accidents in adjacent facilities.
                     Wave action within any natural or man-made body of water (in accordance with the Coastal
                     Engineering Research Center [CERC] Shore Protection Manual).
                     Energy conservation requirements.

2.4.3.2       LABORATORY SITING
             New laboratories, EPA owned and leased, should be sited in consideration of the following guidance.

             •    Guidance from Criteria for Siting of Laboratory Facilities Based on Safety and Environmental
                 Factors, prepared for EPA by Johns Hopkins University, School of Hygiene and Public Health,
                 Peter S. J.  Lees and Morton Corn.

             •    Site acquisition methodology as prescribed in the Environmental Closure Process for EPA
                 Laboratories chapter of the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Guidelines.

             •    Local zoning code.

             •    Indoor air quality criteria referenced in  Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.

             •    Location shall be  large enough to accommodate the laboratory building and outbuildings
                 (hazardous materials building) with adequate setbacks meeting local requirements and RCRA
                 requirements.

             •    Laboratories preferably shall be located in light industrial areas where there are provisions for
                 containing accidental spills prior to discharge to the local stormwater system and in areas that have
                 fully staffed emergency response personnel (fire and medical), including hazardous materials
                 (HAZMAT) teams.

             •    Laboratories shall not be located in residential areas or in mixed-occupancy high rise locations.
                                                    2-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

2.4.3.3   BUILDING LOCATION
            New buildings and building additions shall be located in accordance with the site development plan.

2.4.3.3.1         OPEN SPACE
                 Open space shall be provided between structures to accommodate site security, landscaping, and
                 other environmental considerations. Sufficient access shall be provided around building exteriors
                 to accommodate emergency vehicles, maintenance vehicles, and snow removal equipment.  In cold
                 climates, building entrances, stairs, and other pedestrian circulation features should not be placed
                 along the north  side of buildings or within shaded areas.  Off-site drainage areas and the
                 environmental impacts that proposed stormwater management practices will have on surrounding
                 properties shall  also be carefully reviewed.

2.4.3.3.2         CONDITIONS  AND REQUIREMENTS
                 The following conditions and requirements shall be considered during site selection for new
                 buildings:

                 •    Architectural and functional compatibility with the environment
                 •    Operation and service function relationships
                 •    Natural and humanistic orientation and wayfinding
                 •    Natural topographic and geologic conditions
                 •    Existing cultural and archaeological resources
                 •    Historic sites
                 •    Abandoned mines or wells and potential for subsidence
                 •    Endemic plant and animal species
                 •    Availability of existing utility services
                 •    Building setback requirements
                 •    Availability of existing road systems and public transportation
                 •    Traffic volume
                 •    Refuse handling and loading zone requirements
                 •    Adequacy for parking, future expansion, and other land use requirements
                 •    Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements
                 •    Physical protection requirements
                 •    Security and safeguard requirements
                 •    Energy conservation requirements
                 •    Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils)
                 •    Impact of site selection
                 •    Minimum fire separation between buildings (in accordance with National Fire Protection
                     Association [NFPA] 80A)
                     Utilities.

2.4.3.4      HAZARD SEGREGATION
            In general, occupancies posing different levels of risk shall be separated by fire-resistive construction.
            Areas shall be segregated as noted below and as required by local building codes and NFPA 101.

2.4.3.4.1         PARKING STRUCTURES
                 The construction, protection, and control of hazards in parking structures shall comply with the
                 requirements  of NFPA 8 8 A.  Parking garages located within buildings that contain other
                 occupancies shall be separated from the remainder of the building by construction that has a fire
                 resistance of at least 2 hours.  Entrances between garages and elevators shall be protected by a
                 vestibule having a 1 !/2-hour, Class B or higher fire door. Doorways between garages and stairs,
                 building corridors, or other non-garage areas shall be protected by  IVi-hour, Class B or higher fire
                 doors. The garage ventilation system must be designed as a separate entity from the main building
                 and from the occupied spaces, with the exhaust from the garage directed outside.  No recirculation

                                                    2-13

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                         Section 2 - Site Work

                 of air is allowed in garages.  In garages located under buildings, elevator vestibules shall be
                 positively pressurized to prevent garage vapors from entering the occupied areas.

2.4.3.5       BUFFER ZONES
             The buffer zone between the EPA facility and other existing or potential sites for building(s) shall be
             no less than 100 feet. Hazardous materials storage facilities (HMSF) shall be at least 50 feet away
             from any building or potential sites for building(s).  Both the main facility and the HMSF shall be
             located at least 50 feet away from the property line.  Existing highways and streets can be part of the
             100-foot buffer zone. Paved parking area(s) for vehicles can be considered as part of the building
             buffer zone.

2.4.4    SITE PREPARATION
        Local topography shall be considered during project and  facility design. New facilities shall be planned to
        fit the  local topography and to require a minimum amount of grading.  Design shall include provisions for
        erosion control and soil stabilization in ditches, fill slopes, embankments, and denuded areas, and
        restoration of areas disturbed by the project. Restoration shall be to original or improved conditions.

2.4.4.1       DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
             Site preparation design shall meet the following criteria:

             •    Vehicle parking, sidewalks, and road requirements  shall comply with subsection 2.6 of this Manual

             •    Site drainage design shall comply with  subsection 2.7 of this  Manual

             •    Site power and lighting shall comply with Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

             •    Site security requirements shall be taken into account and  provided for in accordance with criteria
                 established by the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.5    DEWATERING
        The design, installation, and operation of dewatering systems for groundwater control shall be the
        responsibility of the construction contractor, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The groundwater
        investigation and the selection and design of a dewatering control system shall comply with TM 5-81 8-5
        and consider recharge beds and retention basins. The design engineer shall determine whether the
        assistance of a qualified groundwater hydrologist shall be required.

2.4.6    SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
        All shoring and underpinning shall comply with the safety requirements of CFR Part 1926, Subpart P.
        Remedial underpinning shall be performed where existing foundations are inadequate.  Precautionary
        underpinning  shall be performed where new construction adjacent to an existing structure requires deeper
        excavation. A structural engineer specializing in underpinning shall perform any underpinning design,
        which  shall comply with the principles in Winterkorn and Fang, Foundation Engineering Handbook.

2.4.7    EARTHWORK
        Earthwork includes excavation, filling, stabilizing, and compaction of earth at the site. Earthwork also
        includes the addition of borrow and the disposal of excavated material.  The earthwork design shall
        incorporate the findings of the geotechnical report required by subsection 2.3.3 of this Manual.

2.4.8    WATERFRONT CONSTRUCTION
        Waterfront construction includes seawalls, docks, marinas, and other ancillary boating facilities associated
        with coastal development.  This type of construction for EPA facilities shall comply with applicable federal,
        state, and local standards and with practices  approved by the appropriate EPA authority.
                                                    2-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

2.5     Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements

2.5.1     GENERAL
         Landscape planning, design, and development must be integrated with building massing, design, and
         materials.  The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a single
         design that integrates site and buildings(s). The use of durable exterior materials that enhance both the site
         landscaping and the building design and help to integrate the two design disciplines is strongly encouraged.

         If the facility is to be a part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned
         development, the landscape design as well as the building design must be integrated and compatible with
         the style(s) of the previously constructed permanent facilities on campus.  The existing physical features of
         the site and surrounding buildings shall be observed and documented.

         •   The landscaping of the site shall create an environmentally sensitive and aesthetically attractive design.
            The natural environment should blend with the proposed new construction.

         •   Landscaped courts and open spaces that are accessible to all staff are encouraged.

         •   Grass-covered areas away from public view shall be provided and equipped as outside eating and
            visiting areas (with picnic tables, benches, and landscape furnishings).

         •   The facility surroundings shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, flowering plants, and grass in a way
            that will enhance the aesthetic character of the building(s) and hide or screen exposed equipment and
            building parts, features, or functions that, by their nature, are not aesthetically pleasant. Vegetation
            may be used to screen, or form a barrier to, particulate matter and to protect the building(s) from motor
            vehicle pollutant sources.

         •   Using trees and vegetation to shade large hardscape areas, such as parking lots and summer sun
            building exposures, is encouraged.

         •   The topography of the site around the building(s) shall slope away from the building(s) and away from
            neighboring building(s) to direct any water away from the new facility and from any neighboring
            building(s).

         •   Xeriscape design practices (use of sustainable local/regional vegetation requiring minimal watering)
            shall be used to  minimize maintenance of the plantings.  Use of irrigated turf grass in new landscape
            design shall be prohibited.

         •   In general, low-maintenance landscape design and features shall be used. High efficiency irrigation,
            and/or the use of captured rainwater is encouraged where irrigation is necessary.

         •   Energy efficient exterior lighting with low-voltage or solar powered is encouraged.

2.5.2     PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR SITE DESIGN
         All site landscaping shall be designed by a state-registered landscape architect. This landscape architect
         must maintain his or her registration  continuously and without break for at least the entire design and
         construction process and for the life of the design contract for the project.

         •   All site landscaping shall be installed and/or modified by a professional landscaper or professional
            gardener. All landscaping (plants and grass), except for annuals, if used, shall be guaranteed for 16
            months after acceptance by EPA.
                                                    2-15

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 2 - Site Work

        •    All costs for the landscaping shall be anticipated in the final cost estimate. These costs shall be
             included in the overall costs of the project.  Such costs shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
             following:

                 Retaining curbs and walls
                 Plantings and grasses
                 Exterior  signage and graphics
                 Site furniture and furnishings
                 Irrigation
                 Site hardscape and special pavings
                 Warranties and guarantees
                 Exterior  screens and barriers
                 Specialty features incorporated into the design
                 Maintenance guarantees
                 Site lighting
                 Site sculpture.

2.5.3    GENERAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
        All landscaping and site amenities for the proposed development shall be in accordance with all applicable
        local, state, and federal codes and  industry standards. Also, landscaping and site amenities shall comply
        with any master plan or campus design requirements and all construction requirements and standards.  The
        more stringent requirements shall be used if a conflict exists.

2.5.3.1       EXISTING CONDITIONS
             The landscape architect shall  (1) preserve existing trees and undergrowth, where appropriate,  for
             buffers; (2) review buffer requirements of the local community; and (3) use existing trees to the extent
             possible, since the larger size will provide greater immediate impact on-site.

2.5.3.2       PLANTINGS
             Guidelines on plantings are as follows:

             •    Establish functional design criteria.
             •    Consider focal or entry area; design main entry area to produce an obvious sense of arrival at
                 facility
             •    Create views or screen views as needed.
             •    Develop  color and seasonal  interest.
             •    Provide orientation (e.g., with respect to sun and wind) for facility and creation of shade.
             •    Consider ultimate size and scale relative to specific area or site size.
             •    Consider site-appropriate formal planting plan or informal, naturalistic plan.
             •    Avoid major plantings in areas where expansion is planned.
             •    Provide appropriate location of plantings relative to prevailing wind and sun.
             •    Break up large areas of pavement with  landscape islands.
             •    Choose local/regional plants and design plantings to be tolerant of climate, weather conditions,
                 rainfall, and other environmental conditions.
             •    Determine irrigation requirements.
             •    Determine maintenance requirements such as fertilization rates, soil acidity, and, if required,
                 pruning and trimming needs.
             •    Coordinate plantings with location of signs, light standards, hydrants, underground utilities, and
                 other man-made structures.
             •    Ensure that lawns slope to provide proper  drainage (minimum  1 percent grade).
             •    Provide ground cover on severe slopes  for aesthetic and maintenance considerations.
                                                     2-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

             •    Planting must be reviewed and approved by the appropriate EPA personnel.  The landscaping plan
                 shall identify the names, caliper sizes, and number of trees, shrubs, and all other plantings in the
                 plan.

2.5.3.3       SITE FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS
             Guidelines for choosing and locating site furniture and furnishings are as follows:

             •    Select furniture design to complement the building theme
             •    Use materials with recycled content as designated in the CPG, with an emphasis on sustainability
                 and longevity
             •    Determine quantity and location of furniture
             •    Establish function intended for seating and waiting areas, outdoor meeting areas, and eating areas
             •    Determine flag pole heights, location, and quantity and integrate into the design
             •    Locate fences and identify their style, color, and purpose
             •    Integrate trash and recycling receptacles, cigarette urns, newspaper dispenser boxes, and mailboxes
                 into the design
             •    Include safety review of proposed surfaces, equipment, and layout of programmed recreational  and
                 playground equipment.

2.5.3.4       SITE LIGHTING
             The following guidelines apply to site lighting:

             •    Design lighting to complement the architectural and land planning theme and to accord with any
                 current master plan or campus requirements.

             •    Utilize energy-efficient and easily maintainable fixture types (the selection of lighting fixtures must
                 consider long-term costs).

             •    Heights of lighting standards must be appropriate to  the scale of the building and the area being lit.

             •    Provide lighting intensity that is commensurate with the use of the area and the health and safety of
                 employees and other persons accessing the building during non-daylight hours.

             •    Control light with respect to adjacent property and to minimize glare, striving for zero  direct beam
                 illumination leaving the building site.

2.5.3.5       EXTERIOR  SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
             Considerations with respect to exterior signage are:

             •    Appropriate scale
             •    Viewing angle and speed of observer
             •    Appropriate color and letter style and clarity of message
             •    Appropriate locations for signage, including intersections, parking lots, and  entries
             •    Design that complements the building style, accent color, or building color
             •    Clear identification of functions: traffic direction, orientation, and general information
             •    Coordination of building identification at site entries with that on the buildings  themselves;
                 identification should be strong, legible, and compatible with interior signage and graphics
             •    Compliance with signage ordinances  (such compliance is required)
             •    Providing special identification for the project, if required
             •    Signage must be reviewed and approved by appropriate EPA personnel
             •    Designing exterior signage to allow future removal and change without damage to existing exterior
                 materials and to allow possible reuse of the signage after its removal and/or reuse of the lettering
                 of the removed signage.

                                                    2-17

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                        Section 2 - Site Work

2.5.3.6      OUTSIDE SERVICE AND UTILITY AREAS
            Many elements are necessary for the proper operation of a building.  Some are visually undesirable and
            require proper planning for screening and buffering, which should be incorporated into the building
            design. The design professional is responsible for coordinating the work of all disciplines and for
            identifying all elements of the proposed project that will have a visual impact.  The following are
            among the items that may require  appropriate screening and buffering:

            •    Meters
                 Vaults
            •    Transformers
            •    Dump sters
            •    Recycling containers
            •    Compactor units
            •    Emergency generators
            •    High pressure gas cylinder storage and manifold systems
            •    Pressure reducers
            •    Valves
            •    Pump hoses
            •    Outdoor storage areas
            •    Loading docks
            •    Mechanical equipment
            •    Compressors and cooling towers.

2.5.4    HARDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
        Hardscape (paving) and hardscape materials shall be integrated with the building and architectural planning
        and with landscaping design and concept.  In general, materials that soften typical hardscape (paving)
        designs shall be used. Light colored, high albedo, hardscape materials shall be considered to reduce the
        absorption and radiation of heat. Use  of porous pavement materials is encouraged where feasible.
        Appropriate material usage shall be  integrated with an understanding of project budget and public versus
        restricted access and use areas.

2.5.5    RECREATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
        Recreational site requirements shall  be reviewed with EPA on a project-by-project basis.

2.5.6    IRRIGATION
        Water efficient irrigation methods, such as drip irrigation systems and low-flow bubblers, shall be utilized
        where supplemental moisture is required. All irrigation systems shall be equipped with automatic
        controllers that activate the system according to a desired frequency and duration, and shall be equipped
        with rain or soil moisture sensors that will prevent irrigation during periods of rainfall or when there is
        sufficient moisture in the ground for plant health and survival. Use of reclaimed water and/or stormwater for
        landscape irrigation is acceptable and  encouraged.
2.6    Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement

2.6.1    ACCESS AND CIRCULATION
        Although visual and other aesthetic aspects of access to the project site, and thus to the project facilities, are
        critical, the primary access requirements involve fire and life safety.  The most current version of the Safety
        Manual shall be reviewed for these guidelines.  Either traffic data will be provided or a traffic impact
        analysis will be performed. Geometric design of all roads, streets, access drives, and parking areas shall
        comply with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) GDHS-84.
        Gradients for roads, streets, and access drives also shall comply with AASHTO GDHS-84.  Road and street
                                                    2-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

         grade changes in excess of 1 percent shall be accomplished by means of vertical curves.  The length of
         vertical curves shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO GDHS-84. Roadway centerline gradient
         profiles shall be shown for vertical control.

         •    Design and details of construction of flexible and rigid pavements shall comply with the local state
             highway department standards. Concrete valley gutters may be provided if swales with flexible
             pavements are necessary.  Joint layout plans and details shall be provided for all rigid pavements. A
             thickened edge shall be used along edges of rigid pavement where future construction will occur.

         •    Design should promote logical wayfinding.

         •    Signs, pavement markings, channelization, and other traffic control measures shall comply with the
             requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
             Devices.

2.6.1.1       FIRE DEPARTMENT APPARATUS ACCESS
             Fire department access involves fire department apparatus and on-site fixed fire safety equipment (e.g.,
             fire hydrants, fire loops, fire pumps, post-indicator valves, automatic sprinkler  and standpipe system
             connections), vehicular circulation, pedestrian circulation, and parking. Local  codes, ordinances and
             fire department requirements must be reviewed to provide adequate access. The following minimum
             requirements shall be met:

             •    All new buildings shall have at least two sides readily accessible to fire department apparatus at all
                 times.

             •    Fire lanes shall be provided for buildings that are set back more than 150 feet from a road or that
                 exceed 30  feet in height and are set back more than 50 feet from a road.

             •    Fire lanes shall be at least 20 feet wide, and the road edge closest to the building shall be at least
                 10 feet from the building.

             •    The minimum roadway turning radius shall conform to a 48-foot semitrailer template.

             •    Fire lanes shall be constructed of an all-weather driving surface capable of supporting imposed
                 loads of 25 tons. If appropriate for the area and climate, these lanes may consist of compacted
                 earth with  top soil and seed.

             •    Any dead-end road more than 300 feet long shall be provided with a turnaround at the closed end
                 of at least 90 feet in diameter.

             •    Fire lanes and access areas for fire hydrants and automatic sprinkler or standpipe connections shall
                 be clearly identified by painting the curbs yellow, with black lettering reading "NO PARKING -
                 FIRE LANE" spaced at 40-foot intervals.  In addition, signage carrying the same message shall  be
                 posted at 100-foot intervals along the restricted area.

2.6.1.2       VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
             Vehicular circulation design shall comply with the following requirements and  guidelines:

             •    Vehicular circulation shall be designed in accordance with code requirements and any overall
                 campus master plan or facilities master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.  Circulation
                 shall respect the pedestrian circulation environment of the campus and/or facilities and provide for
                 safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians.  Existing traffic studies shall be evaluated and
                 coordinated in order to implement the best possible overall circulation system.

                                                    2-19

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                         Section 2 - Site Work

             •    Vehicular access to a new project shall be evaluated with respect to existing and planned site
                 circulation and shall provide for clear separation of staff, visitor, service, and bus vehicular
                 circulation.

             •    Adequate emergency vehicle access shall be provided to all points on the building periphery by use
                 of proper grades, surface materials, clearances, and other design features.

             •    Entrances to the facility or campus shall be  clearly marked and located so that access to each
                 building, parking area, group of buildings, and service area is convenient and recognizable.

             •    The siting of new buildings shall take into account the requirements of future expansion, design of
                 buildings, roads, and surface and structured parking.

             •    Site vehicular design shall provide adequate space for queuing  at drop-offs and exit drives for
                 visitors, buses, 18-wheel vehicles, taxis,  and other vehicle types, keeping turning conflicts to a
                 minimum and permitting proper service vehicle maneuvering and staging.

             •    Internal drive aisle widths and turning radii  shall be designed to allow for the expected service and
                 emergency vehicles.

             •    Loop circulation is encouraged to minimize site traffic backup.

2.6.2    PARKING AND LOADING FACILITIES
        Parking areas should not be located in front of buildings or at visually prominent locations along routes of
        approach.  Landscaping, grading, and location shall emphasize attractive features and de-emphasize or
        obscure undesirable features.  Parking and its related circulation shall be separated from the service
        circulation to minimize conflicts.  Parking lots shall meet local governmental standards for circulation,
        layout, and safety. Handicapped parking allocations shall comply with ADA guidelines.  Perimeter
        concrete curbs and gutters shall be considered for all parking areas and access  drives in built-up areas. In
        remote or little-used areas, concrete curbs and gutters shall be used only when  required to control drainage.
        Removable prefabricated concrete wheel stops may be used where appropriate. Specific parking design
        guidelines are presented in the following subsection.

2.6.2.1       PARKING DESIGN
             Parking for the proposed development shall be based on applicable  codes  for occupancy, local zoning
             requirements, and any campus or facility master plan in effect at the subject site. If the parking
             required by codes falls under 25 cars per  10,000 gross square feet of the facility, a more detailed
             analysis shall be made to verify that adequate parking is provided. If local codes require more parking
             spaces, the more stringent requirements shall apply.  As part of the site development phase, multilevel
             parking garages or below-ground parking shall be  considered as an  alternative to surface parking. At a
             minimum, the following guidelines shall be followed:

             •    Distribution of total parking (e.g., employee [by type], police, emergency vehicle, visitor,
                 handicapped, motorcycle, bicycle) shall be calculated and clearly shown in the site development
                 phase.  The minimum size for standard passenger car stalls shall be 9  feet x 19 feet. Up to  15
                 percent of the parking may be designated for compact cars.  Stalls  for compact cars shall be at least
                 8 feet x  18 feet. Car-pool policies should be considered in the  calculation (and given preferential
                 locations.)

             •    The structural design for pavement on surface lots shall comply with local state highway
                 department standards for general parking areas.
                                                    2-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

             •    Parking aisles and lots subject to frequent truck traffic shall be evaluated to determine whether
                 thicker pavement sections are required.

             •    Design calculations shall provide for a potential growth in staff of 10 percent.  Provision shall also
                 be made for expansion of the facility, with the design for future parking expansion shown.

             •    Alternate fuel refueling station should be considered on a facility-by-facility basis.

             •    Parking areas must be clearly related to entry points.  Walking distances should be kept to a
                 minimum.

             •    Handicapped parking  spaces shall be provided in accordance with ADA requirements or the
                 requirements of  state  codes and ordinances if these are more restrictive.

             •    Sufficient slope (1  percent minimum) shall be provided for positive drainage for runoff. Slopes
                 shall be no more than  4 percent.

             •    Sufficient open lawn area shall be allowed adjacent to parking lots for snow storage, as required by
                 climate and area.

             •    Wherever possible, 90-degree parking design should be used.

             •    Porous paving and/or recharge beds under parking should be considered, retaining the maximum
                 amount of on-site storm  drainage.

             •    Surface drainage in parking areas must not cross designated pedestrian paths.

             •    Dead-end parking bays are not allowed.

             •    Existing large trees should be integrated into new parking areas, where feasible.

             •    Except in remote or little-used areas, parking areas should provide curbs (consistent with site
                 design) with a minimum 2-foot overhang behind the curb.

2.6.2.2       BICYCLE FACILITIES
             Convenient bicycle parking facilities shall be included at all facilities, except those in remote areas.
             Suitable means for securing the bikes must be provided, sheltered/covered areas are encouraged. The
             capacity should be based on local conditions but a minimum capacity of 5% of the buildings's
             occupants is suggested, which is commensurate with LEED™ requirements.

2.6.3     PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
         A functional system of walks connecting structures, operational areas, parking areas, streets, and other
         access paths shall be provided to meet the demands of pedestrian traffic. The location and width of these
         areas and paths shall be determined in accordance with the site development plan. Walks  subject to use by
         the physically disabled shall comply with current ADA guidelines. Specific guidelines for the design of
         pedestrian walkways are prescribed in the following subsection.

2.6.3.1       DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS
             Pedestrian circulation shall be designed in accordance with industry standards, code requirements, and
             any overall campus master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.

             •    Pedestrian walks shall have a minimum of 1 percent cross pitch for drainage.
                                                    2-21

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 2 - Site Work

             •    The width of walks shall be a function of pedestrian traffic volumes determined by the master plan
                 and/or by specific project requirements.

             •    Walks shall accommodate handicapped persons.  Slopes, landings, and access points shall be in
                 accordance with ADA requirements as well as with the most stringent applicable code or
                 combination of codes applicable to the project.

             •    Crosswalks from parking, bus stops, and other buildings shall be clearly painted and properly
                 assigned.

             •    Walkway paths shall be designed in response to the expected-origin/destination analysis of the site
                 and its users.

             •    Drop  curbs shall be used to provide transition for handicapped persons at crosswalks, drop-off
                 zones, and ends of walkways.

2.6.4    AIRPORTS AND HELIPORTS
        This subsection provides general guidelines for design of aviation facilities and indicates requirements and
        conditions that must be considered in designing and assessing such facilities.

2.6.4.1       GENERAL
             Planning and design of aviation facilities and airspace clearances shall comply with Federal Aviation
             Administration (FAA) AC 150/5050-5. Planning and design of aviation facilities shall emphasize
             safety for all modes of aircraft operations. Aircraft installations require permanent unobstructed
             airspace, and facilities and equipment constructed to  facilitate maintenance, ground handling, and flight
             operations.

             •    Landing and takeoff paths (traffic patterns) shall be oriented to avoid need for critical-facility
                 overflights. Traffic patterns and altitudes shall be established and published to provide for aircraft
                 approaches that are away from critical facilities.

             •    Heliports shall be sited, and traffic patterns established, so that normal operation does not require
                 overflights  of critical  facilities.  Heliports shall not be located closer to critical facilities than 2
                 times  the dimension of the landing pad or 3 times the rotor diameter of the largest helicopter
                 authorized to land at the heliport.

2.6.4.2       SITE CONSIDERATIONS
             The following site  conditions shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy of the aviation
             facility:

             •    Topography
             •    Vegetation and existing construction
             •    Weather elements
             •    Prevailing wind direction in summer and winter
             •    Soil conditions
             •    Flood hazards
             •    Natural and man-made obstructions
             •    Adjacent land  uses
             •    Availability of usable airspace
             •    Accessibility of usable roads
             •    Location of site utilities
             •    Accommodation of future expansion
             •    Aboveground utilities.

                                                     2-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
2.6.4.3  DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
             The layout of airfield facilities shall support operational efficiency and provide safe conditions for
             takeoff and landing operations and for ground handling of aircraft.

             •    Airfield safety clearances shall comply with the clearance criteria of FAA AC 1 50/5300.  The
                 critical-decision-point and emergency landing areas for the various aircraft using a facility shall be
                 determined on the basis of the respective aircraft performance charts.

             •    All other applicable design elements shall conform to the most current FAA criteria.

             •    In accordance with FAA AC 150/5070-6A, airfield layout shall also consider:

                     Wind direction and velocity analyzed
                     A taxiway system
                     Parking aprons
                     Supporting facilities.


2.7    Stormwater  Management

2.7.1    STREET DRAINAGE
        Street drainage in developed areas shall be conveyed within the roadway cross section. Curb inlets shall be
        used to  divert storm flows to surface  and subsurface Stormwater conveyance systems. Curb inlets shall not
        be located within curb returns or in areas of heavy pedestrian traffic. Pedestrian and cyclist safety shall be
        considered during selection of storm  inlet grates. Curb gaps shall be used where roadside drainage swales
        exist. Wherever possible, curb openings with inlets located in grassed areas should be utilized in lieu of
        curb inlets.

        In locations where uninterrupted vehicular access is essential to critical operational activities, roadway cross
        sections shall be designed to convey runoff from the 25-year, 6-hour storm so that one driving lane width
        (12 feet) is free of flowing or standing water.  Lower classification roadways shall be designed to convey
        runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm.  Stormwater management systems shall have sufficient capacity to
        ensure that runoff from the 100-year, 6-hour design storm will not exceed a depth of 10!/2 inches at any
        point within the street right-of-way or extend more than 21A inches above the top of the curb in urban
        streets.  Inverted crown roadway cross sections shall not be used unless approved by EPA.

2.7.2    WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT
        Site development plans shall be developed with careful review of the impact the plan will have on the
        watershed. Appropriate Stormwater management strategies shall be developed to minimize or eliminate
        adverse effects on existing and future development within the watershed.

2.7.3    EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
        Erosion and sedimentation control measures, in accordance with federal, state, and local standards, shall be
        used during construction.  The site should be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.

2.7.4    STORMWATER RETENTION AND DETENTION
        Site development plans shall incorporate appropriate Stormwater retention/detention facilities into the storm
        drainage system.  These facilities must be designed in strict accordance with all applicable federal, state, and
        local requirements.  Consider a further decrease in the rate and quantity of storm water run-off as an
        environmental design strategy.
                                                    2-23

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                         Section 2 - Site Work

2.7.4.1      ROOF RECOVERY, CISTERN
            Designers shall consider the use of cisterns to capture roof drainage for on-site use. Cistern design
            should match the expected quantities of recoverable rainfall to planned use, such as toilet flushing,
            irrigation, or cooling tower make-up.  Cistern location should accommodate the configuration of the
            rainwater collection system, provide convenient access for planned water use, and fit within the
            aesthetics of the building architecture and building landscape plan.

2.7.4.2      DISTRIBUTED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
            To the maximum extent practical, implement distributed stormwater management techniques to
            minimize the hydrologic effects of development.  Distributed management techniques (or integrated
            management practices) that should be considered include:

            •    Bioretention facilities
            •    Dry wells
            •    Filter/buffer strips and other multifunctional landscape areas
            •    Grassed swales, bioretention swales, and wet swales
            •    Infiltration trenches.

2.7.4.3      REDUCE/MINIMIZE  TOTAL IMPERVIOUS AREA
            Careful consideration should be applied during site lay-out to minimize the total footprint of
            impervious land use required for roadways, sidewalks, driveways, and parking areas. Where ever
            practical, porous paving  materials shall be used as substitutes for impervious surfaces. Ultimate
            material selection shall be based on permeability, durability under design traffic load, maintainability
            and cost effectiveness.

2.7.5    CONVEYANCE
        Subsurface and open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall meet the following requirements.

2.7.5.1      STORM SEWERS
            Subsurface drainage systems shall be  sized to accommodate runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm and
            shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is substantial risk to critical facilities and
            operations.  Subsurface system designs shall meet sediment transport requirements.  Storm sewers shall
            be designed to  maintain a minimum scour velocity of 2 feet per second. New storm sewers shall be
            sized for open  channel flow. The minimum storm sewer size shall be 15 inches. The minimum culvert
            size shall be  15 inches. For roof drain systems, the minimum pipe size for laterals and collectors shall
            be 6 inches.

2.7.5.2      OPEN CHANNELS
            Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be sized to accommodate the 10-year, 6-hour
            design flow with a minimum freeboard and shall be  sized for a greater storm in locations where there is
            substantial risk to critical facilities and operations.

            Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be designed for minimum maintenance. The
            potential for  scour or deposition within earth-lined channels shall be considered before approval by the
            appropriate EPA authority. Preference for earth-lined or "armored"  channels shall be based on a
            comparison of capital, maintenance, and operation costs. Inlets to open channel stormwater
            conveyance systems shall be placed at locations where erosion potential is minimal.

2.7.6    STORMWATER  QUALITY
        Site development shall incorporate quality control measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants in
        stormwater prior  to discharge into receiving waters. Construction sites that disturb one acre or more may be
        required to obtain a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit, including
                                                    2-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

         developing a site pollution prevention plan. See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual,
         Environmental Management Guidelines.

2.7.7     FLOODPLAIN AND WETLANDS DEVELOPMENT
         Development, modification, or occupancy of floodplains and wetlands should be avoided, particularly when
         practical alternatives exist.  To the extent possible, EPA shall meet the requirements of Executive Orders
         11988 and 11990.  EPA shall:

         •   Avoid, to the extent possible, the long-term and short-term adverse impacts associated with the
            destruction of wetlands and the occupancy and modification of floodplains and wetlands, and avoid
            direct and indirect support of floodplain and wetlands development wherever there is a practicable
            alternative for new development.

         •   Incorporate floodplain management goals and wetland protection considerations into its planning,
            regulation, and decision making.

         •   Carefully consider the potential impacts of any EPA action in a floodplain and the impacts of any new
            EPA  construction in wetlands not located in a floodplain.

         •   Identify, consider, and, as appropriate, implement alternative actions to avoid or mitigate adverse
            impacts on floodplains and wetlands.

         •   Provide opportunity for early public review of any plans or proposals for actions in floodplains or new
            construction in  wetlands.

         •   Ensure  that construction within floodplains or wetlands complies with 10 CFR Part 1022 and NEPA
            and implementing regulations.

2.7.8     COASTAL DEVELOPMENT
         The development of site boating, docking, and seawall facilities shall conform to all federal, state, and local
         requirements. Development should not allow any dredging and fill dumping at waters  edge.


2.8     Utilities and Support Services

2.8.1     WATER  DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
         This subsection applies to water distribution systems for domestic (potable) and industrial (nonpotable)
         uses.  The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) is subject to the approval of
         the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Where use of dual water systems is approved, the
         location and alignment of such systems must be clearly identified by  location markers placed throughout the
         site at intervals specified by the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Both  systems must also be
         clearly identified on the record drawings.

         •   Cross connections between domestic and  industrial or irrigation  systems are prohibited.  Domestic
            water conveyed within distribution systems that serve EPA facilities shall comply with the applicable
            Safe Drinking Water Act (SOWA) requirements; 40 CFR Parts 141-142; and all other applicable state,
            regional, and local requirements.  The quality of domestic water within such distribution systems shall
            be protected from degradation by installation of reduced-pressure principal assembly backflow
            preventers to prevent backflow of contaminants or pollutants into the  system.

         •   Drinking water in newly constructed facilities must be tested to ascertain compliance with the National
            Primary Drinking Water Regulations and be tested for lead and copper to insure they do  not exceed
                                                    2-25

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                         Section 2 - Site Work

             drinking water action levels. See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual, Environmental
             Management Guidelines.

        •    Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance with the National Plumbing Code.  Only
             devices approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research shall be
             used.  (Refer to Manual of Cross-Connection  Control [9th Edition].)

2.8.1.1       PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
             The following considerations shall be incorporated into the project planning.

             •    During route selection and initial planning for water distribution systems, the following conditions
                 and requirements shall be considered:

                     Projections concerning future population and development
                     Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions
                     Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire, and special water usage
                     Hydraulic design criteria
                     Health and safety requirements
                     Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors and topographic features)
                     Energy conservation and environmental constraints.

             •    Distribution system layouts shall be  as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial
                 planning efforts shall optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:

                     Facilitate future system expansion
                     Strengthen fire protection capabilities
                     Minimize conflicts with other utilities
                     Reduce  maintenance requirements.

             •    Water distribution  systems shall be included within the utility master plan.

2.8.1.2       SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
             Domestic water distribution mains shall be sized to accommodate the greatest anticipated demand (e.g.,
             fire demand, special requirements, or the peak domestic demand). Domestic  water distribution systems
             shall be designed to deliver a peak domestic flow of 2!/2 times the average daily demand, plus any
             special demands, at a minimum residual pressure of 20 pounds per square inch (psi) at ground elevation
             (or higher pressure residual pressure if special conditions warrant).

             •    Domestic water distribution systems that  also serve fire protection requirements shall be designed
                 to satisfy fire flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic  requirements plus any
                 industrial or process demands that cannot be reduced during  a fire.

             •    Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per
                 minute (gpm) at a minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Where domestic water distribution systems
                 must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e., sprinklers or foamite  systems), adequate residual
                 pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of these systems.  Fire hydrant branches (from
                 main to  hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter and shall be no longer than 300 feet. A
                 gate valve shall be  installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate maintenance. Fire
                 hydrants shall be installed at maximum intervals of 400 feet and shall not be located more than 300
                 feet from the buildings to be protected. Each building shall be protected by at least two hydrants.
                 All water mains supplying fire protection systems and fire hydrants shall be treated as fire mains
                 and installed in accordance with NFPA 24.
                                                    2-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

             •    Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi. Water distribution systems shall be
                 designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at ground level) in mains and
                 building service lines.  Where the gradient across the service area is such that multiple pressure
                 zones are necessary to  maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure-reducing valves shall be
                 used to separate each pressure zone.  Use of pressure relief and surge relief valves shall be
                 considered, as necessary, to preclude system damage from water hammer.

             •    Air release and vacuum breaker valves shall be installed, as required, at high points within the
                 distribution system and in long supply mains.

             •    Distribution system mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 3 feet.  In cold climates, at
                 roadway crossings in high traffic areas, and at railroad crossings, additional cover shall be
                 provided to prevent freezing. Building service lines shall be at least 1 inch in diameter. Service
                 lines that are less  than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a
                 corporation stop and a copper gooseneck, with a service stop  below frost line. Service lines that
                 are more than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a rigid
                 connection and shall have a gate valve located below frost line. Risers from frost line to floorlines
                 of buildings shall be adequately insulated. Water storage facilities shall comply with NFPA 22.

             •    Soil and groundwater conditions (e.g., soil corrosivity) on the site shall be considered in the
                 selection of pipe materials. Where ferrous pipe is installed within the distribution system,
                 insulating couplings shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion.

2.8.1.3       WELLHEAD DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES
             Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, on-site drilled wells shall be capable of
             producing a minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute unless otherwise
             required by the EPA project officer.  The water must be of a suitable quality for rearing and
             maintaining fish cultures. It must not be contaminated with pesticides,  heavy metals, sulfides,  silica, or
             chlorides. The anions  should be those found in natural lakes or streams.  Water quality parameters
             should be as follows:

             •    Dissolved oxygen:             > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L)
                 pH:                           7.2-8.5
                 Hardness:                      40-200 mg/L (as CaCO3)
             •    Alkalinity:                    Slightly less than hardness
             •    Iron:                          < 1.0 mg/L
             •    Chlorides:                     < 250 mg/L as chlorides and  sulfates
             •    Sulfides:                      < 2.0 micrograms per liter (ug/L) as undissociated H2S.

             The well and pump shall be protected from the elements.  Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be installed
             as reservoirs for water prior to distribution.

2.8.2     WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEMS
         This subsection applies to  sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains, collector
         sewers and interceptor sewers, and building sewers 5 feet beyond the building foundation). The following
         elements shall be considered during wastewater system design:

         •    Grey water systems should  be considered as an environmental design strategy

         •    Industrial wastewater  and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by EPA shall be
             excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.

         •    Pretreatment systems  (such as acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet EPA

                                                     2-27

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                        Section 2 - Site Work

            specifications and/or requirements of the publicly owned treatment works (POTW) and NPDES as
            applicable.

        •   Hydraulic design of wastewater collection systems shall comply with TM 5-814-1, Sanitary and
            Industrial Wastewater Collection; Gravity Sewers and Appurtenances (March 1985), TM 5-814-2,
            Sanitary and Industrial Wastewater Collection - Pumping Stations and Force Mains (March 1985) and
            American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 37. All wastewater collection systems  shall be designed
            for gravity flow unless such systems are not economically feasible. Sewage lift stations and force
            mains shall not be used unless approved by AEAMB.  Feasibility analyses and economic evaluations of
            the costs of lift stations and force mains for construction, operation, and maintenance shall be prepared
            and submitted to AEAMB for approval. Sewers and force mains shall be sized to accommodate the
            estimated daily maximum and minimum flow for the initial and final years of the design period. These
            maximum and minimum flows shall be specified by the appropriate EPA authority in accordance with
            ASCE 37.

                     Velocities in gravity sewers and force mains shall not exceed 10 feet per second.
                     Gravity sewers shall be designed for a  minimum velocity of 2 feet per second.
                     Force mains shall  be  designed for a minimum velocity of 3% feet per second.
                     The minimum size pipe for a sanitary sewer between manholes is 8".
                     The minimum size pipe for the sanitary building connection is 6".
                     The minimum slopes for a 6" sanitary sewer is 0.6%.
                     The minimum slope for an 8" sanitary  sewer is 0.4%.

        •   For the preliminary design, domestic water consumption rates shall be used to approximate wastewater
            flows. For the final design, where possible, actual flow data from an adjacent service area similar to
            the service area under consideration shall be used to estimate wastewater discharges. In the absence of
            such data, metered water use, less the consumptive use (i.e., water withdrawal rate), can be used.

        •   Sewers and force mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 2 feet.  Additional cover shall be
            provided to prevent freezing in cold climates and at roadway crossings.  Sewer and force main trench
            widths shall be minimized;  however, excavations, trenching, and shoring shall comply with 29 CFR
            Part 1926, Subpart P. Pipe bedding specified by the pipe manufacturer  shall be in place before sewers
            and force mains are installed.

        •   Sewers or force mains  shall not be routed within 100 feet of any well or reservoir that serves as a
            potable water supply. In all instances where such horizontal separation cannot be maintained, the sewer
            or force main shall be ductile iron pipe. Where groundwater is near the surface, special precautions
            shall be taken to prevent sewer infiltration or exfiltration.

        •   The horizontal distance between the water pipe  and a sewer or force main shall not be less than 10 feet
            except where the bottom of the water line will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe or
            force main, in which case the water pipe shall be laid at least 6 feet (horizontally) from the sewer or
            force main. Where water pipes cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall be fully
            encased in concrete for at least 10 feet each side of the crossing  or, for this same distance, shall be
            made of pressure pipe, with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Water lines
            shall, in all cases, cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and shall be at least 2 feet above
            the sewer main. Joints in the sewer main that are within 3 feet (horizontally) of the crossing shall be
            encased in concrete.

        •   Where feasible, sewers and force mains shall not be routed under buildings or other permanent
            structures. Sewers and  force mains shall be adjacent and parallel to paved roadways.  Sewers and force
            mains shall not pass beneath paved roadways except at roadway crossings. Where feasible, utility cuts
            within existing roadways shall be perpendicular to the roadway center line to minimize trench length.

                                                    2-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work

            Diagonal roadway cuts shall be avoided whenever possible. Consideration should be given to boring
            and jacking pipe or directional drilling for roadway crossings.

         •   The selection of sewer and force main material shall be based on wastewater characteristics and soil
            conditions.  Inverted siphons using high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall be used for sanitary
            sewer stream crossings. HDPE pipe placed below the stream bed shall be used for force main stream
            crossings.  Ductile iron shall also be used for sewers placed at shallow depths (3' or less) under paved
            surfaces subject to vehicular traffic. Infiltration-exfiltration test requirements shall be specified within
            the contract documents.

2.8.3     NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
         Gas distribution shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with NFPA
         54. Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.

2.8.4     ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION  SYSTEMS
         Site power and lighting  shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this
         Manual.

2.8.5     TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
         Site communications shall be coordinated as detailed in Section  16.14 of this Manual.

2.8.6     SOLID WASTE COLLECTION SYSTEMS
         Management of hazardous waste shall comply with Subtitle C of RCRA (see EPA Facilities Manual,
         Volume 4).  Management of nonhazardous solid waste shall comply with Subtitle D of RCRA.  In addition,
         each building should accommodate a nonhazardous waste recycling program, with areas for
         collection/separation convenient to each work area as well as a central recycling space for building-wide
         collection, separation, and storage.  The recycling program should be planned for recycling paper, glass,
         plastics, metals, and toner cartridges. Recycling bins conforming to EPA's standards shall be planned for
         and provided for relevant support spaces as indicate in Section 1 of this Manual.

         Building corridors,  elevators, trash rooms, and/or loading docks  shall accommodate collection hampers and
         containers for aggregating, moving,  and temporarily storing recyclable materials.  The loading dock shall
         accommodate the installation and operation of a compactor for mixed office paper and/or corrugated
         cardboard.
END OF SECTION 2
                                                    2-29

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 3 - Concrete
                                     Section 3 - Concrete

3.1     General Requirements

3.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covers the design and construction of plain, reinforced, and prestressed concrete structures,
        whether of cast-in-place or precast concrete construction.  The use of recycled materials in cast-in-place and
        precast applications is encouraged, to the extent permitted by state codes.  The requirements of this section
        shall be used in conjunction with the structural design sections.

3.1.2    CODES
        Concrete materials, design, and construction for buildings and other structures shall comply with American
        Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 and local building codes, as applicable.

3.1.3    USE OF RECOVERED MATERIALS IN CONCRETE
        Use of coal fly ash, or any additives, in concrete shall be governed by state building codes. Additives in
        floor slabs should be minimized to avoid interaction with adhesives or sealants. [Note: Testing for toxic
        contaminants should not be necessary if using materials covered under the CPG.]
3.2    Concrete  Formwork
        Formwork for concrete construction shall comply with ACI 347R, ACI SP-4, and state building codes, as
        applicable.
3.3    Concrete Reinforcement

3.3.1    REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
        Reinforcement materials for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with state building codes
        and ACI 318, as applicable.

3.3.2    REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
        Reinforcement details shall comply with ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and state building codes, as applicable.
3.4    Cast-ln-Place Concrete

3.4.1    GENERAL
        This subsection covers the selection of materials; proportioning of mixes; and mixing, placing, testing, and
        quality control of cast-in-place concrete.

3.4.2    MATERIALS, TESTING, AND QUALITY CONTROL
        Materials, testing,  and quality control shall comply with ACI 318 and state building codes. Recycled non-
        hazardous materials and recovered materials as designed in the CPG shall be used in concrete mixes to the
        extent permitted by state building code.

3.4.3    TOLERANCES
        Tolerances  shall be as recommended in ACI 347R, ACI 117, and state building code.
                                                  3-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 3 - Concrete

3.4.4    SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE MIXES
        The proportions for concrete mixes of normal-weight concrete shall comply with state building code and
        ACI 211.1. The proportions for structural lightweight concrete shall comply with state building code and
        ACI211.2.

3.4.5    MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
        Mixing, transporting, and placing shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI
        304R.

3.4.6    CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
        Hot-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 305R.
        Cold-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 306R.

3.4.7    POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
        In addition to the standards and resources referenced in other subsections, the Post-Tensioning Institute
        (PTI) Post-Tensioning Manual may be used for the design and construction of post-tensioned concrete
        structures.
3.5    Precast/Prestressed Concrete

3.5.1    STRUCTURAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of precast, precast and prestressed, and precast
        and post-tensioned structures.  In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, precast
        concrete shall comply with the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Manual (PCI MNL)-116. PCI MNL-
        120 and the PTI Post-Tensioning Manual may also be used as guides for the design and construction of
        precast concrete structures.

3.5.2    ARCHITECTURAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of architectural precast, and architectural precast
        and prestressed, concrete members. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections,
        architectural precast members  shall comply with the PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-122.
3.6    Cementitious Decks for Buildings

3.6.1    GENERAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for building structures and
        prefabricated floor and roof systems such as:

        •   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete planks
        •   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete channel slabs
        •   Reinforced gypsum planks
        •   Structural cement-fiber roof deck systems
        •   Reinforced poured-gypsum-over-formboard roof systems.

3.6.2    MATERIALS, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION
        The materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for buildings shall comply with the
        requirements of local building codes, manufacturer's recommendations, and CPG guidelines for recovered
        material content. In the event of a conflict between the local building code and the manufacturer's
        recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.
                                                   3-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 3 - Concrete

3.7    Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
        This subsection covers the evaluation of damage or deterioration, selection of repair methods, surface
        preparation, and repair and restoration of concrete structures.  The materials covered are Portland cement
        mortars and concretes, latex-modified Portland cement mortar, epoxy mortars, epoxy concrete, and methyl
        methacrylate concrete. Methods, procedures, and materials for the repair and restoration of concrete
        structures shall comply with the state building code and guidelines ACI 503.4 and ACI 546.1R.


3.8    Concrete Inspection and Testing
        Inspection and testing shall comply with the requirements of the state building code and ACI 318.
END OF SECTION 3
                                                 3-3

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 4 - Masonry
                                      Section 4  - Masonry

4.1     General Requirements

4.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covers the design and construction of masonry structures. It shall apply to unit masonry
        construction; reinforced and un-reinforced masonry structures; structures using cement, clay, and stone
        products; and those including brick, block, and tile structures.  The requirements of this subsection shall be
        used in conjunction with those in other sections and subsections.

4.1.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Materials, design, and construction of masonry structures shall comply with the requirements of the state
        building code. Recycled non-hazardous materials shall be used to the extent practical and allowed by state
        building code. Local sources shall be used to the extent practical. The following sources shall also be used
        as guides for the design  of masonry structures: The publications are referred to in the text by basic
        designation only.

        •   American Concrete Institute (ACI) 53 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
        •   ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures


4.2     Mortar and Grout

4.2.1    GENERAL
        Requirements for materials, mixing, strength, and specifications for mortar and grout used in masonry
        structures shall comply with state building codes.

4.2.2    MORTAR
        Mortar shall be designed to comply with:

            ASTM C 270 Mortar for Unit  Masonry

        Mortar shall be designed per requirements of state code to perform the following functions:

        •   Join masonry units into an integral structure.
        •   Create tight seals between masonry units to prevent the entry of air and moisture.
        •   Bond with steel joint reinforcement,  metal ties and anchor bolts, where used, so that they act integrally
            with the masonry.
        •   Give exposed masonry surfaces a desired architectural quality through color contrasts or shadow line
            from various joint-tooling procedures.
        •   Compensate for  size variations in the units by providing a bed to accommodate the different unit sizes.
        •   Portland cement mortar should be used for all structural brickwork.

4.2.3    GROUT
        Grout shall be used in reinforced load-bearing masonry construction to bond the masonry units and the
        reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist the imposed loads.  It may also be used in un-reinforced
        load-bearing masonry construction to give it added strength. Grout shall comply with:

        •   State building code, as applicable
            ASTM C 476 Grout for Masonry
                                                    4-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 4 - Masonry

4.3    Unit Masonry
        Materials, design, and construction of masonry units shall be in accordance with the requirements in
        subsection 4.1, General Requirements and the following:

            Solid Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 62, Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or
            Shale)

            Hollow Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 652, Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or
            Shale)

            Concrete Brick - ASTM C 55, Concrete Brick

        •   Hollow and solid concrete masonry units - ASTM  C 90, Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

        •   Prefaced concrete masonry units - ASTM C 744, Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
            Units, using  masonry units conforming to ASTM C 90

        •   Ceramic glazed structural clay facing units - ASTM C 126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing
            Tile, Facing  Brine,  and Solid Masonry Units
4.4    Masonry Accessories
        Joint reinforcement, anchors, and ties shall be zinc-coated and shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code and as applicable
            ACI 530.1.
4.5    Masonry Inspection and Testing
        Inspection and testing of unit masonry, grout, mortar reinforcing, and accessories shall comply with the
        following:

        •    State building code and as applicable
            ACI 530.1

4.5.1    SPECIAL INSPECTION
        When the masonry compressive strength (f'm) used in design is more than 1500 psi, a qualified independent
        masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative shall perform inspection of the
        masonry work.  Minimum qualifications for the masonry inspector shall be 5 years of reinforced masonry
        inspection experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental body having a program
        of examining and certifying inspectors for reinforced masonry construction.  The masonry inspector shall be
        present during  preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry units, placement of
        reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and foundation walls), inspection of grout space,
        immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during grouting operations. The masonry inspector shall
        assure Contractor compliance with the drawings and specifications.  The masonry inspector shall keep a
        complete record of all inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the Quality Control Supervisory
        Representative reporting the quality of masonry construction.
END OF SECTION 4
                                                   4-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 5 - Metals
                                       Section 5 - Metals
5.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the design and construction of steel and aluminum structures.  The requirements of this
        section shall be used in conjunction with those of other sections. Reused and/or recycled materials shall be
        used to the extent practical and permitted by code.
5.2    Structural Steel
        Structural steel for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC) ASD Manual of Steel Construction.
            AISC LRFD Manual of Steel Construction
5.3    Steel Joists

5.3.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Steel joists and joist girders shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications:  Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and
            Joist Girders.

5.4.2    INTENDED USE
        Steel joists shall not be used for wind bracing or other types of bracing. They shall be used only as
        horizontal load-carrying members supporting floor and roof decks.

5.4.3    SUPPORT OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
        Steel joists shall not be used to support air-conditioning, air-handling, or any type of vibrating equipment.
        Steel joists serving as floor joists and roof purlins shall not have bracing members attached to them that
        would transmit vibrations from vibrating equipment into the steel joists and/or structural diaphragms.
5.4    Steel Decks
        Steel decks shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Diaphragm Design Manual
        •    SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks
5.5    Miscellaneous Metals

5.5.1    DEFINITION
        Miscellaneous metals are all ferrous and nonferrous metals other than structural steel as defined in the AISC
        Code of Standard Practice.
                                                  5-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 5 - Metals

5.5.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Miscellaneous metals shall comply with the requirements of local orders and with all applicable industry
        standards for the specific type of metal and use, as listed elsewhere in this section.
5.6     Cold-Formed Steel
        Cold-formed steel shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
            Members.
            AISI Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
5.7     Pre-engineered  Metal Buildings

5.7.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Pre-engineered metal buildings shall comply with:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    The Metal Building Manufacturers Association's Metal Building Systems Manual.

5.7.2    LOADS
        Design loads shall conform to requirements of state building code.
5.8     Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
        Structural steel inspection shall be required and performed in conformance with requirements of:

        •    State building code as applicable
            AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
END OF SECTION 5
                                                 5-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
                               Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the use of wood and plastic materials in construction.  The use of recycled materials
        should be maximized, as applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated products
        published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG). The use of recovered materials should
        conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as applicable.  Other
        environmental design considerations include:

        •   Composite woods, plywood, particleboard containing  no urea-formaldehyde
        •   Wood  products certified by the Forest Stewardship Council to be from managed sources
6.2    Partitions
        Standardization of interior partitions is desirable.  Partitions within administrative areas should be easily
        removable.  Sound isolation and laboratory partitions between modules shall be designed to be removable
        in order to accommodate future reconfiguration of spaces.  Partitions requiring fire-resistance ratings shall
        be constructed of noncombustible/limited combustible (NC/LC) materials and either listed by Underwriters
        Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in its approval guide. Refer to the
        description of off-gassing in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual for more information on indoor material
        requirements.  See also www.cpg/gov for shower and restroom dividers/partition containing recovered
        materials.

6.2.1    SUBDIVIDING PARTITIONS
        Office subdividing partitions shall comply with the applicable local building code and/or National Fire
        Protection Association (NFPA) 101 requirements.  These partitions must be provided at a ratio of 1 linear
        foot per 10 square feet of space, as applicable. Partitioning over interior office doors is included in the
        measurement. Partitions must extend from the finished floor to the finished ceiling and have a flame spread
        rating of 25  or less, a smoke development rating of 450 or  less (American Society for Testing and Materials
        [ASTM] E-84 Test), and a minimum sound transmission loss (STL) rating of 40.

6.2.2    PERMANENT PARTITIONS
        Permanent partitions must be provided, as necessary, to surround stairs, corridors, elevator shafts, toilets,
        janitor closets, meeting and conference rooms, and mechanical rooms. They shall have a flame spread and
        smoke developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A. 10.2.2 and/or a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a
        smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84 Test), whichever is more stringent. Stairs, elevators,
        and other floor openings shall be enclosed by partition(s) and have the fire resistance required by applicable
        codes. These partitions shall extend from the floor to the underside of the structure above, shall effectively
        isolate sound and vibration, and shall meet all fire separation requirements.

6.2.3    WOOD STUD PARTITIONS
        Wood studs shall not be installed as part of new construction or as part of a major alteration or space
        adjustment in other types of construction.

6.2.4    LESS-THAN-CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
        Bank type partitions, acoustical screens, freestanding space dividers, and other partitions that do not reach
        the ceiling shall  conform to the requirements for movable partitions set forth by the General Services
        Administration (GSA) in PBS-P1 00.  In addition, the placement of partitions relative to sprinklers shall
        comply with NFPA 13, and adequate passageway width and identification of means  of egress shall comply
        with NFPA  101. Another factor limiting the height and location of partitions is that tall or massive  partition

                                                   6-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                               Section 6 - Wood and Plastics

        systems may interfere with the even distribution of conditioned air and natural light. Consideration should
        be given to the location of supply diffusers and return registers; the location of thermostats; and the
        clearance above, below, and around the partitions to allow adequate air circulation.
6.3    Use of Wood and Plastic
        Selection of wood, adhesives, and plastic materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and
        smoke developed criteria perNFPA 101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-
        emitting  or low ozone-depleting material.  Treated lumber should not be used for furnishings, especially for
        play equipment in day-care centers. Laboratory shelving and casework may be fabricated using wood
        (plywood) and plastic materials.  See subsection 10.5 of this Manual for requirements.
END OF SECTION 6
                                                    6-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
                Section 7 - Thermal  and Moisture  Requirements
7.1     General  Requirements
        In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria. Vapor and
        infiltration barriers to vapor flow through the walls and roofs shall be placed with the aim of preventing
        moisture accumulation and condensation within the building structure, reduction of thermal performance,
        and increased latent cooling load in the space. The use of recovered materials should be maximized, as
        applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated recycled content thermal
        insulation products published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG).  The use of
        recycled materials should conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as
        applicable.  Additionally, selection of materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and smoke
        developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-emitting or
        low ozone-depleting type material.
7.2    Design Characteristics
        Design characteristics of exterior wall sections should be evaluated for functional and cost effectiveness in
        relation to the following:

        •    Moisture transport
        •    Thermal performance
        •    Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration
        •    Air flow and infiltration.
7.3    Thermal Resistance
        For information on the thermal characteristics of single materials or wall assemblies, refer to the American
        Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals
        or the manufacturer's certified technical information. Thermal resistance (R) values shall be identified for
        each element in the building shell. "U" factor calculations are prepared by following the recommended
        procedures as documented in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
7.4    Moisture Transport
        Dew point calculations are prepared by following the recommended design procedures in the ASHRAE
        Handbook of Fundamentals.  The exterior envelope will be designed to prevent condensation within wall
        cavities, building spaces, etc.
7.5    Panel, Curtain, and  Spandrel Walls
        Openings between panel, curtain, and spandrel walls and the building structure or floor slabs around them,
        shall be fire stopped in accordance with the provisions outlined in Section 13, Special Construction, of this
        Manual. The requirements in this subsection in no way reduce the requirements for protection of walls
        subject to an exterior fire exposure.  See Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for information on exposure
        protection.
                                                  7-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                               Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements

7.5.1    PANEL AND CURTAIN WALLS
        All panel and curtain walls shall conform to the requirements for nonbearing walls for the type of
        construction and model code involved and shall be securely anchored to the building in a manner that will
        prevent failure of the anchors in a fire or failure of the panel and its components in high wind.

7.5.2    SPANDREL WALLS
        Except as noted below, spandrel walls shall be provided at each floor and shall have a height of at least 3
        feet above the finished floor and a fire resistance equivalent to the floor involved.

7.5.2.1      EXCEPTION NO. 1
            Exterior spandrel walls are not necessary and, if provided, are not required to have any fire resistance if
            the rooms located directly inside the exterior wall of the building and on the floor below contain low-
            hazard occupancies or occupancies that are sprinkler protected.

7.5.2.2      EXCEPTION NO. 2.
            Spandrel walls are not required at grade level.
END OF SECTION 7
                                                    7-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
                             Section  8 - Doors and  Windows
8.1     Doors

8.1.1    GENERAL
        Unless otherwise noted, all doors shall be 36 inches wide. Doors in designed egress ways shall swing in the
        direction of egress. Doors shall not swing into exit ways in a manner that reduces the effective exit width.
        Doors and windows shall conform to requirements  of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 80,  as
        applicable.

8.1.1.1      HARDWARE
            All doors shall be equipped with heavy-duty hardware.  Each leaf (up to 80 inches high) shall be
            provided with minimum 11A pair butts (hinges) or 2 pair butts (hinges) on doors higher than 80 inches.
            All doors shall be provided with appropriate stops or wall bumpers. Exterior, egress, and laboratory
            doors shall be provided with appropriate closers. All public-use doors must be equipped with push
            plates, pull bars or handles, and automatic door closers.  Corridor and outside doors must be equipped
            with cylinder locks and door checks. All locks must be master-keyed. The Government must be
            furnished with at least two master keys and two keys for each lock.  Hardware for doors in the means of
            egress shall conform to NFPA standard 101 and American with Disabilities Act (ADA)

8.1.1.2      ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
            Doors, windows, and hardware exposed to highly corrosive conditions, as in marine or very humid
            environments, shall be nonferrous or provided with a protective, corrosion-resistant finish.  Selection
            and location of door systems must include consideration of their designed protection against infiltration
            and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings.

8.1.2    EXTERIOR DOORS
        Exterior doors shall be weathertight and equipped with door closer,  shall open outward, and shall have  a
        drip rain diverter above the door as required.  Doors shall comply with requirements of the Uniform Federal
        Accessibility Standards (UFAS), Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and NFPA  101, as applicable.
        Exterior doors shall be alarmed for anti-intrusion.

8.1.3    INTERIOR DOORS
        Interior doors must have a minimum opening of 36 inches (width) by 80 inches (height) and shall comply
        with ADA and/or UFAS,  as applicable. Hollow-core wood doors are not acceptable.  Hardware shall be
        ADA compliant.  Doors shall be operable by a single effort and shall be provided with vision panels in
        accordance with all applicable code requirements.  All requirements of ADA shall be incorporated.

8.1.3.1      LANDING AREAS
            The landing areas for doors that open onto walkways, ramps, corridors, and other pedestrian paths  shall
            be clear and level with a slope of no greater than 1:50; they shall extend at least 5 feet from the swing
            side of the door, 4 feet from the opposite side,  and at least VA feet past the latch side (pull side) of  the
            door and 1  foot past the latch side (push side).

8.1.4    FIRE DOORS
        Fire doors shall conform to NFPA 80.  Doors, hardware, and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
        Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or another approved laboratory testing organization, in accordance with
        American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-152.
                                                    3-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                               Section 8 - Doors and  Windows

        Glazing material shall not be allowed in fire doors with a 3-hour fire protection rating or in fire doors with a
        1.5-hour fire protection rating that are used in locations with severe fire exposure potential (such as in a
        flammable-liquids storage room). The maximum area of glazing in a 1-or 1.5-hour door shall be 100
        square inches (0.065 square meters) unless the area has been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA
        80. The area of glazing in fire doors that have less than 1-hour fire-resistance ratings shall be limited to the
        maximum area tested.  All glazing shall be wired glass or other glass approved for use in fire doors.

8.1.4.1      EXIT DOORS
            Fire doors in exits or means of egress shall also conform to the requirements contained in Chapter 2 of
            the Safety Manual. Fire doors in air-handling systems shall also conform to the requirements outlined
            in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual.

8.1.5    LABORATORY DOORS
        Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the
        inactive leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors
        shall swing in the direction of egress from the laboratory and should be inserted in alcoves regardless of the
        corridor width.  Open doors should not protrude more than 6 inches into exit corridors. In general, large
        vision panels should be provided to allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces.  Hardware
        shall be ADA-compliant and shall provide various levels of access control as required; it will include both
        combination and key access locks. Areas where a high level of security will be required shall be provided
        with card-key access control.
8.2    Windows

8.2.1    GENERAL
        The use of natural but controlled daylighting should be maximized as part of a total energy conservation
        program.  EPA values natural light and perceives it as part of an exemplary working environment as well as
        a potential source of energy savings. The building organization and design concept shall bring adequate
        natural light into personnel spaces.  Window size, head-height, placement,  umber, and location shall be
        determined on the basis of need for natural light and ventilation and of energy considerations. All exterior
        windows in heated or air-conditioned spaces shall use double-glazed, insulated, low E glass and thermal
        break sashes. All windows in laboratory rooms that may contain explosive materials shall be glazed with
        safety glass.  Selection and location of windows must include consideration of their designed protection
        against infiltration and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings.

8.2.2    FIXED WINDOW SYSTEMS
        Laboratory space shall have windows that are non-operable (except with a  key, where windows must be
        opened for cleaning purposes) in order to maintain temperature and humidity control and room
        pressurization relationships.

8.2.3    SAFETY OF STOREFRONT AND CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS
        Windows extending to within 18 inches of the floor and located at least 4 feet above grade  shall be provided
        with a safety bar on the interior window approximately 3 feet above floor level.  Off-street, ground-level
        windows and those accessible from fire escapes and adjacent roofs must have anti-intrusion alarm systems
        to deter forcible entry.

8.2.4    WINDOW HEIGHT
        Wherever windows extend to within 36 inches of the finished floor and are at least 4 feet above grade, a
        suitable metal barrier shall be provided on the interior side, approximately  56 inches above floor level.
        (Perimeter heating and cooling units may form this barrier.)  If the glass construction can withstand a
        horizontal force of 200 pounds or more and meets the requirements of 29 CFR ง1910.23, 16 CFR Part

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 8 - Doors and Windows

        1201, and the local building code, no barriers are required. For windows in walls that must have a fire-
        resistance rating, see NFPA 80 A and Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual.

8.2.5    GLAZED PANELS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND WALLS
        Interior glazed panels must comply with the Consumer Products Safety Commission Safety Standard for
        Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Part 1201). When glazing panels and windows are used in fire
        barrier walls, such use shall also meet the criteria set forth in the Safety Manual.


8.3    Permanent  Window Coverings

8.3.1    GENERAL
        The design professional shall be responsible for providing permanent window coverings for interior and
        exterior windows where required.  Nonpermanent window coverings installed on the inside of windows are
        considered "interior finishes" and are discussed in subsection 9.6 of this Manual.

8.3.2    SUN SHADING
        The use of reflective glass shall be  reviewed and considered for all exterior windows.  The two basic types
        of reflective glass available for consideration are solar-reflective and low-emissivity (Low-E).  The major
        differences are visible light transmission, wavelengths of energy that are reflected, and the  direction in
        which these wavelengths are usually reflected.  Solar-reflective glass has a mirror-like coating that is highly
        reflective of solar energy.  Low-emissivity (Low-E) glass has a metal or metallic-oxide coating that is nearly
        invisible to the eye. Low-E glass reduces energy costs by creating a heat barrier that helps keep heat
        outside in the summer and inside in the winter. Low-E glass is suitable for all climates and is available for
        use in double and triple insulating glass units.  Insulating units with an outer panel of tinted or reflective
        glass can provide added energy cost efficiencies. Use a target of 70% visible light transmission (VLT).
        Manufacturer's data sheets should be referred to in order to evaluate shading coefficient and relative heat
        gain.  Use of reflective glass shall be considered even when not required by the  data sheet, when solar glare
        and heat gain should be controlled.  Laboratory windows exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded with
        permanent exterior shading devices that shade the window from direct sun.

8.3.3    SECURITY
        Windows at ground level shall be covered  with Mylar to provide security.
END OF SECTION 8
                                                     3-3

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes
                                       Section 9 - Finishes
9.1     Interior Finishes
        The required finishes for each room are specified in the room data sheets included in Appendix C or finish
        schedules in PORs. The following requirements apply to interior finishing.

9.1.1    TRIM AND INCIDENTAL FINISHES
        Interior wall and ceiling finish that covers no more than 10 percent of the aggregate wall and ceiling area
        involved may be Class C material in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101,
        Chapter 6.

9.1.2    FINAL FINISHING MATERIAL
        Wallpaper, paint, veneer, and other thin finishing materials that are applied directly to the surface of walls
        and ceilings and are not more than 1/28-inch thick shall not be considered as interior finishes per NFPA
        101, Chapter 6.  To the extent practicable, consolidated and/or reprocessed latex paint consistent with CPG
        guidance should be used.

9.1.3    AIRSPACE
        Whenever an airspace is  located behind combustible material, the space shall be blocked so that no void
        extends more than 10 feet in any direction.  For example, wood paneling applied to wood furring strips will
        meet the requirement if the distance between the furring strips is no more than 10 feet in both a horizontal
        and a vertical direction.

9.1.4    COMBUSTIBLE SUBSTANCES
        Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated
        with fire-retardant chemicals throughout the material  (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed to surface
        treatment, may be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions: (1) the treated material shall
        be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and (2) the treated material shall not be
        installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the effectiveness of the fire-retardant
        treatment (e.g., high humidity).  Surface treatments may be used to reduce the risks associated with existing
        conditions, in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101. No material that will result in higher flame spread
        or smoke development ratings than those permitted in this Manual shall be used as  an interior finish.
        Finishing materials should conform to flame spread and smoke developed criteria requirements per NFPA
        101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition.

9.1.5    ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA
        The selection of interior finishes shall consider indoor air quality (e.g.,  low VOC paints, adhesives, caulks,
        non-chlorine based wall base, wall covering, and flooring)  and maximum recycled content for carpet,
        wallboard, wall base, concrete, steel, and ceiling tiles consistent with CPG requirements and
        recommendations. Evaluation of materials also should consider the manufacturer's required preparation
        and cleaning products and the potential for use of low-toxicity cleaning products.
9.2    Wall Treatments

9.2.1    WALL MATERIALS
        Wall materials must be capable of withstanding washing with detergents and disinfectants. Materials
        selected shall be compatible with their intended use and shall emphasize durability and low maintenance
        while creating a comfortable work environment.  Recycled content laminated paperboard and/or structural
        fiberboard should be specified consistent with CPG guidance.

                                                    9-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 9 - Finishes
        In general, walls shall be gypsum wallboard, with a painted finish, on metal studs. Walls in laboratory areas
        will be required to support additional loads due to movable casework, mounting rails, upper cabinets or
        adjustable shelves, and equipment anchorage.  Therefore, structural wall studs, backing plates, and lateral
        bracing sufficient to withstand heavy loads will be required. Where concrete masonry unit (CMU) block or
        poured concrete walls are used to meet other design requirements or constraints, they shall be furred with
        gypsum wallboard or covered with another appropriate finish.

9.2.3    WALL FINISHES
        Wall finishes, and the process by which they are selected, must meet the requirements  outlined in the
        following subsections.

9.2.3.1      GENERAL
            The required finishes must be designated for each room in the room data sheets. Actual material
            selection, color, and texture, is left to the design professionals who shall make selections in
            consultation with the users.  Material safety data sheets (MSDS) are a good resource for environment
            evaluation. Paint shall be carefully selected so as not to affect laboratory operations. The design
            professional must also select finish materials for items and areas not specifically designated in the room
            data sheets. These selections shall be submitted to the Government representative for final approval.

9.2.3.2      FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE LIMITATIONS
            Wall finishes on walls that are part of a means of egress must have an interior finish of Class A (flame
            spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). (Interior finish ratings are derived from American Society for
            Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 and NFPA 255.) For any existing construction that  is not
            protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval, wall finishes must
            have an interior finish of Class A (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450).  All new construction
            for EPA shall be protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval; in
            construction that is so protected, wall finishes in all areas, except those that are a part of the means of
            egress, may have an interior finish of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450), unless
            otherwise restricted by an applicable code. The most restrictive requirement shall govern. In sprinkler-
            protected exit accesses or passageways, the interior finish may be composed of materials with a Class B
            interior finish rating (flame  spread 26-75,  smoke developed 0-450). (See NFPA 101 and PBS-P100 as
            the sources of this requirement.)

9.2.3.3      WALL COVERINGS
            Wall covering made of materials that are considered "environmentally friendly" shall be provided in
            the administrative and other office areas when required (none shall be provided  in the laboratory areas).
            Such wall covering shall meet the following criteria:

            •    Construction: All material shall be of uniform color throughout.  Colors and patterns shall be
                 chosen and approved by EPA from standard manufacturer lines offered by the design professional.
                 Non-chlorine based materials are preferrable.

            •    Maintenance properties:  All wall covering shall be resistant to permanent stains and mildew and
                 shall be capable of being cleaned with mild, nonabrasive cleaners.

            •    Fire hazard requirements: Each type of wall covering used will have a minimum interior finish of
                 Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450) when  tested in accordance with ASTM E-
                 84.

            •    Application: Application of all wall covering shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
                 recommendations. In the product selection process, consider the  VOC impact of the
                 manufacturer's recommended application.

                                                     9-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes

9.3     Finished Ceilings

9.3.1     GENERAL
         Ceilings shall be set at a minimum height of 9 feet 8 inches in laboratory zones both in general spaces and
         in laboratory spaces and at a minimum height of 8 feet in corridor and office spaces. Except in service
         areas, ceilings must have acoustical treatment acceptable to the contracting officer,  a flame spread rating of
         25 or less, and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84).  Protrusion of fixtures into traffic
         ways is not  allowed. Refer to the Safety Manual for fire-resistance requirements for ceilings.

9.3.2     CEILINGS NOT ALONG EXIT PATH
         Ceilings and interior finishes in areas that are not part of the normal exit route may  have an interior finish of
         Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive.

9.3.3     CEILINGS ALONG EXIT  PATH
         In sprinkler-protected exit ways or enclosed corridors leading to exits, ceilings and  interior finishes may be
         composed of materials with an interior finish rating of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-
         450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive. The most restrictive applicable  code shall be used.

9.3.4     CEILING FINISHES
         Where ceiling finishes are required, they will, in general, be suspended  acoustical tile.  Other ceiling
         finishes will be required in special rooms, as specified on the room data sheets. These finishes will include
         hard ceilings with sealed openings for clean analytical laboratories. Special consideration shall be given to
         the type of grid system and acoustical tile when the ceiling is in a moist area or in food service and other
         specialty areas.  Ceilings in extraction, preparation, glassware washing,  microbiology, and similar wet
         laboratories shall be of water-resistant tile materials or painted gypsum  wallboard.

9.3.5     OPEN  CEILINGS
         All areas above open ceilings shall be sealed and painted.  The necessary coordination shall occur for all
         requirements regarding painting of exposed areas, including engineered systems that require color-coded
         painting or stenciling and general code-required stenciling of nomenclature defining the rating of fire walls.
9.4     Floor Treatments

9.4.1     GENERAL
         Floor finishes shall be compatible with the intended use of the room and shall emphasize durability and low
         maintenance.  Floors and floor coverings may be of any material normal to the intended use.  Materials may
         be either combustible or noncombustible, including wood, asphalt tile, carpet, rugs, linoleum, concrete, and
         terrazzo.  When floor tiles or carpet are used, preference should be given to such items designated in the
         CPG.  Interior floor finishes shall meet the interior finish requirements noted above. (See subsection 9.1.1
         for more information on interior finish requirements.) Materials must be smooth, nonabsorbent, skid-proof,
         and wear resistant.  Laboratory flooring should resist the adverse effects of acids, solvents, and detergents.
         When  a seamless floor material is required, the base shall also be seamless and integrally coved. Materials
         must be monolithic or have a minimum number of joints.  The base may be a 4-inch rubber base or an
         integral-coved base where sheet flooring is used.

9.4.1.1       FIRE SAFETY
             Interior floor finishes shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and shall be tested in
             accordance with NFPA 253. Flooring materials used as wall sections or wall coverings shall comply
             with the fire safety characteristics described in Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for flame spread and
             smoke development.  The flame spread and smoke development characteristics shall be determined
                                                     9-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                           Section 9 - Finishes

             through testing in the orientation in which the material is to be installed (NFPA 253 results shall not be
             used to evaluate flooring tested in the vertical position).

9.4.2    CARPET
        Carpet tiles shall cover all typical office floors and must meet the static buildup and flammability
        requirements that follow.

9.4.2.1       SPECIFICATIONS
             The following specifications must be met for all new carpet installation:

             •    Pile yarn content: Continuous, solution-dyed filament soil-hiding nylon or wool/nylon
                 combinations.

             •    Carpet pile construction:  Level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile.

             •    Pile weight:  Minimum of 28 ounces per square yard.

             •    Secondary back: Recycled content, synthetic fiber, or jute for glue-down installation. Backings
                 with latex and 4PC should be avoided.

             •    Total weight: Minimum of 64 ounces per square yard.

             •    Flammability: In all areas except exits, carpet must have a critical radiant flux (CRF) of 0.25 or
                 greater,  with a specific optical density not higher than 450.  Carpet in exits must have a CRF of at
                 least 0.50. Carpet passing the Consumer Products Safety Commission FFL-70 (Pill Test)  is
                 acceptable for office areas; it may also be used in corridors that are protected by automatic
                 sprinklers. Check applicable codes for any more restrictive requirements.  The most restrictive
                 requirement shall apply.

             •    Static  buildup: 3.5 kilovolts  (kV) maximum with built-in static dissipation  is recommended; static-
                 controlled is acceptable.  More restrictive levels shall be required in sensitive  areas such as
                 computer rooms; these levels shall be determined by calculations for any special equipment in use.

             •    Interior  finish requirements:  As required by NFPA 101, Section 6-5.

             •    End of life/disposal: Required to be recyclable by manufacturer.

9.4.2.2       COLOR
             For new carpet, the Government  shall be provided with at least three color samples. The sample and
             color must be approved by EPA prior to installation.  No substitutes may be made  after sample
             selection.  Use of solution  dyed yarn shall be considered to minimize  color fading  and reduce water
             pollution..

9.4.2.3       INSTALLATION
             Carpet must  be installed in accordance with the  approved manufacturer's instructions.

             •    In leased space, carpet shall  be replaced at least once every 7 years during Government occupancy,
                 or whenever backing or underlayment is exposed and/or there are noticeable variations in surface
                 color or texture, whichever occurs first.

             •    Consider alternative methods of installation where feasible,  including gridded glue down in low-
                 traffic and low-moisture areas, and adhesive backing.
                                                     9-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes

             •    Carpet replacement shall include the moving and returning-in-place of all furniture.  Floor
                 perimeters at partitions must have wood or carpet base.  Any exceptions must be approved by the
                 contracting officer.

             •    An additional 10 percent of the selected carpet tiles shall be provided by the contractor for the
                 owner's own stock and replacement.  These carpet tiles are not to be used during the warranty
                 period.

             •    The off-gassing requirements in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual shall be followed.

9.4.3     RESILIENT TILE
         Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this document, all new resilient floor tile shall be 12 inch x 12 inch
         x 1/8-inch thick,  shall have 35 percent to 40 percent reflectance, and shall be high density, meeting the
         requirements of Federal Specification SS-T-312, Type IV. Adhesives used to set tiles shall be low in
         volatile organic compounds (VOCs).  Colors and patterns will be selected from three or more samples by
         the contracting officer or his or her duly appointed representative. If heavy duty, commercial grade floor
         tiles are specified, preference should be given to floor tiles made with recovered materials as designated in
         the CPG.

9.4.4     SEAMLESS VINYL FLOORING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES
         Seamless vinyl flooring for laboratories shall be chemical-resistant as manufactured by Tarket or Mipolan
         or an approved equal, and shall be coved 4 inches up the  wall using the same material. Joints shall be
         chemically welded smooth without any grooves. Adhesive used to set the flooring shall be environmentally
         acceptable.

9.4.5     CERAMIC  TILE FLOORING
         Ceramic tile  flooring  shall be sealed in all grout areas. At least five color  samples shall be incorporated into
         the color boards for selection and approval by the contracting officer (or his or her duly appointed
         representative).

9.4.6     SPECIAL FLOORING
         Special floor-coating systems shall be troweled, jointless  floor systems  with slip-resistant top coatings
         which shall be waterproof and resistant to alkalies and acids.  The special flooring system selected should
         be compatible with its intended use.

9.4.7     EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORING
         Steel trowel finish shall be used on exposed concrete floors that will not receive other finish. Exposed
         interior concrete floors shall be sealed with a penetrating-type solvent base or water-emulsion base
         unpigmented sealer containing a suitable type resin and no wax.
9.5     Paint

9.5.1     GENERAL
         Before occupancy, all surfaces designated for painting must be newly painted with paint finish and colors
         acceptable to, and approved by, the contracting officer or that officer's duly appointed representative. The
         contracting officer or duly appointed representative shall be provided with color samples and color
         schemes, with their average surface reflectance value clearly identified, for selection. All paint must be low
         VOC latex (i.e., <3 grams/liter) unless specified otherwise. For interior and exterior latex paints, preference
         should be given to the use of reprocessed or consolidated latex paint, consistent with CPG guidance.
                                                     9-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Section 9 - Finishes

9.5.2    REFLECTANCE VALUES
        Minimum average surface light reflectance values (LRV) that will be used as a base for the selection of
        interior colors are as follows:

        •   Ceiling:  80 percent.
        •   Walls: 70 percent.
        •   Floors: 30 percent.
        •   Furniture and equipment: 50 percent.
        •   Chalkboards:  Not less than 15 percent nor more than 20 percent, as recommended in American
            Standard Practice for School Lighting, AIA No. 32F28.

        Deviations from the above reflectance requirements are allowed for aesthetic treatment of such areas as
        conference rooms, lobbies, corridors, and executive offices. Surfaces shall also have a matte finish to
        prevent excessive brightness ratios and to minimize specular reflections.

9.5.3    WALL AND CEILING COLORS
        Ceiling color can be extended from 1 to 3 feet down the walls, or to the level of the fixtures, to obtain up to
        20 percent increase in illumination.

9.5.4    ACCENT AREAS
        Up to 20 percent of wall surfaces may have reflectance values lower than those listed, for accent purposes,
        without being considered part of the average.

9.5.5    LEAD-BASED PAINT
        Lead-based paint shall not be used in EPA facilities. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Safety, Health, and
        Environmental Manual: Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume  4 of the EPA Facilities Manual)
        for restrictions on the use of lead-based paint.
9.6    Window Covering
        Permanent devices installed on the outside of buildings to control sunlight and provide security are
        discussed in subsection 8.3 of this Manual.

9.6.1    BLINDS
        Window blinds may be either vertical or horizontal; nonmetallic slats or rollershades are required in
        laboratories. Color selection will be made by the EPA representative.  The hardware and blind mechanisms
        in laboratories shall be made of acid-resistive materials.

9.6.2    BLACKOUT SHADES
        Rooms requiring blackout capability shall be equipped with blackout shades. Shades should be a pre-
        engineered unit with a fiberglass-coated fabric  shadecloth. They must have a noncorroding, concealed-
        variable adjustment mechanism, adjustable from 100 percent friction (static mode) with finite positions to
        15 percent friction (dynamic mode) with only preselected positions.

9.6.3    DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
        All draperies, curtains, and similar hanging materials shall be of a noncombustible or flame-resistant fabric
        (chemically treated).  Flame-resistant means that the fabric or films (e.g., thin plastic sheets or cellophane)
        must meet the performance criteria described in NFPA 701. In addition, draperies, curtains,  and  other
        window finishes shall be formaldehyde and chlorine free and shall meet the off-gassing criteria set forth in
        Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.

END OF SECTION 9
                                                    9-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties
                                   Section 10 -Specialties

10.1   Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and Tack Boards
        Magnetic dry-marker boards (liquid chalk) shall be used except when the solvent markers used on these
        boards would affect operations undertaken in laboratories; chalk-type chalkboards shall not be used.
        Locations of magnetic dry-marker boards and tack boards shall be determined by the design professional in
        close coordination with the contracting officer's representative (COR).

10.2   Interior Signage Systems and  Building Directory

10.2.1   GENERAL
        All signage, identification, room numbering, and building directories shall comply with the requirements of
        the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

10.2.2   DOOR IDENTIFICATION
        Door identification shall be installed in approved locations adjacent to office entrances. The form of door
        identification must be approved by the COR.  Toilet, stairway, and corridor doors must be identified by the
        international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to 66 inches above the floor; wherever possible, such
        identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side of the door. Seldom-used doors to areas
        posing danger to the blind must have knurled or acceptable plastic-abrasive-coated handles. Tactile
        warning indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs.

10.2.3   ROOM NUMBERING
        A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the  facility.
        Plans shall be submitted to the COR for review and approval before construction documentation begins.

10.2.4   BUILDING DIRECTORY
        A wall-mounted, glass-enclosed directory with lock shall be provided at a conspicuous location in the lobby
        or entrance of the building. The directory shall be approximately 2 feet by 3 feet in size. The building
        directory shall be approved by the COR.

10.2.5   LABORATORY SIGNAGE
        The laboratory signage should contain the room number, room name, occupants by name, hazardous
        chemicals within the laboratory, emergency telephone number, and special procedures in case of
        emergency.
10.3   Portable Fire Extinguishers
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located within recessed cabinets, in accordance with
        National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.  Portable fire
        extinguishers shall be provided on the basis of the classes of anticipated fires and the size and degree of
        hazard affecting the extinguishers' use.  Portable fire extinguishers containing carbon tetrachloride orhalon
        (chlorobromomethane) extinguishing agents shall not be used. As per requirements of PBS-P100, section
        7.11, portable fire extinguishers and cabinets shall not be installed in common areas, general office or court
        space when the building is protected throughout with quick response sprinklers.  Additionally, in office
        buildings protected throughout with quick response sprinklers, fire extinguishers shall only be installed in
        areas such as mechanical and elevator equipment areas, computer rooms, UPS rooms, generator rooms, and
        special hazard areas.
                                                  10-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 10 - Specialties

        Fire extinguishers shall be approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and labeled to identify the
        listing and labeling organization and the fire test and performance standard that the fire extinguisher meets
        or exceeds.  The minimum rating for a single Class A extinguisher shall be 2-A in low hazard or medium
        hazard areas and 4-A in high hazard areas.  The minimum rating for a single Class B extinguisher shall be
        10-B in low hazard area, 20-B in medium hazard areas and 80-B  in high hazard areas.

10.3.1   FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. It is good practice to also locate a
        fire extinguisher in the corridor outside the  laboratory in addition to those located within the laboratory.  In
        the other areas of the building or in non-laboratory buildings, the minimum number of fire extinguishers
        needed for protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA 10, Chapter 3, Distribution of
        Extinguishers.

        •    Class A and  D extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the respective Class A and D
             hazard areas does not exceed 75 feet.

        •    Class B extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the Class B hazard areas does not
             exceed  50 feet.

        •    Extinguishers with Class C ratings shall be  located on the basis of the anticipated Class A or B hazard.

        •    One extinguisher may be installed to provide protection for several hazard areas provided that travel
             distances  are not exceeded.
10.4   Laboratory Casework

10.4.1   GENERAL
        Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product
        of one manufacturer and shall be installed under the recommendations of that manufacturer. The laboratory
        casework shall meet the functional, aesthetic, flexibility, and maintenance needs of each user. Performance
        set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance, and function. Products that fail
        to meet these standards will not be considered.

10.4.1.1     MATERIALS
            Unless noted otherwise, all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable, corrosion-
            resistant material. For rooms that do not require casework of metal construction, the casework
            materials shall be wood or approved plastic. Wood casework shall be from certified sustainable forests
            or recycled material.  Hardware used for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy coated. Plastic
            laminate or other similar facing materials, over wood or composite material, are permitted only when
            the laminate or surfacing material is certified by the manufacturer to be impervious to acids and other
            common laboratory solvents.

10.4.1.2     QUALITY
            The laboratory casework that is subject to the above requirements shall have components,
            configuration, materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical
            performance tests) comparable to cantilevered frame  (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by
            Hamilton Industries and Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipment manufactured by
            others is acceptable if the products are of equal performance and have similar appearance and
            construction, but only after approval by  the contracting officer.
                                                    10-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties

10.4.1.3     MODULAR DESIGN
            Design of laboratory casework (cabinets, counters, fume hoods) should be coordinated and compatible.
            Basic laboratory casework systems shall be composed of modular dimensioned units of modern design
            consisting of a self-supporting steel frame capable of containing service piping and drain lines and
            permitting the attachment and/or support of various styles of countertops, sinks, cupsinks, and utility
            hoses and connections, independently from base cabinet assemblies. Support systems shall provide the
            flexibility and unlimited horizontal interchangeability of any or all cabinet sizes without removal of the
            working top or  interference of immediate vertical legs, supports, brackets, or framing between
            cabinets. Fixed laboratory casework shall be similarly flexible.  The design of fixed casework shall be
            approved by the COR.

10.4.1.4     SUPPORT CAPABILITY
            The system  shall support work surfaces and steel undercounter cabinets independent of one another.
            All components shall be self-supporting and essentially independent of the building structure.  The
            system shall support sinks, service fittings, plumbing fixtures, and service and waste lines by utilizing
            pipe clamps. The assembly  shall be designed and manufactured in such a manner that each linear foot
            of span between supporting  elements, is capable of supporting a live load of 200 pounds per linear foot
            plus a dead load of 50 pounds per linear foot. In addition, it should be possible to  place a concentrated
            load of 250 pounds on the front edge of the assembly at any point (assuming legs spaced at 6 feet on
            center) without causing the system to fail in its suspension or tip or deflect more than 3/ie of an inch.

10.4.2  CABINET ASSEMBLIES
        Cabinet assemblies shall be suspended from the support system with fastener devices mounted in front of
        the unit for attachment to the front rail and shall be designed so that removal of units can be easily
        accomplished by use of common hand tools. Such fastener devices shall be of forged or cast steel and shall
        be commercially cadmium plated. Filler panels shall be provided at exposed-to-view areas, between backs
        of cabinets and walls, between backs of cabinets at the end of the peninsula or island benches, and at knee
        openings, to allow for the maintenance of mechanical services.

10.4.3  BASE CABINETS
        Casework shall be of a metal construction of slimline design and shall be built in accordance with the
        highest standards and practices of the metal casework industry. Superior quality casework shall be
        established by use of proper machinery, tools, dies, fixtures, and skilled workmanship so that  the fit of
        doors and drawers allows vertical and horizontal openings of minimum tolerance.  All units shall be of
        flush-front construction so that drawer and door faces are in the same plane as exterior case members.  All
        units shall include label holders on all drawers and doors. Each unit shall be a completely welded structure
        and should not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs,  or bottom. Six-inch drawers
        are standard in the base drawer units. Unless otherwise noted in specific room data sheets, knee spaces
        shall be 3 feet in length  and 29 inches in height.

10.4.4  WALL CABINETS
        Upper wall cabinets shall be designed so that cabinets hang rigidly vertical  without sag  or tilt. The design
        professional  shall be responsible for ensuring that proper reinforcement  is installed at the walls to support
        the load of the cabinets  and contents. Construction of wall cabinets shall be of similar to that of base
        cabinets; wall cabinets  shall be modular in design and installation to permit immediate interchangeability of
        all wall cabinets and/or  shelf units.

10.4.5  SHELVING
        The following subsections provide information on reagent and adjustable shelving.
                                                    10-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 10 - Specialties

10.4.5.1     REAGENT SHELVES
            Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch-thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate,
            with all exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (Vs-inch) thick polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or similar
            performing material.

10.4.5.2     ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
            Adjustable shelving shall be 16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing and shall be
            interchangeable with wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches in
            length, mounted at a height of 54 inches above finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard).
            Brackets shall be 16-gauge metal with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.

10.4.6  VENTED STORAGE CABINETS
        Vented acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot-wide metal cabinets. The inner surfaces of the cabinet
        shall be factory coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills. One adjustable shelf shall be provided.  Venting
        shall be as for vented chemical storage cabinets.

10.4.7  COUNTERTOPS
        Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use.  The design professional shall be responsible
        for evaluating the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable
        for each specific application. The material used for the countertop shall also be used for back-splashes,
        side-splashes, and services ledge covers. Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drainboards.
        Casework along walls shall have a 4-inch-high backsplash.

10.4.7.1     PLASTIC LAMINATE
            Chemically resistant plastic laminate countertops maybe used in many applications where the use of
            extremely corrosive chemicals or large amounts of water is not expected.

10.4.7.2     EPOXY RESIN
            Epoxy resin  (water-based) countertops shall be utilized in laboratories or in areas where large
            quantities of water or extremely corrosive chemicals are being utilized on a routine basis.  All joints
            shall be bonded with a highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having properties
            similar to those of the base material.

10.4.7.3     STAINLESS STEEL
            Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications where sterile conditions are required
            (e.g., glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled environmental
            temperatures (e.g., cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.

10.4.8  LABORATORY FUME HOODS
        Fume hoods shall be provided in all laboratories and laboratory support spaces where hazardous chemicals
        or other toxic materials are being utilized. The purpose of the  laboratory fume hood is to prevent or
        minimize the escape of contaminants from the hood into the laboratory. The fume hood work surface shall
        be of recessed design so that spills can be effectively contained.  The design professional shall be
        responsible for determining, with the users of the facility, types and sizes of fume hoods appropriate to
        their intended use.  After the mechanical/laboratory fume hood exhaust systems have been installed, the
        testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) has been completed, and the TAB Report has been approved by
        SHEMD, each laboratory  fume hood shall be certified by the hood manufacturer or his qualified
        representative to be installed and functioning according to  specifications.  See Section 15, Mechanical
        Requirements, of this Manual for more specific requirements.
                                                    10-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties

10.4.8.1     FUME HOOD LOCATION
            Fume hoods must be located away from doors, pedestrian traffic, and duct work.  The location of the
            hood shall be at the end of a room or bay, but not less than 1 foot from the corner, where the operator is
            essentially the only one who enters the zone of influence. A 5-foot minimum aisle width shall be
            maintained in front of fume hoods. It is good design practice not to have "dead-end" circulation
            patterns that may trap an individual in case of a laboratory accident. Further, hoods shall be placed in
            such a way that one hood cannot draw air from another hood.

10.4.9   ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
        Environmental rooms shall be of modular, insulated panel construction, providing temperature and humidity
        control with specified setpoint control. Temperature requirements for individual rooms shall be appropriate
        to the rooms' intended use. Rooms shall be provided with emergency auxiliary power backup to allow 24-
        hour operation. All rooms involving laboratory procedures shall be ventilated.  Fume hoods shall not be
        allowed in environmental rooms. The following should also be provided:  remote air- or water-cooled dual-
        sequencing compressor, temperature and humidity recorders, high/low alarm, adjustable epoxy-coated wire
        shelving on wall supports or movable racks, and personnel emergency alarm.
END OF SECTION 10
                                                   10-5

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 11- Equipment
                                  Section 11 - Equipment
11.1   Design
        Planning for equipment shall be integrated with the planning of architectural, structural, mechanical, and
        electrical systems. Equipment shall be arranged and organized to provide circulation, workflow, and
        maintenance clearances.
11.2   Catalog Cut Sheets
        Appropriate catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all items of equipment. Each cut sheet shall have a
        logistical category and code.  Each item shall be clearly identified if it has unique utility requirements,
        structural support needs, or space requirements.
11.3   Layout and Clearances
        Equipment should be arranged to provide service clearances and maintenance access so that service and
        maintenance can be executed with minimum disruption to workspaces. When expansion is anticipated in a
        project, the design professional should ensure that some additional equipment can be added without
        disruption or reconfiguration of workflow.
11.4   Floor Preparation
        Floor depressions shall be provided to accommodate items and design requirements, such as entrance walk-
        off grilles, cart washers, environmentally controlled room equipment, walk-in refrigerators, computer
        rooms, and any other appropriate spaces or items, except in laboratory spaces where future flexibility is a
        requirement.
11.5   Structural Support
        Wall-partitioning systems for wall-hung equipment, wall-hung workstation storage, and toilet accessories
        shall be adequately reinforced.  Ceiling support systems for service columns, hoist equipment, and other
        ceiling-mounted items shall be structurally braced.  All fixed equipment shall be mounted to resist seismic
        forces in accordance with seismic levels defined for each applicable project.
11.6   Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
        Control of ventilation for the employee working environment must be provided by the equipment supplier.
        All indoor air quality requirements shall be in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.
11.7   Equipment Specifications
        Equipment specifications shall be developed for all equipment that does not have current guide
        specifications. All equipment specifications should permit procurement of the most current model of
        equipment through General Services Administration (GSA) services where possible.  All equipment
        specifications should be developed to accommodate reputable vendors.  Equipment specifications should
        discuss the scope of services to be provided by mechanical and electrical contractors installing
        Government-furnished equipment.
                                                 11-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                              Section 11- Equipment


11.8   High-Technology Equipment
        Project-specific guidance should be obtained on high-technology equipment. Design shall be in accordance
        with selection and guidance of the respective manufacturers.
11.9   Mechanical and Electrical  Equipment
        Refer to Sections 15 (Mechanical Requirements) and 16 (Electrical Requirements) of this Manual for
        information on mechanical and electrical equipment, respectively.
11.10 Equipment Consultants
       Use of an equipment consultant is recommended for defining and specifying what research equipment must
       be procured. Such consultants shall also provide information on equipment during the design and
       construction document phases to assist in planning and documentation.
END OF SECTION 11
                                               11-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 12 - Furnishings
                                  Section  12 - Furnishings

12.1   Furnishings

        EPA requires that environmental evaluation be added to the criteria for furniture selection, considering
        topics such as VOC emissions, manufacturing practices, materials origination, recycled content and
        packing/shipping considerations.  This enhanced consideration is a core value in EPA's Environmentally
        Preferable Purchasing program.

        All major furniture items should consider the use of an environmental assessment of the manufacturing
        process  and chamber-testing of the furniture emissions, following a strict protocol. The testing protocol,
        chain-of-custody requirements,  packing and shipping instructions, and the manufacturng assessment
        instrument used for the EPA Headquarters  project are available on EPA's web site, at
        www.epa.gov/greeningepa.

        Furnishings are discussed in Chapter 6 of the Space Planning and Acquisition Guidelines (volume 1 of the
        EPA Facilities Manual). Additional information on "Green" specifications for furniture can be obtained
        from the Sustainable Facilities Practices Branch (SFPB). Sample copies of Green Rider provisions are
        available to assist in determining Green furnishings.


END OF SECTION 12
                                                   12-1

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction
                            Section  13 - Special Construction
13.1   Noise Control
        Noise levels in the different rooms of the facility should be in accordance with the American Society of
        Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) handbook, HVAC Systems and
        Applications, Chapter 52 (Sound and Vibration Control).  Proper schematic planning should isolate noise-
        sensitive areas from noise sources by separation with a nonsensitive buffer area. In addition, dedicated
        laboratory support spaces should be provided to isolate noise-producing equipment, such as centrifuges and
        vacuum pumps, from laboratories.  In any instrument or laboratory space in which one or more fume hoods
        are used, the noise level should be 55 or less decibels of sound measured on an A-scale (dBA) but shall not
        exceed 70 dBA at the working position in front of the hood.

        The combined noise resulting from several pieces of equipment shall not exceed 65 dBA when measured 3
        feet from any piece of equipment. Noise generated from vibration by heating, ventilation, and air-
        conditioning (HVAC) systems may be minimized by several means: judicious equipment selection;
        limitation of fluid flow velocities; isolation of key mechanical, piping, and ducting systems; and other
        prudent engineering and architectural means.

13.1.1   VIBRATION ISOLATION
        Vibration isolation systems should be provided on rotating mechanical equipment of greater than 1A
        horsepower (hp) (for equipment located within a critical area), greater than 5 hp (for other areas in the
        building), and greater than 10 hp (outside and within 200 feet of the building).  Reciprocating equipment
        (other than emergency equipment) shall not be used. Vibrating equipment shall not be placed on top of
        buildings, unless no other locations are feasible. Vibrating equipment that must be mounted on the roof
        shall be placed directly over columns and on pads and springs to totally isolate the vibration from the
        building structure.

        •   Concrete inertia bases will be used with rotating mechanical equipment handling liquids (e.g., pumps)
            and with compressors.  Steel frames will be used for air-handling equipment.

        •   Flexible pipe connectors (e.g., twin-sphere connectors) will be used on piping connecting  to isolated
            equipment and where piping and ducting exit the mechanical room(s).

        •   Flexible duct connectors will be used in a manner similar to flexible piping connectors.

13.1.2   PIPING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS
        Passive piping and ducting systems are defined as those that are at a great distance from their energy source
        and have low flow rates  and/or infrequent use (examples of such systems are city water, gases, and waste
        water).  Conversely, active piping systems are defined as those that are close to energy sources and can
        constitute a major vibration problem requiring isolation.

        •   Active piping and ducting shall be sized for economical flow velocities.

        •   Ducts that are less than 24 inches in diameter do not require isolation, provided that the flow velocities
            do not exceed 1,200 feet per minute. Ducting that does not meet this requirement shall be isolated.

        •   Active piping  associated with HVAC (chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam, and refrigerant
            piping) within mechanical rooms, or at least 50 feet (whichever distance is greater) from connected
            vibration-isolated equipment (e.g., chillers, pumps, air handlers) or from the ground, shall be  isolated
            from the building structure; resilient penetration sleeves shall be used where this piping penetrates

                                                    13-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 13 - Special Construction

            walls. Flexible piping connectors shall be used where the piping leaves the mechanical room.  All
            active piping in the critical area having a diameter of 4 inches or less shall be isolated.

13.1.3  SOUND DAMPENING
        Sound dampening features (acoustical treatment), preferably of rigid materials, shall be provided in
        instrument rooms so that the noise level does not exceed 55 dBa. If a hood is required in these rooms, the
        noise level shall not exceed 70 dBa at the face of the hood.
13.2   Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
        Fire walls must be structurally independent and have sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to
        allow collapse of construction on either side of the firewall without collapse of the fire wall itself. The wall
        is also required to allow collapse of the structure on one side without compromising the integrity of the
        structure on the opposite side of the fire wall. Fire walls differ from fire barrier walls, which do not require
        structural stability. Fire barrier walls may rely on the building structure for support.  Refer to National Fire
        Protection Association (NFPA) 221 for specific criteria related to fire walls and fire barrier walls.

13.2.1   FIREWALLS
        Every fire wall shall be made of noncombustible material with the fire-resistance rating required by local
        codes for segregating the building into separate buildings or fire areas.  Openings in fire walls shall be
        protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below. Unprotected windows are not allowed in fire walls.

13.2.2   FIRE BARRIER WALLS
        Unless other fire-resistive construction is provided to create a complete enclosure on all sides, all fire
        barrier walls must extend from floor slab  to floor slab or to roof deck.  Openings in fire barrier walls  shall
        be protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.

13.2.3   OPENINGS
        Openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be protected with fire-rated components capable of
        maintaining the fire-resistive integrity of the wall. The minimum fire-resistance requirement for protection
        of openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be the more restrictive  of Chapter 8 of NFPA  101 (2000
        edition) and the state building code. Greater fire resistance may be required by code requirements for
        specialized occupancies such as computer rooms and laboratories.  Fire window assemblies are allowed in
        fire barrier walls with a 1-hour or lower fire-resistance rating.  The maximum allowed glazing area in
        windows shall be the maximum area tested and shall be in accordance with NFPA 80. Refer to Chapter 2 of
        the Safety Manual for restrictions on utilities penetrating required fireproofing.


13.3   Vertical Openings and Shafts
        Fire-resistance ratings for enclosures of vertical openings and shafts shall conform to the requirements in
        NFPA 101, Chapter 8. Openings into vertical openings and shafts shall be protected by fire doors or fire
        dampers as outlined in subsection 13.3.2  and in Chapter 2, Fire Life Safety, of the Safety Manual.

13.3.1   ATRIUMS
        Atriums and other openings, where permitted by NFPA 101, NFPA 92, and the local building code, shall be
        protected in accordance with Chapter  8 of NFPA 101.  hi addition, exits shall be separately enclosed from
        the atrium. Access to exits is permitted to be within the atrium space.

13.3.2   SHAFTS
        When telephone rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces are located one above the other, the enclosure
        walls are considered to form a shaft, and protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
        of NFPA  101 and the local building code. Shafts shall not be installed between a structural member and the

                                                    13-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction

        fireproofing for that member.  If allowed by the local building code, all floor penetrations within telephone
        and electric closets can be sealed or otherwise grouted, in lieu of creating a shaft, to maintain the fire
        resistance of the floor assembly.

        Structural members passing through a shaft shall be fireproofed separately from the shaft enclosure so that
        the entire structural member is protected as required by the model building codes. The fireproofing shall be
        of concrete, plaster, or other hard material that is resistant to mechanical damage  and not subject to rusting
        or corrosion.

13.3.3  MONUMENTAL STAIRS
        Large, open stairs shall be protected by one of three methods. If the stairs are not involved in the building
        exit requirements, they may extend one floor above and one floor below the main entrance lobby, provided
        that fire partitions and self-closing fire doors are installed at the upper and lower  levels. Alternatively, they
        may be protected as a vertical opening in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 8 of NFPA 101
        (2000 edition). If the stairs are part of the exit system, they must be protected as  outlined in Chapter 7 of
        NFPA 101 (2000 edition).

13.3.4  ESCALATORS
        Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with the additional option of using
        curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in NFPA 13.

13.3.5  PENETRATIONS
        Openings around penetrations in vertical openings and shafts shall be fire-stopped as described in
        subsection 13.3.2  above.
13.4    Fire Protection

13.4.1    GENERAL
         The decision to install sprinkler protection in the facility shall be based on NFPA 101, NFPA 45, the Safety
         Manual, state and local codes, and the project criteria, whichever is most  stringent. All sprinkler systems
         shall comply with NFPA 13 and be approved by Factory Mutual or another nationally recognized insurance
         company.  Special protection systems may be used to extinguish or control fire in easily ignited,  fast-
         burning substances such as flammable liquids, some gases, and some chemicals. Such protection systems
         shall also be used to protect ordinary combustibles in certain high-value occupancies that are especially
         susceptible to damage.  Special protection systems supplement automatic  sprinklers as described by NFPA
         and shall not be used as a substitute for them except where water is not available for sprinkler protection.
         Halon systems shall not be used unless directed by the project criteria.

13.4.2    WATER SUPPLIES
         Except as noted below,  every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is available
         for use by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be provided by fire
         hydrants suitable for firefighting apparatus and located within 5 feet of paved roadways. The hydrants  shall
         be  supplied from a dependable public or private water main system.  Alternative water supplies shall be
         developed in accordance with NFPA 1142. Other water supplies shall be  available to buildings where  fire
         protection requires them. Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water  standards.

         The water supply system shall provide ample water for each  of the three types of fire protection water use:
         outside fire department  hose streams from hydrants, small and large hose  streams from inside-building
         standpipe or hose connections, and automatic sprinkler systems.  The minimum requirements for each type
         of water use shall not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.
                                                    13-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                              Section 13 - Special Construction

13.4.2.1      FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE STREAMS
             The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method outlined
             in Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office. The needed
             fire flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire area of the building. The fire
             flow for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow for the building.

13.4.2.2      STANDPIPE HOSE STREAM
             When standpipe systems are provided or required, the minimum water supply shall be in accordance
             with NFPA 14 and the local building code and shall be based on the number of standpipe risers
             provided in the building or in each fire area.

13.4.2.3      AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
             The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic  sprinkler system shall be determined by
             hydraulic calculations as required for sprinkler system designs.  The water supply requirements shall
             include all sprinkler flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.

13.4.3  SIZE AND ZONING
        The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the  fire flow and pressure requirements set by the local
        authority.  Fire pump(s) shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room along with
        the sprinkler system main valves. Sprinkler system protection zones shall have the same boundaries as the
        fire alarm system fire zones.  Each sprinkler system protection zone  shall be equipped with electrically
        supervised control valves and water flow alarm switches connected to  the fire alarm system.

13.4.4  SYSTEMS
        Fire protection systems must meet the following requirements.

13.4.4.1      AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION
             Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA facilities. All sprinkler systems shall
             be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. All design documents, including the
             hydraulic calculations, must be maintained at the building to facilitate future modifications of the
             sprinkler system An analysis shall be performed  to justify new facilities with no sprinkler protection.
             The provision of sprinkler protection (when not required by another code or standard) shall not be used
             as a basis for reducing other levels of protection provided for that facility. However, where a code or
             standard allows alternatives based on the provision of sprinklers, as in NFPA 101, the alternatives
             allowed for sprinklered space may be applied.

             Existing facilities  shall be provided with  sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:

             •    In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids, or explosive
                 materials.

             •    Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy  is 75 feet high or higher. The height
                 shall be measured from the lowest point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest
                 occupiable story.

             •    Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the local building
                 code.

             •    In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in local code.

             •    In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the General Services
                 Administration (GSA).


                                                     13-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction

             •    Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors of buildings, and windowless areas that
                 exceed the allowable limits of the local building code.

             •    In cooling towers of combustible construction under the conditions described in subsection 15.5.5.

             •    In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire-resistance
                 capabilities of exposed live-load-bearing structural elements (e.g., when a flammable-liquids
                 operation is moved into a former office area).

             •    Throughout open-plan office space that has a fuel load in excess of 6 pounds per square foot.

             •    Throughout electronic equipment operation areas,  including data storage areas. On/off type
                 sprinkler heads and sprinkler guards may be used to minimize water damage in these areas.

13.4.4.2      WET PIPE
             Sprinkler systems  shall normally be wet pipe.  Hydraulic  designs shall be performed for all systems.

13.4.4.3      DRY PIPE
             In unheated areas  or other areas subject to freezing temperatures, dry-pipe systems shall be provided.
             Because of the time delays associated with the release of the air in the system, water demands for dry-
             pipe  systems shall be computed on the basis of areas 30 percent greater than those used to computer
             demands for comparable wet-pipe systems. Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective
             to install an antifreeze system  or a small dry-pipe  system  supplied from the wet-pipe system in the main
             heated area.

13.4.4.4      PREACTION
             A preaction system shall be used where it  is particularly important to prevent the accidental discharge
             of water.  Each laboratory room must be provided with a preaction system with an individual isolation
             valve. The need for a preaction system  shall be determined on the basis  of review by, and
             recommendation of, a AEAMB professional fire protection engineer.  The detection system chosen to
             activate the preaction valve shall have a high reliability and shall be equipment with a separate
             alarm/supervisory signal to indicate status. The detection system must be designed to be more sensitive
             than the closed sprinklers in the preaction system  but should not be so sensitive as to cause false alarms
             and unnecessary actuation of the preaction valve.

13.4.4.5      DELUGE
             For extra hazard areas and specific hard-to-extinguish fuels such as explosives and pyrophoric metals, a
             deluge system with open sprinkler heads may be used to wet down the entire protected area
             simultaneously.  Deluge  systems shall comply with NFPA 13.  If quick response is required, deluge
             system piping may be primed with water.  The nozzles  must be provided with blow-off caps for water-
             filled deluge systems.

13.4.4.6      SELF-RESTORING
             Self-restoring sprinkler systems, such as the on/off multicycle system or systems using individual on/off
             sprinkler heads, shall be  considered where the water from sprinklers will become contaminated by
             contact with room contents, where there is a concern about water damage, or where water supply or
             storage volume is  marginal.

13.4.4.7      QUICK RESPONSE
             Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited. Other
             specialized automatic sprinklers, such as large drop, early-suppression fast-response,  or extended-
             coverage heads, are acceptable for use in sprinkler systems.  The use of specialized sprinklers is


                                                     13-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 13 - Special Construction

            appropriate when a higher level of protection is desired or an equivalent level of protection is necessary
            to compensate for failure to meet other code  requirements.  Use of specialized sprinkler heads should
            be limited to applications for which they have been specifically listed (e.g., UL, FM).

13.4.4.8     WATER SPRAY
            Installation of water spray systems shall comply with NFPA 15.

13.4.4.9     CARBON DIOXIDE
            Agent quantity requirements and installation procedures shall comply with NFPA 12.

13.4.4.10   DRY CHEMICAL
            Systems shall comply with NFPA 17.

            •   Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 17 and NFPA 96.
                Discharge  of dry chemical shall actuate a pressure switch connected to an alarm in the building fire
                alarm system. Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm
                requirements.

            •   Acceptance tests. After installation, all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
                ensure correct operation and function. When all necessary corrections have been made,  a full
                discharge test shall be conducted. Plastic or cotton bags shall be attached to each individual
                nozzle, and the system activated.  Cooking appliance nozzles must discharge at least 2 pounds of
                the agent, and duct or plenum nozzles must discharge at least 5 pounds of the agent.
                Preengineered systems that fail to discharge these amounts will be considered unsatisfactory.

13.4.4.11   FOAM
            Foam systems shall comply with NFPA 11, NFPA 11 A, NFPA 16, NFPA  16A, and NFPA 409.

13.4.4.12   STANDPIPES AND HOSE SYSTEMS
            NFPA 45 requires the installation of standpipe and hose systems in all laboratory buildings that are two
            or more stories above or below the grade level. Installation of standpipe systems shall comply with
            NFPA 14.  If local building fire code requirements dictate the installation of hose systems, hose
            systems shall comply with NFPA 14 and shall be pressure tested annually in accordance with the
            methods presented in NFPA 1962.

13.4.4.13   PORTABLE FIRE  EXTINGUISHERS
            Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA  10 except that halon extinguishers shall not be
            placed in any EPA facility. See Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual for more information on
            portable fire extinguishers.

13.4.4.14   HALON-1301 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
            Fire protection systems that contain halon-1301 (CF3Br, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be
            installed in new EPA facilities.  Existing systems that use halon-1301 should be removed from  service
            in accordance with Title VI of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. The hardware may be left in
            place in anticipation of an environmentally acceptable replacement.  This policy applies to both fixed
            and portable systems. The halon recovered from systems should be made available through the Halon
            Recycling Corporation (1-800-258-1283). Refer to the Environmental Management Guidelines for
            information on removal of halon systems from EPA-owned or -leased facilities. Refer also to the list of
            acceptable halon substitutes approved under the significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) (published
            by EPA's Office of Air and Radiation Stratospheric  Protection Division).
                                                    13-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction

13.4.4.15     GASEOUS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
             While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their
             use as a total flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied. Any carbon dioxide
             automatic extinguishing system that is to be used in usually occupied spaces must be reviewed and
             approved by AEAMB and SHEMD and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12 and 29 CFR
             ง1910.1 62(b)(5). A number of clean-agent,  gaseous fire-extinguishing systems are becoming available
             as an alternative to halon and carbon dioxide systems, among these FM-200 and Inergen.  Because of
             the unique nature and limited approvals  for these new systems, any design and installation shall be
             certified by a licensed professional engineer in the state and approved by the authority having
             jurisdiction.  The certification must include a detailed analysis of the hazards to be protected against;
             any limitations on, or exclusions of, hazardous chemicals that may be protected against by the design;
             and documentation to support the design concentration of the agent.  The installation of such a system
             shall meet the requirements described below.

             •   Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 2001 and other
                applicable standards for the hazard to be protected against. Discharge of a system shall actuate a
                pressure switch  or other device connected to initiate an alarm in the building fire alarm system.
                Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm requirements.

             •   Acceptance tests.  After installation, all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
                ensure correct operation and function. All approval or acceptance testing shall be performed in
                accordance with Section 4-7 of NFPA 2001.

13.4.4.16     WET CHEMICAL SYSTEMS
             Wet chemical systems are generally pre-engineered and are primarily used to protect exhaust  hoods,
             plenums, ducts and associated cooking equipment such as deep fat fryers and grills. Refer to NFPA
             17A for technical requirements,  applications, and specifications.

13.4.5  OPERATION
        Operation and maintenance instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment.  All
        personnel who may be expected  to inspect, test, maintain, or operate fire protection apparatus shall be
        thoroughly trained and kept trained in the functions they are expected to perform.

13.4.6  CODES
        In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall be
        approved by the local authority having jurisdiction over the project.
END OF SECTION 13
                                                    13-7

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 14 - Conveying Systems
                             Section 14 - Conveying  Systems
14.1   General
        Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall be in accordance with American National
        Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A17.1. Other requirements are described below.
14.2   Elevators

14.2.1   ELEVATOR RECALL
        All automatic elevators having a travel distance of 25 feet or more shall be recalled when any fire
        alarm-initiating device, such as elevator lobby smoke detectors, manual fire alarm stations, or sprinkler
        system waterflow switches, is activated. All elevators must be recalled when the recall system is activated.
        Smoke detectors other than those required by ANSI A17.1  shall not initiate automatic elevator recall.

14.2.2   SMOKE DETECTORS
        Smoke detectors shall be provided for every elevator lobby, including the main lobby. Smoke detectors that
        activate the automatic elevator recall are also required in the elevator machine rooms. Elevator lobby
        smoke detectors should not initiate the building fire alarm system but shall send an alarm to the fire
        department or central station service and shall activate the elevator recall system.

14.2.3   CAPTURE FLOOR
        An alternate capture floor shall be provided in accordance with Rule 211.3b(2) of ANSI A 17.1.  Activation
        of an alarm-initiating device on the main capture floor shall return the elevators to the alternate capture
        floor.

14.2.4   SIGNAGE
        Signs must be placed in the elevator lobbies next to all elevators to inform occupants not to use the
        elevators if there is a fire.

14.2.5   CHEMICAL TRANSPORT USE
        If elevators are used to transport chemicals, provisions shall be made to ensure that nonlaboratory personnel
        and space (administrative or business occupancies) are not exposed to or contaminated by chemical
        substances.  For example, chemicals must be packaged in accordance with U.S. Department of
        Transportation (DOT) specifications, or an alternative route of transport must be provided. This alternative
        route may include an elevator opening into  a vestibule separate from administrative or business
        occupancies, a multiple-door elevator entering into a laboratory, separate dumbwaiters,  or alternate
        corridors or  routes. A combination of these options can be used to achieve this goal.
14.3   Escalators
        Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with an additional option of providing
        curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13.
END OF SECTION 14
                                                   14-1

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
                       Section  15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.1   General
        The design professional shall be responsible for ensuring that all mechanical systems conform to the
        requirements of this section and that all systems are installed and operating in accordance with all governing
        codes, ordinances, and regulations; the most current edition of applicable publications; and as set forth
        below. The design professional is responsible for the design of all mains, lines, meters, and other
        mechanical components required for utility services. The building mechanical systems shall provide a safe
        and suitable environment both for occupants and for functional operation of the facility, and shall meet
        EPA's energy conservation and atmospheric emissions goals.
15.2   References
        All work discussed in this section shall comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes,
        regulations, ordinances, publications, and manuals. When codes or publications conflict, the most stringent
        standard shall govern.  Unless otherwise specified in this Manual or approved by the Architecture,
        Engineering and Asset Management Branch (AEAMB) and the Safety, Health and Environmental
        Management Division (SHEMD), all mechanical system installations shall conform to the standards listed
        below:

        •    Installation of Oil Burning Equipment (NFPA 31)
        •    Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines (NFPA 37)
        •    Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals (NFPA 45)
            National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54)
        •    Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58)
        •    Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (NFPA 5 9 A)
        •    Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment (NFPA 75)
        •    Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
        •    Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials (NFPA 91)
            Smoke Control Systems (NFPA 92A)
        •    Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations (NFPA 96)
            Water Cooling Towers (NFPA 214)
        •    Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1)
            Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI/ASHRAE 62)
        •    Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment (ANSI Z358.1)
        •    Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems (ANSI/American
            Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Z9.2)
            Laboratory Ventilation (ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5)
        •    Protecting Building Environment from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks
            (OHHS/NIOSH Publication 2002-139)
        •    Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standards
            Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration  (ANSI/ASHRAE 15)
        •    Method for Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods (ANSI/ASHRAE 110)
        •    Building Air Quality: EPA Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, EPA/400/1-91/033 or
            December 1991
        •    Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice, American Conference of Government
            Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
        •    Prudent Practices in the Laboratory:  Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research
            Council, 1995
                                                  15-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        •   National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 49 for Biohazard Safety Cabinets.
        •   NSF standard 61 Drinking Water System Components.


15.3   Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Design  Criteria
        A heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (HVAC) system that will  satisfy the requirements indicated in
        this document shall be provided.

15.3.1   GENERAL
        Building HVAC systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major HVAC equipment components shall
        be selected, on the basis of a consideration of health and safety requirements, occupant comfort, attributed
        atmospheric emissions, initial costs, operating costs, and maintenance costs. A life cycle cost analysis
        (LCCA) shall be performed using the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Handbook
        135 "Life-Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program" to select the most cost-
        effective HVAC system.

15.3.2   VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
        Indoor space shall meet the  EPA National Ambient Air Quality Standards and the ventilation rates
        established in ASHRAE 62-2001.  Design air quantities and transport velocities shall be calculated
        according  to the methods prescribed in the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, the
        ASHRAE Applications Handbook, and the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation manual.

15.3.2.1     LABORATORY VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
            Laboratories must comply with unique ventilation requirements in accordance with the latest version of
            ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 and NFPA 45. The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building
            (including corridors) where the laboratory and laboratory support rooms are located shall be designed
            with 100 percent outside air ventilation systems with exhaust through hoods where hoods are used.
            These sections of the laboratory building, as well as  the hazardous chemical storage building, shall
            have an independent air handling unit(s). Under no circumstances will the air supplied to any
            laboratory space be recirculated to any other space.  HVAC  systems should be continuously operational
            24 hours a day, 7 days a week, summer and winter.  The general exhaust and special instrument canopy
            hoods in these sections  and in the hazardous chemical storage building shall be constant volume at all
            times; the only exceptions are to accommodate variable air volume (VAV) systems or two-flow (night
            setback)  systems.

            Minimum airflow requirement to be maintained in a laboratory is 25 cfm per square foot of laboratory
            fume  hood  (LFH) work surface with the sash closed or four air changes per hour for an unoccupied
            laboratory during night time, weekend or holiday setback, or calculated to prevent concentration of
            volatile vapors at or above 25 percent of their lower flammable/explosive limit (LEL) within the hood;
            and not less than eight air changes per hour during occupied hours. Specifications for controls and
            monitoring devices for  exhaust and air-handling units should be  consistent with these minimum airflow
            requirements.  The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well as the temperature
            and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum air changes per hour.

            Laboratory spaces  shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level relative to other common spaces
            that is appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory
            corridor  and non-laboratory spaces.  Levels of pressurization shall be project specific.

15.3.2.2     ADDITIONAL SPECIAL VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
            All processes, operations, or other situations that present the possibility of hazardous  accumulation of
            combustible or explosive vapors, dust, fumes, or other airborne substances shall be provided with
            ventilation in accordance with NFPA 91 and NFPA 45 and shall be 100 percent exhausted to


                                                   15-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

             atmosphere outside the building.  To avoid re-entrainment, design for exhaust systems shall conform to
             ASHRAE 52-76 and ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.  Project criteria shall indicate other areas of
             nonrecirculation. Air from adjacent spaces can be used as the ventilation supply air for the  100 percent
             exhausted spaces, as long as:

             •    Ventilation by this method does not violate any requirements of ANSI Z9.5, NFPA 45, NFPA
                 90A, or NFPA 101 or special space pressurization requirements.

             •    The air supplied is not potentially more hazardous than the air from the space being exhausted.

             •    Adjacent spaces are not laboratory or specialty spaces requiring once-through ventilation.

             In addition, the following spaces have special ventilation considerations:

             •    Restrooms, janitor closets, garbage rooms, and other malodorous spaces shall be exhausted to
                 atmosphere outside the building at a rate of not less than 50 cfm per toilet or urinal, and as
                 specified in ASHRAE 62 or in local building codes, whichever is more stringent, regardless of any
                 other calculated ventilation requirements.

             •    Commercial cooking equipment used in processes that produce smoke or grease shall be designed
                 and protected in accordance with NFPA 96. Any insulation shall be of noncombustible materials.
                 If other utilities are included in a vertical shaft with the grease duct, they shall not be insulated  or
                 lined with combustible materials.

             •    Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be exhausted so that room temperature does not
                 exceed National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) equipment ratings.  The project
                 criteria shall establish the space temperature limits. Where mechanical ventilation cannot maintain
                 a satisfactory environment, evaporative cooling systems (indirect evaporative cooling for electrical
                 rooms) or other mechanical cooling systems shall be provided. Exhaust air openings should be
                 located adjacent to heat-producing equipment to minimize ambient thermal loads. Thermostatic
                 controls shall be used to operate the ventilation and exhaust systems.

             •    Equipment rooms containing refrigeration equipment shall be ventilated in  accordance  with
                 ASHRAE standard 15. For all equipment rooms with fuel-burning appliances or equipment,
                 combustion air for these appliances and this equipment shall be drawn directly from the outside, in
                 accordance with the International Building Code, National Fire Protection Association  (NFPA)
                 codes, and the ASHRAE Guide and Data Books.

15.3.3  EQUIPMENT DESIGN TEMPERATURES

15.3.3.1      INSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
             Environmental design  temperatures and relative humidity for special space uses other than those listed
             here shall be designated in the project criteria. The design temperatures shall be 5 degrees Fahrenheit
             (ฐF) lower for cooling, and 5 ฐF higher for heating, than the required operating temperature.

             When space cooling is required, the inside design temperature for maintaining personnel comfort shall
             be 70ฐF, dry bulb (db), unless otherwise indicated in project criteria. The relative humidity shall be 50
             percent. Summer humidification shall not be provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall be
             designed to maintain the relative humidity conditions of space through the normal cooling process and
             should not have controls that limit the maximum relative humidity unless system type or project-
             specific criteria dictate.
                                                    15-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            The inside design wintertime temperature for personnel comfort shall be 72 ฐF db unless otherwise
            indicated here or directed by other project-specific criteria.  All storage areas shall have a minimum
            temperature of 40ฐF to prevent freezing.  Except where it can be substantiated from records or
            engineering computations that the inside relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter
            humidification for personnel comfort and health shall not be provided.  Where such a condition has
            been substantiated, a design relative humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum
            requirements for humidification equipment.

15.3.3.2     OUTSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
            The HVAC system equipment shall be designed by using the outside design temperatures shown in
            Table 15.3.3.2, Outside Design Conditions, for the particular application.  The percentages of dry bulb
            (db) and wet bulb (wb) temperatures are derived from the sources of tabulated weather data described
            below.  When data for a particular location are not listed, design conditions shall be estimated from
            data available at nearby weather stations or by interpolation between values from stations, taking into
            account elevation and other local conditions  affecting design data. Weather data for use in sizing
            HVAC  equipment shall be  obtained from the local weather station and/or the ASHRAE Handbook of
            Fundamentals.


Table 15.3.3.2 Outside Design Conditions	
        Winter                      Summer                                   Application
99% to 99.6% db      1% to 0.4% db and mean coincident      Process, laboratory, and other uses where close
                      wb                                    temperature and humidity control is required by
                                                             project criteria
97.5 to 99% db        2.5 to 1.0% db and mean coincident      Personnel comfort systems
                      wb
                      -|o/o wfo                                 Cooling towers* and research, technical-type
                                                             systems
	1% db plus 5EF	Air-cooled condensers*	
*Temperature should be verified by reviewing actual site conditions.	
15.3.3.3     EVAPORATIVE/ADIABATIC COOLING
            In locations where a wide variation exists between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for extended
            periods of time, evaporative/adiabatic cooling shall be considered for the applications listed below.
            Selection of cooler types shall depend on system configuration, user experience, and LCCA. All
            evaporative coolers shall maintain a positive water-bleed and water-makeup system for control of
            mineral buildup.

            Applications for which evaporating adiabatic cooling are considered include warehouses, shops that do
            not require close (within 5ฐF plus or minus) temperature control, nonresidential-size kitchens, makeup
            air ventilation units, and mechanical equipment spaces.

            Air duct design, number and location of coolers, and relief of the higher rate of air supply to the
            atmosphere shall be considered as means of ensuring a satisfactory operating system. Multistage
            evaporative cooling systems shall also be considered.

            Indoor design dry bulb temperatures for spaces that are air-conditioned by adiabatic cooling systems
            shall be as specified in project-specific criteria. Design operating efficiency of adiabatic cooling
            equipment shall be at least 70 percent.  System-installed capacity shall  be based on the peak design
            cooling load  for the air-conditioned space.  An arbitrary air-change rate shall not be used for design
                                                    15-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            airflow.  Adiabatic cooler specifications shall be stated in terms of the air capacity, the entering
            ambient  dry and wet bulb temperatures, and the leaving dry bulb temperature.

15.3.4  EQUIPMENT SIZING
        HVAC equipment shall be sized to satisfy the building and cooling load requirements and to meet all
        equipment design and selection criteria contained in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and
        Equipment, HVAC Applications,  and Refrigeration  handbooks.  The capacity of central heating,
        refrigeration, and ventilation equipment shall be set for the peak block building or the maximum
        simultaneous zone heating and cooling  design loads and in accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook of
        Fundamentals. The equipment shall not be sized for future additional capacity or to provide redundancy
        unless indicated in project-specific criteria.  Individual zone equipment shall be sized according to the peak
        zone load.

15.3.5  LOAD CALCULATIONS
        Load calculations shall be based on data and procedures outlined in the ASHRAE handbooks and shall be
        in accordance with the conditions specified in this Manual. Load calculations may be performed manually
        or by a nationally recognized computer-based load program.  Specialty programs that are not recognized
        must be approved by the contracting officer prior to use.  If a separate auxiliary air system is provided, the
        auxiliary air must be heated and cooled to within the room dry bulb temperature.  Auxiliary air shall not
        exceed 70 percent of total fume hood exhaust requirements.

15.3.6  WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
        Energy conservation and waste heat recovery systems shall be considered and designed according to the
        procedures outlined in specific chapters of the ASHRAE Fundamentals,  Systems and Equipment,
        Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks, and the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National
        Association (SMACNA) Energy  Recovery Equipment and Systems Manual. The following types of heat-
        recovery methods and systems  shall be  considered for incorporation into the building HVAC system design
        where appropriate.

        •   Use of heat pipe or coil runaround  systems for  heating and air-conditioning air-handling systems.  Use
            of rotary heat wheel heat exchange is not permitted in laboratory fume hood, laboratory, or laboratory
            support area exhaust systems.  Rotary heat wheels may be used in administrative area exhaust systems.

        •   Recovery of rejected heat from the condenser systems of central station cooling equipment for use in
            heating the remainder of the  building (when the central station cooling  equipment must operate during
            the heating season to cool computer rooms or high internal gain areas or to meet process requirements).

        •   Use of exhaust  heat from the condenser systems of continuously operated refrigeration equipment for
            space heating or domestic hot-water heating.

        •   Use of a free cooling system that uses cooling tower water (water-side economizer) when air-side
            economizer systems are not feasible.

        •   Use of a heat pump run-around loop.

15.3.7  ENERGY EFFICIENCY
        After a careful study of the  facility's requirements as well  as of the day-to-day operation of its various
        departments has been made, systems shall be designed that meet the operating requirements in an energy-
        efficient manner.  The local utility companies shall be contacted to  evaluate the attributed atmospheric
        emissions and the system dollar credits  for load shifting to off-peak times. The health and safety aspects of
        the  operation must be given first priority, and they cannot  be relaxed or traded off for greater efficiency.
                                                    15-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.4   Automatic Control Systems

15.4.1   GENERAL
        This subsection covers automatic temperature and humidity controls, space pressurization controls, safety
        controls, and energy monitoring and central supervisory control systems. A complete automatic control
        system shall be designed by an HVAC controls design engineer with experience in designing systems of this
        type and complexity.  A commissioning plan shall be submitted to and approved by EPA prior to the
        commissioning of the  control system.

        The final product shall be a complete, reliable, fully functional, maintainable, fully integrated, addressable,
        control system that has been properly designed, installed, and commissioned. In existing facilities, the
        design shall be integrated and interfaced into the existing control system so that the new equipment and
        conditions can be controlled and monitored similar to the existing controlled equipment.

15.4.1.1     TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
            The control system shall be a direct digital control (DDC) system reflecting the latest technology that
            has been widely accepted by the control industry.  DDC systems shall be electric/electronic only.
            Pneumatics shall  not be allowed except in instances when the existing controls absolutely require that
            the new controls be pneumatic. The system shall be complete and suitable for the HVAC systems to be
            installed. The DDC system shall be compatible with any existing systems in the facility or shall be able
            to completely and seamlessly interface with the existing central control and monitoring system (CCMS)
            network.  All control points, including the VAV controllers, shall be fully compatible with the CCMS,
            allowing complete monitoring, control, and setpoint adjustment of all points and VAV terminal unit
            controllers from the CCMS host. Outside air quantity to each air handling unit shall be automatically
            controlled at a volume to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62-2001.  Typical points to be
            monitored and controlled include:

        •   Air Handling Units
                 •    Leaving air temperature
                 •    Entering air temperature
                 •    Entering chilled water temperature
                 •    Leaving chilled water temperature
                 •    Entering hot water temperature
                 •    Leaving hot water temperature
                 •    Temperature and humidity in each zone
                 •    Fan speed indication
                 •    Filter differential pressure
                 •    Supply air quantity
                 •    Outside  air quantity

            Central Plant
                 •    Chiller on-off (each  chiller)
                 •    Chilled water temperature in and out
                 •    Chiller status
                 •    Boiler on-off (each boiler)
                 •    Hot water temperature in and out
                 •    Boiler status
                 •    Steam-HW heat exchanger, water temperature in and out
                 •    Pump  on-off indication, each pump
                 •    Cooling Tower fan speed
                 •    Condenser water temperature in and  out
                 •    Steam pressure and temperature


                                                    15-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
        •   Variable Air Volume Zones (through VAV unit controller)
                •    Zone temperature
                •    Zone primary air flowrate (supply and exhaust volumes, CFM)
                •    Zone temperature setpoint

        •   Alarm Print Outs
                •    Chiller failure to start
                •    Air handling unit fan failure
                •    Zone space temperature rise to 5 degrees (F) above set point
                •    Chilled water rise 5 degrees above set point
                •    Hot water fall 5 degrees below set point
                •    Zone RH 5% above set point
                •    Pump failure.
                •    Water on Floor of Mechanical Room
                •    Laboratory fume hood sash position and hood alarm condition

        •   Points to be Controlled:
                •    Start/stop chillers/chilled water pumps
                •    Reset chilled water temperature
                •    Start/stop boilers/hot water pumps
                •    Reset hot water temperature
                •    Start/stop air handling units
                •    Start/stop exhaust and supply fans
                •    Setpoint adjust - all controllers with setpoints
                •    Enable/disable economizer cycles
                •    Setpoint adjust - all VAV zone

15.4.1.2     CODES AND STANDARDS
            The following codes and standards shall be referenced as applicable:
            •   ASHRAE 135-1995: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and
                Control Networks.  American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
                Inc. 1995 including Addendums A through E
            •   UL 916, Energy Management Systems
            •   NEMA 250, Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
                NEMAICS1:  General Standards for Industrial Controls
            •   NFPA 45, Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
            •   NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (where
                applicable to controls and control sequences)
                NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

15.4.1.3     CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMISSION
            The design submission shall include complete control system drawings, complete technical
            specifications, and commissioning procedures for each control system.  As a minimum, the following
            documentation shall be required for review by proper EPA officials:

            HVAC Control System Drawings:  Each control system element on a drawing shall have a unique
            identifier. The HVAC control system drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal.

            HVAC control system drawings shall include the following: drawing index, HVAC control system
            legend, valve schedule, damper schedule, control system  schematic and equipment schedule, sequence
                                                   15-7

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            of operation and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay wiring
            diagram, communication network and block diagram, DDC panel installation and block diagram.

            •   The HVAC control system drawing index shall show the name and number of the building, state or
                other similar designation, and country.  The HVAC control system legend  shall show generic
                symbols and the name of devices shown on the HVAC control system drawings.

            •   The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient Cv, pressure
                drop at specified flow rate, spring range, actuator size, close-off pressure data,  dimensions, and
                access and clearance requirements data.

            •   The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and actual
                sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, locations of actuators and damper
                end switches, arrangement of sections in multi-section dampers, and methods of connecting
                dampers, actuators, and linkages.  The damper schedule shall include the maximum leakage rate at
                the operating static-pressure differential. The damper schedule shall contain actuator selection
                data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and seal the dampers,  access and
                clearance requirements.

            •   The HVAC control system schematics shall show all control and mechanical devices associated
                with the HVAC  system. A system schematic drawing shall be submitted for each HVAC system.

            •   The HVAC control system equipment schedule shall be in the form shown. All devices shown on
                the drawings having unique identifiers shall be referenced in the equipment schedule. An
                equipment schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.

            •   Sequences of operation shall be submitted  for each HVAC control system  including each type of
                terminal unit control system.  A complete sequence of operation shall  be included on the drawings
                along with a schematic control diagram for each typical system. The sequence of operation and
                schematic control diagrams shall specifically cover the following items and others as the project
                requires.

                1)  Refrigeration compressor control
                2)  Refrigeration system protective devices
                3)  Chilled, DX  and hot water control
                4)  Water coil or evaporator control, temperature and/or humidity as required
                5)  Cooling tor or air-cooled condenser control
                6)  Air handling unit control with protective devices
                7)  Individual unit control
                8)  Motor interlocks with system,  starting and stopping instruction
                9)  All thermostat, humidistat, and protective device control settings

            •   The HVAC control system wiring diagrams shall be functional wiring diagrams which show the
                interconnection  of conductors and cables to HVAC control panel terminal blocks and to the
                identified terminals of devices, starters and package equipment. The wiring diagrams shall show
                necessary jumpers and ground connections. The wiring diagrams shall show the  labels of all
                conductors.  Sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged equipment
                control systems  shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system
                control panel, magnetic starter, or packaged equipment control circuit. Wiring diagrams shall be
                submitted for each HVAC control system.

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

             Service Organizations:  A list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC control system
             shall be provided. The  list shall include the service organization name, address, technical point of
             contact and telephone number, and contractual point of contact and telephone number.

             Equipment Compliance Booklet:  The HVAC Control System Equipment Compliance Booklet (ECB)
             shall be provided. It shall consist of, but not be limited to, data sheets and catalog cuts which document
             compliance of all devices and components with the  specifications. The ECB shall include a Bill of
             Materials for each HVAC control system. The Bill of Materials shall function as the table of contents
             for the ECB and shall include the device's unique identifier, device function, manufacturer, and
             model/part/catalog number used for ordering.

             Performance Verification Test Procedures:  The performance verification test procedures shall refer to
             the devices by their unique identifiers, and shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results
             that will demonstrate that the HVAC control and LFH exhaust systems performs in accordance with the
             sequences of operation, and other contract documents.

             Training: An outline for the HVAC control system  training course with a proposed time schedule.
             Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 60 days prior
             to the start of the training. Three copies of HVAC control system training course material 30 days
             prior to the  scheduled start of the training course. The training course material shall include the
             operation manual, maintenance and repair manual, and paper copies of overheads used in the course.

             Operation Manual. Maintenance and Repair Manual: The HVAC Control System Operation Manual
             and the HVAC Control System Maintenance and Repair Manual shall be provided for each HVAC
             control system.

15.4.2  HUMIDITY CONTROL
        Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-
        zone basis and not for the entire  central ventilation system unless required for project-specific humidity
        requirements as  stated in the project criteria.  No controls shall be provided for dehumidifying spaces to
        below 50 percent relative space humidity or for humidifying spaces to greater than 30 percent relative space
        humidity unless required by project-specific criteria.

15.4.3  SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING
        Simultaneous heating and cooling, which controls comfort conditions within a space by reheating or
        recooling supply air or by concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems to serve a
        common zone, shall not be used  except under the following conditions:

        •    Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature or humidity.

        •    Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
             cooling to prevent space relative humidity from rising above special-space relative humidity
             requirements.

        •    Project-specific building construction constraints, as established in the project criteria, prohibit
             installation of other types of HVAC systems.

15.4.4  MECHANICAL VENTILATION CONTROL
        All supply, return, and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual control of
        fan operation to  shut off the fan when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside  air
        when ventilation is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual gravity-operated or
        automatic control of dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief. Systems that circulate air shall be


                                                    15-9

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        provided with minimum outdoor air damper position control to ensure that the minimum amount of outdoor
        air is being introduced into the system.  Unless otherwise required by life safety or the specific project
        criteria, automatic dampers should fail open for return air and fail to  a minimum setting for outside air.

15.4.5   ENERGY CONSERVATION CONTROL SCHEMES
        HVAC systems will be provided with automatic controls which will allow systems to be operated to
        conserve energy.  The following energy saving controls will be considered, if applicable to the system:

        •    Enthalpy controlled economizer cycle
        •    Controls to close outside air supply when the facility is unoccupied (for non-laboratory areas only)
        •    Night setback controls where appropriate
        •    Master outdoor temperature sensing unit that resets the supply hot water temperature in accordance
             with outdoor ambient temperature. This sensing unit shall automatically shut off the heating system
             and the circulating pumps when the outdoor temperature reaches 65 degrees F (unless needed for
             research)
        •    Controls to shut off exhaust fans, where appropriate
        •    Reset controls for hot and cold decks on air conditioning systems having hot and cold decks.

15.4.6   AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
        Automatic air control dampers must be of the  low-leakage type with a maximum leakage of 6 cfm per
        square foot at a maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute (fpm) and a 1-inch pressure differential,
        as stipulated in Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standard 500.  The dampers shall be
        opposed-blade type for modulating control, but may be  parallel-blade type for two-position control. Pilot
        positioners and operators shall be out of the airstream.

15.4.7   VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEM FAN CONTROL
        Variable-air-volume (VAV) systems shall be designed with control devices that sense ductwork static air
        pressure and velocity air pressure, and control supply-fan airflow and static pressure output through
        modulation of variable inlet vanes, inlet/discharge dampers, scroll dampers, bypass dampers, variable pitch
        blades, or variable frequency electric drive controls, as described in ASHRAE HVAC Applications
        Handbook, Chapter 41, and ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 18.  These
        control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in ductwork downstream of the
        fan and one static pressure controller to vary fan output through either the inlet vane, the damper, the belt
        modulator, or the speed control. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices that
        control the operation of the fans to monitor air volumes and maintain fixed  minimum outdoor air ventilation
        requirements.

15.4.8   FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION AND PROTECTION CONTROLS
        All air-handling systems shall be provided with the smoke and fire protection controls  required by NFPA
        72.  All supply, return, relief, and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have interlock controls that interface
        with the fire and smoke detection system controls. In the event of fire, these interlock  controls shall either
        turn  offer selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the  spread of smoke and fire through the
        building.  These controls shall comply with NFPA 90A.

        Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls as  required by NFPA
        91.  Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems  shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety  controls as
        required by NFPA 96.

        Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:
             NFPA 72
             NFPA 90A
             NFPA 92A
                                                   15-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        •   ASHRAE manual, Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
        •   ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems and Equipment.

        Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in
        Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

15.4.9  GAS-FIRED AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL
        Gas-fired air-handling units shall be equipped with operating limit, safety control, and combustion control
        systems. Gas burner and combustion controls shall comply with Factory Mutual (FM) loss prevention data
        sheets and be listed in the FM Approval Guide.  Gas-fired air-handling units shall have controls that lock
        out the gas supply in the following conditions:

        •   Main or  pilot flame failure
        •   Unsafe discharge temperature (high limit)
        •   High or low gas pressure
        •   No proof of airflow over heat exchanger
        •   Combustion air loss
        •   Loss of control system actuating energy.

15.4.10 COOLING TOWER AND WATER-COOLED CONDENSER SYSTEM CONTROLS
        Controls for cooling towers shall conform to NFPA 214, Standard on Water-Cooling Towers. Design of
        cooling tower fans shall consider use of variable-speed drives (if feasible) or two-speed motors (if feasible)
        and on/off controls  to reduce power consumption and maintain condenser water temperature. Bypass valve
        control shall be provided, if required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order to maintain
        the temperature of entering condenser water at the low limit.  To decrease compressor energy use,
        condenser water temperature  shall be allowed to float, as long as the temperature remains above the lower
        limit required by the chiller.  The design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the cooling
        tower is operated under freezing conditions, shall provide additional heat and control system components to
        maintain cooling tower sump  water temperatures above freezing.

        When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the condenser water system to provide
        condenser water to laboratory equipment that may require it.  In  addition, provisions for supplying
        emergency condenser water to laboratory equipment may be required.

15.4.11 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEMS
        The entire control system shall be connected to the central control and monitoring system (CCMS) network.
        The VAV controllers shall be fully compatible with the CCMS allowing complete monitoring, control, and
        setpoint adjustment of all VAV  terminal unit controllers from the CCMS host.  One personal computer must
        be provided for monitoring, controlling and resetting of any control device in the complex.  This computer
        shall also serve as the connection through a modem to a CCMS.  A minimum of one laptop computer shall
        also be provided for use as a field interface device to monitor, control, and reset any applicable point for
        any control device.  The supplier of the control system shall provide three (3) copies of the operating
        software (one copy  on the central control computer and 2 sets on CDs) and three (3) sets of technical
        manuals for the control system to the EPA.  This system must be expandable to include the future phases.

15.4.12 ENERGY METERING
        All utilities including electric, gas, oil, and potable water utilities to be monitored shall be metered and
        tracked by the central control and monitoring system (CCMS). All meters shall be compatible with the
        installed control system, shall be provided with signaling devices and shall fully interface with building
        HVAC control panel. Submetering  of utilities to various buildings or equipment shall be based on project
        criteria or, in the absence of these, on sound engineering judgment. Sub-metering of lighting systems
        should also be considered.
                                                   15-11

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.4.13 DDC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
        Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer.  Each major component of
        equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a
        conspicuous place.  Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
        engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
        The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to
        use on a project. The two years' use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
        circumstances and of similar size.  The two years' experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product
        which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers'
        catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a
        certified record of satisfactory, field operation, for not less than 6,000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's
        factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. Items of the
        same type and purpose shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts and components.

        Portable Workstation/Tester:  A  portable workstation/tester shall be a Dell Inspiron 2600 or equivalent. It
        shall include carrying case, extra battery, charger and a compatible network adapter. The workstation/tester
        shall:

        •    Run DDC diagnostics.
        •    Load all DDC memory resident programs and information,  including parameters and constraints.
        •    Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
        •    Control any analog output (AO) or digital output (DO).
        •    Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full English
             language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
        •    Display database parameters.
        •    Modify database parameters.
        •    Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a  specific DDC.  Provide all
             necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including an EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA
             232-Fport.
             Disable/enable each DDC.
        •    Perform all workstation functions as specified.

        Central Workstation/Tester: A central workstation/tester shall be tester shall be a Dell Dimension 4500 or
        equivalent. The central workstation/tester shall:

        •    Run DDC diagnostics.
        •    Load all DDC memory resident programs and information,  including parameters and constraints.
        •    Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
             Control any AO or DO.
        •    Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full English
             language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
        •    Display database parameters.
        •    Modify database parameters.
        •    Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a  specific DDC.  Provide all
             necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including an EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA
             232-Fport.
        •    Disable/enable each DDC.
        •    Perform all workstation functions as specified.

15.4.14 DDC SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
        All DDC software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete DDC system.
        Updates to the software shall be provided for system, operating  and application software, and operation in


                                                    15-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        the system shall be verified.  Updates shall be incorporated into operations and maintenance manuals, and
        software documentation.  There shall be at least one scheduled update near the end of the first years'
        warranty period, at which time the latest released version of the Contractor's software shall be installed and
        validated.
15.5   Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Systems

15.5.1   GENERAL
        Selection of central station cooling systems shall be based on the LCCA procedures. Size, selection, and
        design shall be based on guidelines in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and
        HVAC Applications handbooks. Refrigeration equipment shall comply with Air-Conditioning and
        Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 520,  ARI 550, and ARI 590. To ensure the most economical operation, the
        number and size of central station  cooling units shall be based on the annual estimated partial-load
        operation of the plant.

        •   The project design criteria shall provide direction on installed standby chiller capacity. Wherever
            possible, the central station chilled-water equipment  shall be designed into the chilled-water
            distribution systems as part of a primary-secondary loop system maintaining the chilled-water inlet
            temperature below a maximum predetermined value; ideally, the central station cooling equipment will
            be the  secondary portion of the loop.

        •   Temperature-critical areas (such as laboratories and computer centers), as determined by project
            criteria, shall be provided with independent refrigeration systems with backup systems if the areas are
            involved with vital programs.  Use of off-peak cooling systems shall be considered in areas that have
            high electric peak demand charges.

15.5.2   AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
        The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment for the mechanical systems shall use refrigerants
        acceptable  under EPA's Significant New Alternatives Program (SNAP) under 40  CFR Part 82, Protection
        of Stratospheric  Ozone. Chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) refrigerants shall be avoided. The use of
        hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC)  will be permitted only if the equipment required cannot be replaced with
        equipment  that uses a non-ozone-depleting refrigerant.  Existing chillers should be retrofitted or replaced to
        meet the requirements of 40 CFR Part 82. The refrigerant in air-conditioning systems should be recycled
        during servicing, as required under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act. Except as set forth herein, all air-
        conditioning and ventilating systems for the handling of air that is not contaminated with flammables or
        explosive vapors or dust shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.

15.5.3   WATER CHILLERS
        The selection of centrifugal, reciprocating, helical, rotary-screw, absorption, or steam-powered chillers shall
        be based on coefficients of performance under full-load and partial-load conditions; these coefficients are
        used in analysis done by LCCA methods. LCCA shall also consider the pumping-energy burdens on the
        chilled-water and condenser water system as part of the evaluation. Compression refrigeration machines
        shall be designed with the safety controls, relief valves, and rupture disks  noted below, and design shall be
        in compliance with the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE 15 and Underwriters Laboratories  (UL) 207.

        •   Controls shall include, at a minimum:
                 High-discharge refrigerant pressure cutout switch
                 Low-evaporator refrigerant pressure or temperature cutout switch
                 High and low oil pressure switches
                 Chilled-water flow interlock switch
                 Condenser water flow interlock switch (on water-cooled equipment)


                                                   15-13

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

                 Chilled-water low-temperature cutout switch.

        •   Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable-speed control for
            capacity modulation.  Units shall be capable of modulating to 10 percent of design capacity without
            surge. Reciprocating compressors shall be designed for capacity control by cylinder unloading.
            Designs using hot-gas bypass control of compressors for capacity modulation shall not be used except
            when capacity modulation is required at conditions below 10 percent of the rated load. Compressor
            motors for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in compliance with all requirements of the National
            Electrical Code (NEC).

        •   Absorption refrigeration machines shall be provided with the following safety controls, at a minimum:

                 Condenser water flow switch
                 Chilled-water flow switch
                 Evaporation refrigerant level switch
                 Generator high-temperature limit switch (gas-fired units)
                 Generator shell bursting disc  (high-temperature water or steam)
                 Concentration limit controls.

        •   Liquid coolers (evaporators) shall be designed to meet the design pressure, material, welding, testing,
            and relief requirements of ASHRAE standard 15 and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
            (ASME) Boiler and Pressure  Vessel Code, Section VIII. Evaporators shall be selected according to the
            requirements of ASHRAE standard 24-78.

15.5.4   CONDENSERS/CONDENSING UNITS
        Water-cooled condensers  shall comply with ASHRAE standard 15 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
        Code, Section VIII. Water-cooled condenser  shells and tubes shall have removable heads, if available, to
        allow tube cleaning.  The use of marine water boxes on the condenser shall be considered for ease of tube
        cleaning.

        Air-cooled condensers and condensing units shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ARI
        460 and ASHRAE standard 20. Air-cooled condenser intakes shall be located away from any obstructions
        that will restrict airflow.  Air-cooled equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-
        cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-head-pressure control to maintain satisfactory operation during
        light loading.

15.5.5   COOLING TOWERS
        Cooling towers shall be located and placed to  avoid problems with water drift and deposition of water
        treatment chemicals. Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict
        airflow, cause recirculation of discharge air, or inhibit maintenance. Cooling tower location should
        consider noise for building and neighboring occupants.

15.5.5.1     Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling
            Tower Institute (CTI) Bulletin ATC-105.

15.5.5.2     Cooling towers shall have a conductivity  meter installed to monitor water chemistry and automatically
            control cooling tower blowdown and water treatment chemical addition. The conductivity meter shall
            be regularly calibrated and  maintained. Cooling tower water treatment vendors shall be instructed that
            water conservation is a key operating consideration. Vendors shall be selected based on past
            performance, cost to treat 1,000 gallons of make-up water, and highest recommended water cycle of
            concentration.
                                                   15-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.5.5.3      Cooling towers shall have sump water heating systems if they will operate during freezing weather.

15.5.5.4      Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are
             noncombustible. (Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fire-retardant-treated,  fiberglass-reinforced plastic are
             classified as combustible.)  In determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible
             and noncombustible in NFPA 214 shall be used. Cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a
             combustible fill shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with
             NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:

             •   The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the  area it services.
             •   The building is totally sprinkler protected.
             •   A fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
                building.
             •   The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection.
                The cost of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping
                distribution system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or
                extension of water supplies required.

15.5.5.5      Cooling towers with airstreams that pass  through water shall have the water treated with an EPA-
             approved biocide to control etiological organisms or any chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
             herbicides, or other chemicals that may be present because of local conditions. A maintenance program
             must be established to  ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.

15.5.5.6      Cooling towers shall have meters that measure water input (cooling tower make-up water) and output
             (blowdown water).

15.5.6  BUILDING HEATING SYSTEMS
        This subsection applies to heat-generating equipment or heat-transfer equipment and accessories located in
        individual buildings. The project criteria shall provide  direction on factors to  be considered in the selection
        of heating system capacity; such factors include redundancy, future expansion or building modification,
        thermal storage or solar assistance, and other project-specific considerations.  If maintaining the building
        design temperature is critical, a stand-alone heating system shall be designed with backup  capability and
        with no dependence on other facility systems.

15.5.6.1      Where buildings are connected to the central plant heat generation/distribution system, one of the
             following shall be provided:

             •   Steam-to-building hot water heat exchanger
             •   High-temperature water (HTW)-to-building hot water heat exchanger
             •   Steam-pressure reducing station.

15.5.6.2      For space heating  by hot water, conversion of the central heating plant steam or HTW shall provide a
             maximum heating-water supply temperature of 200 ฐF for building terminal units. For space heating by
             steam, the building steam supply pressure shall be reduced to 15 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)
             unless a higher supply pressure is needed for process requirements. For process-related or other high
             temperature requirements, the project criteria shall indicate the capacities and the temperature and
             pressure requirements.  For facilities with a central plant condensate return system, a condensate
             receiver with duplex pumps shall be specified.  Steam-to-hot-water or HTW-to-building heating water
             converters shall be selected on the basis of design criteria contained in the ASHRAE Handbook of
             HVAC Systems and Equipment and ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
                                                    15-15

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.5.6.3      The use of direct and indirect gas-fired units, electric heating, heat pumps (air-cooled and water-
             cooled), low-temperature gas infrared heating, and hot-water radiant heating and hot-water distribution
             to terminal units, shall be considered, with selection based on the building type, the facility preference,
             and LCCA. Office buildings, and particularly buildings with occupants sitting near fenestration, shall
             be designed with perimeter finned-tube radiation heating systems or other perimeter heating systems.

             If the selected heating fuel is fuel oil, storage tanks, installed in accordance with national, state, and
             local regulations, shall provide 30 days of full heating capacity.  Each tank shall be fully trimmed for
             safety and operating conditions and shall include a remote level gauge and full monitoring. Tanks shall
             comply with NFPA 30 requirements.

15.5.7  HEATING EQUIPMENT
        Furnaces and boilers for central heating systems shall be enclosed in a room with 2-hour fire-rated walls,
        floors, and ceilings, and with openings protected by automatic or self-closing 1 !/2-hour fire  doors.  For
        small units consisting of a single furnace operating a hot air system or a boiler not exceeding 15 psi pressure
        or a rating of 10 bhp, a 1-hour fire-rated enclosure is permissible.

15.5.7.1      STANDARDS
             Heating equipment will comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:

                 Oil-fired-NFPA 31
                 Gas-fired - NFPA 54
             •    Liquefied petroleum gas-fired - NFPA 58
             •    Liquefied natural gas-fired -  NFPA 59A
             •    Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code - NFPA 85.

15.5.7.2      FUEL  STORAGE
             Where  liquid fuel is used, a recessed floor or curb shall be provided, with ramps at the  openings.  The
             height of the recess or curb shall be sufficient to contain all the fuel in case the tank or  container
             ruptures.  For requirements, refer to NFPA 30, NFPA 45, NFPA 90A, and Chapter 5 of the
             Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4).

15.5.7.3      SHOP  OPERATIONS
             Shop, storage, and other operations that involve flammable or combustible materials and are not
             directly related to the operations in the furnace or boiler rooms  shall be located elsewhere unless the
             furnace or boiler room is sprinkler protected. Incidental operations that do not utilize significant
             amounts of flammable materials are allowed in furnace or boiler rooms if proper separations are
             maintained between combustible materials and ignition sources (e.g., boiler equipment).

15.5.7.4      BURNERS
             Regardless of size, burners on suspended  oil-fired heaters shall be provided with flame supervision that
             will ensure shutdown in not more than 4 seconds if flame failure occurs or trial for ignition does not
             establish a flame.

15.5.7.5      GAS PIPING
             Gas piping entry into the building shall be protected against breakage due to settling, vibration, or,
             where appropriate, seismic activity. Where practical, piping shall be brought in above  grade and
             provided with a swing joint before it enters the building.  Where it is necessary for gas  piping to enter a
             building below ground, the physical arrangement shall be such that a break in the  gas line due to
             settling or other causes at or near the point of entry cannot result in the free flow of gas into the
             building.  Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing.
                                                    15-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            Pipelines shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA's hazard communication standard.  Local gas
            utility and code requirements shall be followed.

15.5.7.6     GAS METER REGULATORS
            To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators, or similar attachments shall be
            adequately supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the outside of the
            building.

15.5.7.7     VALVES
            Earthquake-sensitive  shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where required by local code.

15.5.7.8     GAS METER ROOMS
            Gas meter rooms shall be vented in a way that removes any leaked gas without transporting it through
            the structure.

15.5.7.9     FIRE-RESISTANT  SHAFTS OR CONDUIT
            For large-capacity gas services (piping greater than 3-inch diameter at 4 inches of water pressure head
            or any other size with equivalent or greater delivery capabilities) within a building, the piping shall be
            enclosed in fire-resistive shafts and vented directly to the outside at top and bottom.  Any horizontal
            runs of the gas pipe shall be enclosed in a conduit or chase, also directly vented at each end to the
            exterior or to the vented vertical shaft. Automatic gas detection and automatic shutoff shall be
            provided.

15.5.8  TWO-PIPE COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
        Under normal circumstances, two-pipe combination heating and cooling systems shall not be considered.

15.5.9  WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        Economical pipe sizes shall be selected for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, boiler feed, and
        condensate return systems based on the allowable pressure drop, flow rate, and  pump selection criteria
        prescribed in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and HVAC Applications
        handbooks.  Insulation shall be provided on all water distribution piping and system components. Strainers
        shall be provided at the suction side of each pump and of each control valve.  Flexible connectors shall be
        specified for installation on the suction and discharge piping of base-mounted end-suction type pumps and
        on electronically driven chillers.

        •   Check valves and balancing  valves, or combination check-shutoff-balance valves,  shall be installed in
            the discharge piping of all pumps operating in parallel pumping systems. Balancing  valves shall be
            installed in the discharge piping of all pump systems.

        •   Service valves shall be installed in the suction and discharge piping of all major pieces of equipment.
            Balancing valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of all coils and in central  station cooling
            equipment.

        •   An air elimination pressure control, venting, and automatic filling system (with backflow prevention)
            shall be provided for  each hot-water and chilled-water distribution system;  water treatment injection
            should also be provided, if required.

        •   Air  chambers  and/or surge tanks should be installed to safeguard system against water hammer.

        •   Expansion or compression tanks and fill piping connections shall be located on the suction side of the
            distribution system pump or pumps.  Expansion tanks and air separation devices shall be sized
            according to the methods in  the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC and Equipment, and specified in


                                                   15-17

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1. Gauge glasses, drain valves, and vent valves shall
            be provided for all expansion tank systems.

        •   Water treatment design information for chilled water, hot water, and boiler feed water systems shall be
            based on project criteria (tested water condition).

15.5.10 PUMPS AND PUMPING SYSTEMS
        Pumps for chilled-water, hot-water, condenser water, boiler feed water, and condensate systems shall be
        centrifugal-type pumps and shall be  selected on the basis of the criteria in the ASHRAE handbooks.
        Materials, types of seals, bearings, wear rings, shafts, and other features shall be selected on the basis of
        specific system requirements. Use of primary-secondary type pumping systems and high-efficiency motors
        shall be considered for pumps for all hot-water and chilled-water distribution systems.

        •   For systems where system pumping horsepower requirements are greater than 20 bhp, use of variable-
            speed drives or parallel-pumping arrangement shall be considered.

        •   Standby pumps shall be provided for all systems, unless dictated by project-specific criteria.

15.5.11 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        All steam piping shall comply with ASME B31.1 and shall be at least Schedule 40 black steel. Fittings,
        valves, and accessories shall be selected on the basis of pipe size and temperature and pressure conditions.

15.5.11.1    STEAM CONDENSATE RECOVERY
            Steam systems shall incorporate condensate recovery. The condensate recovery system shall be
            routinely inspected and maintained to maximize the recovery of condensate.

15.5.12 AIR-HANDLING AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        Air-handling equipment and air distribution systems shall be sized to optimize performance, initial cost, and
        operating and maintenance costs  over the life of the system.  Systems should be sized for 25% future
        expansion in fume hoods, other ventilated equipment, and to accommodate future modernization
        requirements.

15.5.12.1    SETBACK MECHANISM
            The setback mechanism shall provide a low-speed operations  setting for the fan motors of air-handling
            unit(s) and fume hoods in a particular zone. Fan motors can be simultaneously activated. The setback
            mechanism shall be designed to provide four air changes per hour or 25 cfm per square foot of LFH
            work surface.  The setback mechanism shall also provide room temperatures of approximately 55 ฐF in
            the winter and approximately 85 ฐF in the summer unless other, overriding temperature requirements
            are specifically stated. The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well  as the
            temperature and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum air changes per hour.

            The HVAC  system(s) nighttime setback shall be controlled by a timer connected to the energy
            management control system of the building.  The fume hood face velocity reduction of 25 percent of
            full open-flow air volume (80 fpm hood face velocity at 100% sash opening) and the general exhaust
            and special canopy hood operation at 100 percent airflow are to be balanced by an appropriate
            reduction in supply air (air-handling unit) fan speed in order to maintain negative pressure in the
            laboratory and laboratory support rooms with respect to the hallways.

15.5.12.2    NOISE LEVELS
            All air-handling system equipment  (e.g., fans, terminal units, air-handling units)  shall be provided with
            vibration isolators and flexible ductwork connectors to minimize transmission of vibration and noise.
            Systems shall satisfy the noise criteria (NC) levels recommended for various types of spaces and the


                                                   15-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            vibration criteria listed in the ASHRAE handbooks.  The combined noise level generated by
            mechanical and electrical building equipment and fume hoods should not exceed 70 decibels dBa at the
            face of the hoods (with the systems operating) or 55 dBa elsewhere. Where air-handling equipment
            and air distribution systems cannot meet these requirements, sound, and vibration-attenuation devices
            shall be installed in the air-handling  systems.

15.5.12.3    VAV MECHANICAL VENTILATION
            Use of a VAV mechanical ventilation system is permitted if the following design and installation
            criteria are achieved.

            •   VAV system must maintain a minimal flow of air within the laboratory fume hood and ductwork to
                purge gases, vapors, and other substances; avoid condensation, impaction, and deposition in the
                ductwork;  and achieve sufficient exhaust stack velocity so that the contaminated air stream clears
                the building and does not reenter the building along with supply air.  Refer to subsection 15.3.2 for
                minimum airflow requirements.

            •   The system must be able to consistently provide 100 fpm average face velocity for restricted
                bypass laboratory fume hoods at 80% face opening and all face openings below 100% until the
                minimum exhaust volume of 25 CFM per square foot of LFH work surface is reached.

            •   The supply and exhaust motors  in the VAV system must be able to respond with no unacceptable
                delays to changes in the sash height. This will prevent the backflow of contaminants into the
                workspace and the temporary loss of negative pressure in the laboratory space relative to corridors
                and  other adjacent spaces.

15.5.12.4    AIR HANDLER CONDENSATE
            Reuse of air handler condensate shall be considered, particularly in geographic locations with extended
            periods of warm, humid climate conditions. In applications where air handler condensate reuse is cost
            effective, it should be implemented.  Condensate should ideally be used as cooling tower make-up, or
            for other appropriate applications.

15.5.13 FANS/MOTORS
        Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, nonpulsing aerodynamic operation in the range of
        operation, over varying speeds. Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed with
        adjustable motor pulley sheaves to assist in air balancing of systems. Fans with motors of greater than 20
        hp shall use fixed (nonadjustable) drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley sheaves of
        different diameters. Supply air-handling units and return air fans in VAV systems shall control capacity
        through the use of variable-speed drives, inlet vanes, or scroll bypass dampers. All fans shall comply with
        AMCA standard 210,  ASHRAE standard 51, the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment,
        and ACGIH Industrial Ventilation.

        •   Fans shall be located within the ductwork system, in accordance with the  requirements of AMCA
            Publication 201. Motors shall be sized according to properly calculated bhp fan requirements and shall
            not use oversized fans and motors to meet future capacity needs unless so directed by the project
            criteria.  Fan construction materials shall be selected on the basis of corrosion resistance and  cost.
            Spark-resistant construction shall be used where required by NFPA. All fans and accessories shall be
            designed and specified to meet all smoke and flame spread requirements of NFPA 255.  Fans used in
            exhaust systems of fume hoods shall also be of the noiseless type and shall be corrosion-resistant to the
            fumes generated in the hood.

        •   Smoke detectors for automatic control in air distribution systems shall be located in accordance with
            the requirements of NFPA 90A, Chapter 4.


                                                   15-19

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.14 COILS
        Heating and cooling coils shall comply with ARI 410.  Heating and cooling coil selection shall comply with
        the guidelines in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems
        and Equipment. Coil manufacturers shall certify coil performance by ARI certification or provide written
        certification from a nationally recognized independent testing firm that coil performance is in accordance
        with ARI 410.

        •   Heating and cooling coils shall be composed of materials appropriate for the corrosive atmosphere in
            which they operate.  Cooling coils shall be designed with a maximum face velocity of 550  fpm. Coils
            designed with face velocities exceeding 500 fpm shall have features that prevent condensate carryover
            or use moisture eliminators. Coils shall have a drain feature.

        •   Recirculating air systems designed for outside-air  winter temperatures below freezing shall have a
            preheat coil located either in the outside air intake or in the mixed-air stream upstream of the cooling
            coil, unless the theoretical mixed-air temperature is calculated to be above 35ฐF.  In this case, the
            preheat coils may be omitted if adequate baffling is provided to guarantee positive mixing  of the return
            and outdoor air.  Preheat coils shall  be designed to maintain discharge air temperature without
            modulation of the steam or hot-water flow through use of modulating face dampers and bypass
            dampers. In moderate climates where the method has been proved to be reliable and there is no
            concern about coil freeze-up, steam  modulation may be used for control of steam coils.

15.5.15 WALK-IN ENVIRONMENTAL AND COLD STORAGE ROOMS
        Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or humidity is controlled at a single set
        condition within specified tolerances regardless  of activity in the room. In determining the appropriate
        room temperature, uniformity, and gradient, the design professional should discuss heat loads (in terms of
        process loads and ventilation requirements) with the end user. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
        capable of maintaining a 4ฐC room temperature with a uniformity of +0.5 ฐC and a maximum gradient of
        1 ฐC, unless otherwise specified in the program requirements. A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable
        of maintaining a minus 20 ฐC room temperature with a  uniformity of + 1 ฐC and a maximum gradient of 3ฐC,
        unless otherwise specified.  Rooms shall feature temperature  displays visible from a contiguous hallway and
        shall be capable of producing a continuous record of temperature. Alarm systems with manual override
        capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault conditions. Ventilation shall be provided if
        work activity is performed inside chambers/rooms.  Doors to rooms shall be provided with a locking
        mechanism capable of release at all times from the room interior whether or  not the door is locked. Walk-in
        environmental and cold storage spaces shall include shelving. Walk-in coolers are considered enclosed
        spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them.  Walk-in cold storage rooms shall have
        O2 sensors and alarms to ensure that oxygen has not been displaced.

        A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for these rooms. If refrigeration is provided by the main
        building's chilled-water system, a backup self-contained system shall also be provided.

15.5.16 CENTRAL PLANT HEAT GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
        The following criteria shall be applied in the planning and design of steam and HTW generation and
        distribution systems and of cogeneration facilities.

15.5.16.1    FACILITY SIZING
            The  design professional shall consider creating a plant design that can be easily expanded to meet
            potential future loads in addition to meeting confirmed near-term loads. Load computations to
            establish boiler capacity shall be based on the building design heating load, as determined  in
            conformance with the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, plus process heating loads (if any) and an
                                                   15-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

             allowance for piping plants.  The process heat losses shall be investigated during the design stage to
             determine whether heat can be recovered, thereby reducing the boiler load.

             Multiple boiler installations shall be considered for all applications in order to maintain high operating
             plant efficiency throughout the year.  The number and size of the boilers shall be based on the number
             of operable hours at full and partial load operation, the turn-down ratio of the boiler being considered,
             efficiency at partial loads, and year-round process or summer loads. Use of a base load boiler shall be
             considered when a year-round process demand exists.  The system shall be designed to satisfy peak
             demand by operating over its maximum rating for short periods of time.
             The possibility of operating small local boilers rather than the central plant to satisfy summer loads
             shall also be considered.  Sufficient capacity shall be furnished to allow one boiler to be down for
             inspection or maintenance or to be on standby while the remaining boiler(s) maintain normal
             operations.

             The generating facilities shall be so located as to allow efficient steam/hot-water distribution
             throughout the site and to allow for future expansion of the generating and distribution system.  The
             facility location shall also be chosen to take advantage of prevailing winds and to minimize problems
             associated with noise, dirt, air pollution,  harmful effects on adjacent property owners, and
             accommodation of fuel deliveries and storage.

             The option of installing one or more satellite boiler facilities rather than a single central boiler complex
             shall be evaluated when one  or more of the following conditions exist:

             •    An extensive distribution system connecting several separate steam users is required.
             •    Requirements exist for several different steam pressures.
             •    Variable steam loadings exist with respect to time or quantity.

             The use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative shall be considered in the planning of any
             large steam generation facility.  The feasibility of cogeneration with HTW or HTW boilers or HTW-to-
             steam generators shall be considered. In determining the feasibility of cogeneration, the following
             factors shall be considered:

             •    Energy demand and cost, peak load, average load, seasonal variations, and utility rate structures.
             •    Regulatory concerns: Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act (PURPA), relevant environmental
                 regulations, and current  local regulations.

             The applicability of cogeneration  shall be thoroughly evaluated per EPA Cogeneration Partnership
             Program (www.epa.gov/chp/about chp.htm).  Cogeneration plants shall be sized to accommodate
             existing loads.

15.5.16.2     STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATION
             All boilers shall comply with the ASME  Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.  In determining whether to
             select a steam or a high-temperature water (HTW) system,  the following factors shall be considered:

             •    Whether the system will be operated intermittently or continuously
             •    Whether fast response to significant load variation is important
             •    Pumping costs
             •    Length, size, and configuration of required piping
             •    Possibility of using HTW to generate the steam at its point of use, in a facility where only a few
                 processes  require steam.
                                                    15-21

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

             Steam boilers shall be designed to provide dry, saturated steam unless the economics of electricity
             generation, meeting specific process requirements, or accommodating extensive distribution systems
             necessitates use of superheated steam. If required for process, the use of high-pressure satellite boilers
             located close to the process shall be considered in lieu of distribution of high-pressure steam.

             An HTW system is a system that generates heating or process water with a temperature above 300ฐF.
             HTW boilers shall be of the controlled forced-circulation type,  specifically designed for HTW service.
             Because of costs associated with high-pressure pipe, valves, and fittings, HTW systems should not be
             designed for higher temperatures and pressures than are absolutely necessary.

             In a gas-pressurized HTW system, an inert gas, such as nitrogen, shall be used and the pressurizing
             tank shall be installed vertically to reduce the area of contact between gas and water, thus reducing the
             absorption of gas into the liquid. Gas-pressurized systems should be maintained at a pressure that is
             well above the pressure at which the HTW will flash to steam.  Pump pressurization is generally
             restricted to small process heating systems.  In larger HTW systems, pump pressurization can be
             combined with gas pressurization.

             Boilers shall be equipped with meters to measure total potable water used as boiler feed water.

15.5.16.3     CIRCULATION PUMPS
             In selecting and installing circulation pumps, energy efficiency shall be emphasized. Consideration
             shall be given to the use of variable-speed circulation pumps. In steam-pressurized systems, circulating
             pumps  shall be located in the supply lines to maintain pressure above the flashpoint of the hottest water
             in the distribution system.  A mixing connection that allows some of the coil return water to pass into
             the supply line at the pump suction shall be  provided to safeguard against flashing or cavitation at the
             pump(s).  In  a gas-pressurized HTW system, the circulating pumps may be installed in either the  supply
             lines or the return lines.

15.5.16.4     FUEL  STORAGE AND HANDLING SYSTEMS
             Control, containment, and treatment of rainwater runoff from coal storage yards shall comply with
             effluent guidelines and standards for steam-electric power-generating point sources  (40 CFR Part 423).
             The relative economy of a central natural gas-fired  plant compared with a gas distribution system
             serving the individual requirements of each building shall be considered. The long-range availability of
             the gas supply and the possible need for a secondary fuel shall be established.  The economics of
             interruptible versus uninterruptible gas service relative to availability of secondary fuel shall be
             considered.

             Fully automatic mechanical-firing equipment and mechanical draft equipment shall be provided.
             Mechanical-firing equipment capable of developing 100 to 125 percent  of the boiler capacity shall be
             specified.

             Ash-handling systems shall comply with Federal Construction Council Technical Report No. 51,
             Chapter III, Section 3.1. Land availability for storage or disposal, water availability, nearness to
             residential areas, the possibility of selling the ash, as a means of disposal, and environmental
             regulations shall be considered. Collection  and treatment of ash-carrying liquid effluents shall comply
             with 40 CFR Part 423.

             Stationary internal combustion engines, such as gasoline- or diesel-powered generators or fire pumps,
             shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 37.

             The use of underground tanks shall be avoided.  Refer to Chapter 5 of the Environmental Management
             Guidelines (Volume 4) for storage tank  requirements (aboveground and  underground).


                                                    15-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.16.5     BOILER WATER TREATMENT
             Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits on or corrosion of internal boiler surfaces
             and to prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam.  A boiler water treatment specialist
             shall be consulted to determine appropriate treatment measures. Water quality measures for the steam
             plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated.  The design of the plant shall
             provide for daily sampling to determine internal water conditions.  Provisions shall be made for
             introducing treatment chemicals into the feed water. The plant shall contain adequate space and
             equipment for storing, handling, and mixing chemicals.  Continuous versus intermittent blowdown
             operations shall be considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids
             within acceptable limits. For continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat
             recovery system shall be considered. Blowdown rates and boiler water chemistry control shall be
             established in consultation with ASME's "Consensus Operating Practices for Control of
             Feedwater/Boiler Water Chemistry in Modern Industrial Boilers " (1 994).

             A minimum of two boiler feed pumps,  each sized to handle the peak load, shall be provided to allow
             one pump to be out of service without affecting facility operations. Pumps shall be equipped with
             automatic controls that regulate feed water flow to maintain the required water level and with a relief
             valve. Relief valves shall be preset to lift at a lower pressure than the boiler safety valve setting plus
             static and friction heads.

15.5.16.6     BOILER ROOM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
             Boiler plant instrumentation and control panels shall include devices for monitoring the combustion
             process and consoles in equipment in which such devices are mounted. Boiler room controls and
             instrumentation shall comply with  NFPA  85.

15.5.16.7     PLANT INSULATION
             All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor, or on any catwalk,  shall be insulated to prevent surface
             temperatures above 60 ฐC  (where contact would be unintentional and unlikely) and above 49 ฐC
             (where contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation). Insulation shall be in accordance with
             the manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.

15.5.16.8     STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER DISTRIBUTION
             Steam and HTW distributions systems  shall be sized to accommodate, without extensive modification,
             any future expansion anticipated in the project criteria.

             •   When aboveground steam or HTW distribution systems are to be constructed, pipe  shall be
                installed on concrete pedestals, on concrete/steel stanchions, or on poles. Where piping crosses
                over roadways, a minimum  of 14 feet of clearance shall be provided.

             •   Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in the piping system. Expansion loops
                shall be provided where space allows.  Where space does not allow expansion loops,  expansion
                joints may be used. Piping shall comply with ASME B31.1

             •   Unless economics dictates otherwise,  steam shall be supplied to the distribution system at the
                lowest pressure that will adequately serve the connected load.  The economics of higher pressure
                distribution shall be considered. Processes requiring higher pressures shall be serviced, where
                practical, by a separate section of the distribution system to avoid operating the entire system at
                higher pressures than necessary.
                                                    15-23

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            •   Warm-up bypass valves shall be provided at all shutoff valves in steam distribution lines. Steam
                velocities shall be selected for the type of service being considered but shall not exceed 10,000
                fpm.

            •   Steam and condensate pipe shall, where possible, be graded at a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet in
                the direction of flow. Drip stations and steam traps shall be provided at all low points in steam
                lines.

            •   To ensure tightness of the steam system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25
                inches shall be welded, except in the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate
                maintenance of equipment, connections, and valves.

            •   HTW piping shall be sized for an average velocity of 5 feet per second, a maximum velocity of 10
                feet per second, and a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second. To  ensure tightness of the HTW
                system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25 inches shall be welded, except in
                the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to  facilitate maintenance of equipment,  connections,
                and valves.

            •   Unlike steam piping, HTW piping  may follow the natural terrain; however, proper provisions shall
                be made for draining and venting the piping.

15.5.16.9    PIPING INSULATION
            Insulation containing asbestos is prohibited. The possibility that water infiltration will cause physical
            damage to, or loss of thermal characteristics of, underground pipe insulation shall be considered in the
            selection of insulation. All insulation installed aboveground, in tunnels, and in manholes shall be
            provided with either a metal jacket, either factory or field installed, or a hard cement finish.

15.5.16.10  PIPING MARKING
            Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ASME AB.1-1996 Scheme for Identification of Piping
            Systems, and shall conform with requirements of Chap. 5 of the GSA Facilities Standards for the Public
            Buildings Service, 2003 Edition (PBS P100); andNFPA45, Chap. 8.2, Storage and Piping Systems for
            Compressed and Liquified Gases, 2000 Edition, as applicable
15.6   Ductwork

15.6.1   GENERAL
        Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air to and from the conditioned spaces;
        noise, available space, maintenance, air quality, air quantity, and optimum balance between expenditure of
        fan energy (annual operating cost) and duct size (initial investment) shall also be considered.

        Duct smoke detectors, as described under Section  16 Electrical Requirements, of this Manual, shall be
        installed in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements.

15.6.2   FABRICATION
        Ductwork for air supply, return air, and general exhaust shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, or
        fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) that meets required fire ratings.  Laboratory fume hood (LFH) and
        equipment exhaust shall be of PVC-coated galvanized sheet metal or of Type 3 16 welded stainless steel,
        depending on the specific laboratory function and type of process being exhausted.  Polypropylene and
        glass duct material shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications.  LFH exhaust ductwork
        shall be of welded or flanged/bolted air tight construction in accordance with ANSI/AIHA Z9.2 and Z9.5
                                                   15-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        Duct linings or coverings shall be of noncombustible construction.  The total assembly of the duct lining,
        including adhesive and any coatings or additives involved, shall have an interior finish rating of Class A
        (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450).  Use of porous duct liners that can collect dirt and moisture
        should be avoided and shall not be considered for new construction. Where such liners are already in use,
        and particularly in areas close to humidification or dehumidification (cooling) equipment, the lining should
        be removed unless coated or sealed to prevent fiber loss.

15.6.2.1     COMPLIANCE
            Ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the  SMACNA HVAC Air
            Duct Leakage Test Manual. Ductwork, accessories, and support systems shall be designed to comply
            with the  following:

            •   ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual
            •   ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
            •   NFPA 45 Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
            •   NFPA 90A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
            •   NFPA 91 Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
            •   NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
                 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
            •    SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
            •    SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
                 SMACNA HVAC Duct Design Manual.
                ANSI/ASHRAE 62
                ANSI/ASHRAEZ9.2
                ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5

15.6.2.2     SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
            Ductwork shall also meet the following requirements:

            •   Ductwork shall be designed to  comply with NFPA 90 A. This includes specifications  and
                installation of smoke and fire dampers at rated wall penetrations and smoke
                pressurization/containment dampers as required for smoke pressurization/evacuation systems. Fire
                dampers shall not be used on the exhaust  system ducting if the system must maintain confinement
                of hazardous materials during and after a  fire.

            •   Ductwork shall be designed to  resist corrosive contaminants if any are present. Exhaust ductwork
                from laboratory fume hoods shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the fume
                hood for drainage of condensation, constructed with welded longitudinal seams, and welded
                transverse joints, or equivalent construction, in accordance with the requirements of Section 6,
                Ductwork, of American National Standard (ANSI/AIHA) Z9.5-1992. Laboratory ductwork shall
                be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 45.

            •   Ductwork that handles moisture-laden air that is exhausted from areas such as shower rooms,
                dishwashing  areas, and other areas where  condensation may occur on the duct interior shall be of
                aluminum construction, have welded joints and seams, and provide drainage  at low points.

            •   Penetrations  of ductwork through security barriers shall be minimized.  Any  such penetrations that
                are more than 96 square inches in area and 6 inches in smallest dimension must be provided with a
                penetration delay equal to that required for the security barrier.  The physical attributes, intended
                 service of the ductwork, and the axial configuration of the barrier penetration shall be considered
                in the design of the penetration delay.
                                                   15-25

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.6.3   ACCESS PANELS
        All ductwork shall have an access panel that provides access to each operating part, including:

        •   Splitter dampers
        •   Manual volume dampers
        •   Motorized volume damper
        •   Fire dampers.

15.6.4   INSULATION
        All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier unless otherwise dictated by the project
        criteria.  Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation
        if the surrounding air has a low dew point and condensation will not occur. Return and exhaust air
        ductwork may be  insulated where condensation may occur when air is  routed through unconditioned areas.

15.6.5   FIRE DAMPERS
        Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with codes, except in the exhaust systems of laboratory areas.
15.7   Laboratory Fume  Hoods
        EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall conform to current
        EPA requirements.  The design professional, in consultation with the users of the facility, shall be
        responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the hoods' intended use.  The
        requirements of this subsection and of Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual shall be followed. Laboratory fume
        hoods shall be considered an integral part of the overall building HVAC system and shall be part of the
        laboratory mechanical system testing and balancing prior to building acceptance.

15.7.1   LABORATORY CONTROL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
        Major projects will require the services and review of a qualified engineer with experience of controls
        design for laboratory fume hood. The following consideration shall be implemented during new and
        existing design process:

        •   Identify any user-specific needs for fume hood lab environmental monitoring.
        •   Identify any specific containment requirements.
        •   Determine the type of fume hood needed to perform operation
        •   Identify if constant (full bypass) or VAV (partial bypass) fume hood controls are to be used.
        •   Confirm satisfactory ASHRAE 110 performance testing of potential fume-hood/control-system
            configurations.
        •   Analyze  expected laboratory space air flow dynamics to evaluate whether air flow tracking, active
            pressurization control or a combination of both is required.
        •   Carefully select the location and type of supply air diffusers. Supply diffusers shall be Titus, Radia
            Tec, dome faced radial perforated diffusers or equal.
        •   Determine the failure mode of all terminal boxes to ensure that the lab pressurization criteria are met
            under all condition.
        •   Confirm that laboratory temperature control does not override the minimum fume hood driven
            ventilation requirements.
        •   Identify all temperature control zones within the lab, and provide sufficient sensors to control each
            zone.
        •   Confirm that potential control suppliers have adequate presence and technical depth at the project
            location to support the project installation, testing and operation

        Additional consideration for existing facilities design process:
                                                   15-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        •   Analyze total system - air flows, pressures and temperatures.
        •   Select fume hood control type and size.
        •   Alter or re-balance the HVAC system and reset controls to maintain proper air flows and temperatures.

15.7.2  HOOD REQUIREMENTS
        EPA fume hoods shall  have an ASHRAE performance rating, as manufactured, of 4.0 AM 0.05 and shall
        conform to current EPA requirements.  Before EPA purchases any hood model, the laboratory fume hood
        manufacturer, at a test facility provided by the manufacturer, and at no cost to the Government, shall certify
        the proper performance of the fume hood in accordance with the Procedures for Certifying Laboratory
        Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards.  After the new hoods are installed, EPA requires the manufacturer to
        evaluate and certify in a written report that the installation and performance of the hoods complies with
        EPA specifications prior to acceptance and use by EPA.  This  shall occur after the testing and balancing
        (TAB) report is approved  by AEAMB and SHEMD.

        SHEMD is responsible for approving the certification of fume hoods. SHEMD will document the approval
        of all newly installed fume hoods for AEAMB. A list of approved or certified hoods is  available from
        SHEMD.

        Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of exhaust blowers shall meet corrosion-resistance
        standards for the chemicals used and generated in the hood, as described in the hood uses;  blowers should
        be rated or otherwise approved for use; and plumbing fixtures  and  electrical outlets should meet existing
        codes. In addition, fume hoods shall meet the following requirements:

        •   Ceiling and wall supply s for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be designed for a
            maximum air velocity of 25 fpm at 6 feet above the finished floor at the face of the hood. HVAC
            diffusers shall be located so that they do not "short circuit" the airflow to a hood. Supply diffusers
            shall be similar or  equal to the Titus, Radia Tec, dome faced radial perforated diffuser.

        •   Face Velocities: In accordance with Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA
            Standards, the fume hood must be designed for an average face velocity of 100 fpm ฑ10 fpm with  sash
            80%  open with a uniform face velocity profile of ฑ 20% for point measurements in a traverse of the
            face opening.  SHEMD will consider requests to operate hoods at 80 fpm average face velocity with a
            sash opening of 80%. Any request for a lower operating average face velocity should include
            information on the performance of the hood at lower operating velocities, the location of the hood and
            the type and location of ceiling supply air diffusers.  Under no circumstances can the control velocity
            be less than 80 fpm at any sash height.

        •   The sash shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height  (e.g., releasable
            sash stops).

        •   Fume hoods shall be equipped with a low exhaust  flow safety  alarm system designed to signal unsafe
            operating conditions whenever fume hood average face velocity falls below 70 fpm. The alarm system
            shall consist of an  audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe operating conditions.
            Additional specific standard utility and service requirements shall be indicated for each specific
            laboratory facility  project.

15.7.3  CONSTANT VOLUME  BYPASS-TYPE FUME HOOD
        The laboratory fume hood is often an integral part of the building exhaust system. The volume of air
        exhausted should be constant, achieved by an airflow bypass above the sash through which room air can
        pass as the sash is lowered. A horizontal bottom and a vertical side airfoil must be specified and used on all
        hoods, and the face edges  must be shaped to minimize  entering air turbulence. Vertical foils on the sides
        also result in a slight airflow improvement by minimizing the eddies caused as air enters the hood. The


                                                    15-27

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        work surface should be recessed three-eighths of an inch or more so that spills can be effectively contained.
        The front raised edge should extend just past the airfoil but not far enough to be used as a working surface
        near the face opening.

        The bypass sizing and design must be such that the following conditions are met:

        •    The total airflow volume is essentially the same at all sash positions.  As the sash is lowered, the face
             velocity increases to a rate that shall not exceed three times  the design velocity for a fully open sash
             position.

        •    The bypass must provide a barrier between the hood work space and the room when the sash is
             lowered.

        •    The bypass opening is dependent only on the operation of the sash. Selected sash configurations are
             listed and described below:

        •    The vertical-rising fume hood sash shall be full-view type providing a clear and unobstructed side-to-
             side view of the fume hood interior and the service fitting connections.  The sash shall be 7/32-inch
             laminated safety glass.  The sash system shall utilize a single-weight pulley cable counterbalance
             system permitting one-finger operation along the length of the sash pull. The counterbalance system
             will hold the sash at any position without creep and will prevent sash drop  in the event of malfunction
             or failure of a cable.

        •    The combination vertical-rising  and horizontal-sliding fume hood sash shall be similar in design to the
             vertical-rising sash configuration but with multiple horizontal sliding sashes of 7/32-inch laminated
             safety glass panels on multiple tracks within the vertical rising sash frame.

        While current EPA  policy discourages the use  of auxiliary air-type hoods in new construction, their use may
        be justified under special circumstances, such as in renovations where the existing ventilation system is
        inadequate and where expansion of system capacity may be mechanically unfeasible or too costly.
        Auxiliary air hoods  are hoods that are provided with a source of air in addition  to that taken from the room.
        It is essential that all air for these hoods be supplied from outside the hood face. Any model that introduces
        air behind the sash must not be used, because this arrangement reduces the control velocity at the face and
        could actually pressurize the work chamber if the exhaust flow is reduced (e.g., by foreign matter in fan, a
        broken belt, or normal wear and maintenance).  Features described for the constant-volume bypass-type
        hood, including the bypass arrangement, are applicable to the auxiliary air hood.  Auxiliary air supplies
        must be turned off to test the face velocity of the hood; a readily accessible means of turning off auxiliary
        air electrical power will facilitate such testing.

15.7.3  VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME (VAV) HOODS
        VAV hoods shall be installed as approved by the manufacturer or per the manufacturer's recommendation.
        The hood manufacturer,  in conjunction with the control manufacturer, shall  certify that the hood and
        laboratory system operation is as designed. Response times for  reestablishing the proper face velocity after
        a maximum change in sash position shall not exceed 0.8 seconds.  The minimum airflow through a VAV
        hood must meet or exceed 25 cfm per square foot of LFH work  surface with the sash closed with four room
        air changes per hour for an unoccupied laboratory, or must be calculated to  limit the accumulation  of
        volatile vapors within the fume hood to less than 25 percent of their lower flammable limit. The minimum
        airflow during occupied hours will be capable of eight room air  changes per hour in the laboratory.  As an
        alternative to relying on minimum airflows for preventing accumulation of vapors, fume hoods, whose
        interior may be classified as described in NEC  Article 500, and  appropriate  electric devices and equipment
        within the fume hood enclosure may be used. However, the minimum flows still must be capable of
                                                    15-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        maintaining the laboratories at a negative air pressure relative to adjacent corridors and non-laboratory
        spaces. Refer to NFPA 45 for guidance on electrical classification of fume hood enclosures.

15.7.4  RADIOISOTOPE HOODS
        Radioisotope hoods shall meet all the requirements of the fume hood types described above, except that the
        interior liner material shall have  panels at the sides, back, top, and plenum enclosure of 18-gauge Type 302
        stainless steel  and structural members, reinforcements, and brackets  of 16-gauge Type  302 stainless steel.
        The work surface should be 14-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. Joints should be fully sealed by welding or
        fine-line solder.  The base structure should have a heavy angle frame reinforced to support 1 ton of lead
        brick shielding. The work surface shall be reinforced from the underside with heavy steel grating to provide
        the necessary strength for holding lead brick radiation-protection and/or shall be capable of supporting at
        least 200 pounds per square foot. To minimize radioactive emissions into the atmosphere, high-efficiency
        particulate aerosol (HEPA) filters should be considered as a best available control technology for
        radioactive isotope hoods.  Guidance on the limitations,  selection, and design of radioactive air-cleaning
        devices can be found in the Nuclear Air Cleaning Handbook, Energy Research and Development
        Administration (ERDA) 76-21, and in Nuclear Power Plant Air Cleaning Units and Components,
        ANSI/ASME N509.

15.7.5  PERCHLORIC ACID FUME  HOODS
        In addition to the features described for fume hoods, perchloric acid hoods must use materials that are
        nonreactive, acid resistant, and relatively impervious. Type 316 stainless steel with welded joints should be
        specified, although certain other materials may be acceptable. Corners shall be rounded to facilitate
        cleaning.  Work surfaces shall be watertight with an integral trough at the rear for collection of wash-down
        water.

        •    Perchloric acid fume hoods  shall be constant-volume bypass or  VAV type with an average face velocity
             of 100 fpm +/- 10 FPM with sash 80% open.

        •    A wash-down system must be provided that has spray nozzles to adequately wash the  entire  assembly
             including the stack, blower,  all ductwork, and the interior of the hood, with an easily accessible strainer
             to filter particulates in the water supply that might clog the nozzles.  The wash-down system shall be
             activated immediately after the hood has been used.

        •    All welded ductwork shall be installed with a minimal amount of horizontal runs and no sharp turns;
             ductwork also must not be shared with any other hood.

        •    Exhaust fans must be of an acid-resistant, non-sparking (AMCA Standard Type A) construction.
             Lubrication shall be with fluorocarbon grease only.  Gaskets shall be of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer.

        •    Perchloric acid must never be used in hoods not specifically designed for its use.  Organic materials,
             strong dehydrating or desiccating agents, and oxidizing or reducing  materials must not be used  in a
             hood used for perchloric acid.

15.7.6  SPECIAL PURPOSE  HOODS
        Special purpose hoods are defined as any hood that does not conform to the specific types described above
        in this subsection. Special hoods may be used for operations for which other types are not suitable (e.g., as
        enclosures for analytical balances,  gas vents from atomic absorption, or gas chromatography units). Other
        applications might present opportunities for achieving contamination control with less bench space or less
        exhaust volume (e.g., using the hoods as special mixing stations,  sinks, evaporation racks, heat sources, and
        ventilated worktables).  Special purpose exhaust hoods shall be designed in accordance with ANSI A9.2
        and NFPA 45.  Appropriate applications for specific types of special purpose hoods are described below.
                                                    15-29

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        •   Canopy Exhaust (Capture) Hoods: These shall be provided as required for the removal of heat from
            specific laboratory apparatus, such as furnaces, ovens, and sterilizers, or as otherwise called for in the
            laboratory program.  Refer to ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation for requirements and specifications for
            canopy hoods.

        •   Flexible Spot Exhausts (Snorkels): These shall be required to remove chemical fumes or heat from
            specific laboratory instrumentation, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), gas
            chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS), and atomic absorption (AA) units.  Snorkels require an
            estimated exhaust rate of 100 to 200 cfm or a rate appropriate to the intended use.

        •   Gas Cabinets: Special exhaust cabinets will be required to house individual or pairs of
            toxic/pyrophoric gas cylinders.  Leak detectors and low-exhaust flow alarms, as well as a gas purge
            system, shall be considered to provide for safe exchange of cylinders. Exhaust for these cabinets is
            estimated at 50 to 75 cfm each.

15.7.7  HORIZONTAL SASHES
        Horizontal sashes, as well as other nonstandard features (larger-than-usual opening  in distillation hoods,
        vented sinks, hoods larger than 6 feet), may be used under the following conditions. (It should be noted that
        horizontal sashes may put additional demands on VAV performance.)

        •   A conventional hood does not meet the specific requirements of the user (this should be reflected in the
            standard operating procedures).

        •   The hood is used as intended by the manufacturer (i.e., the hood is not altered after installation).

        •   The hood passes the pre-purchase performance test.

15.7.8  NOISE
        The noise exposure at the working position in front of the hood shall not exceed 70 dBa with the system
        operating and the sash open, nor shall it exceed 55 dBA at benchtop level elsewhere in the laboratory room.
        Each  new hood installation shall be certified as meeting this requirement before initial use and shall be
        recertified annually thereafter. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed the
        limits specified in 29 CFRง1910.95.

15.7.9  EXHAUST SYSTEM
        Individual exhaust systems should be provided for each fume hood when the mixing of effluents from the
        individual hoods is inadvisable or when the effluent must be filtered, scrubbed, washed down, or otherwise
        treated before  discharge.  Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent
        areas. Blowers should be rated and should be installed at the end  of each duct system so that all ducts
        within the occupied areas of a building are maintained under negative pressure.  Hood exhaust should be
        designed in accordance with the recommendations in ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation, ANSI Z9.5, and
        NFPA 45.

        Fume hoods and general laboratory exhaust shall be routed to a stack discharge point at the highest area of
        the building roof line and shall be positioned to prevent entrainment of fumes at fresh air intake points.
        Fume hood exhaust stacks shall be constructed without caps or heads. Exhaust stacks should extend a
        minimum of 10 feet above the  adjacent roof level and operate at a minimum of 3,000 fpm exhaust discharge
        velocity. The  exhaust velocity may be lower than 3,000 fpm and the stack height lower than  10 feet if
        proven to prevent entrainment  through performance of site atmospheric air flow characteristics and exhaust
        stack  dispersion performance analyses as recommended in 1999 ASHRAE Application Handbook.
                                                   15-30

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.7.9.1     MANIFOLDING OF FUME HOODS
            Manifolding of fume hood exhausts is allowed if a single discharge point is advantageous, and the air
            supply suitably controls comfort conditions while maintaining proper laboratory pressure. Manifolded
            exhaust systems should incorporate staged, multiple constant volume fans with control dampers to
            maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold in order to ensure quick response to changing hood
            conditions.  Variable-speed fans are permitted if they are advantageous. In order for manifolded fume
            hoods to be safe, sufficient dilution of air within the ductwork must be maintained to avoid significant
            chemical reactions that may result in fire, corrosion, deposition, and/or increased toxicity. Low
            airflows afforded by VAV may increase the potential for significant reaction. Manifolding of fume
            hoods shall meet the requirements of NFPA 45.

            Fume hoods, biological safety cabinets, and general laboratory exhaust may be combined in a
            commonly manifolded exhaust duct system for blocks of hoods; however, such combined systems
            require the prior approval of SHEMD.  Provisions should be made for separate, dedicated duct and
            exhaust systems for special fume hood exhausts, including, but not limited to, perchloric acid hoods,
            high-energy radioisotope hoods, and exhausted biological safety cabinets, that cannot be combined in a
            commonly manifolded system.  Hoods used for dissimilar purposes or hoods that are far apart from
            each  other should not be manifolded.

15.7.10 EFFLUENT CLEANING
        When air-cleaning devices are required, the type is determined by the contaminant and the degree of
        cleaning necessary. The type of air cleaner required can vary from a simple scrubber and filters to
        incinerators or specially designed units. All cleaning systems must be approved by AEAMB and SHEMD

        A typical  cleaning system  consists of a prefilter, followed  by a solvent-resistant  HEPA filter, followed by an
        activated-charcoal filter. It is good practice to install a prefilter ahead of a HEPA filter to prolong the life
        of the HEPA filter. In some situations, bag-in/bag-out filter housings should be used to minimize the spread
        of contaminants when the  HEPA or prefilter is changed. It is recommended that a compensating  damper be
        installed with a HEPA filter so that the airflow will remain constant over the life of the filter.  The resistance
        of HEPA  filters to airflow, especially when airflow is loaded with contaminants, must be considered in
        designing a system with HEPA filters.  The pressure drop  across HEPA and prefilters should be monitored
        and alarmed, and filters  changed when necessary.  The filter plenum should be located on the inlet side of
        the fan to  allow the fan to  be serviced from the clean side of a filter. It is good practice to allow a straight
        run of 4 duct lengths before and after the fan in order to obtain good fan performance as  well as to allow for
        future installation of other air-cleaning equipment.
15.8   Other Ventilated  Enclosures
        Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate heat and ensure containment of
        chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work. These types of enclosures
        have special design requirements for their intended uses. Ventilated devices used to control hazardous
        materials must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEAMB. Ventilating devices used for removal of
        heat or nuisance odors must comply with  the parameters set forth in ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.

15.8.1   GLOVE BOXES
        Glove boxes are often required by laboratory personnel to ensure containment of chemical and biological
        airborne contaminants produced during the employee's work in the box and to prevent escape of those
        contaminants into the room. Such enclosures permit manual manipulations within the box  by means of
        armholes provided with impervious gloves, which are sealed  to the box at the armholes.  These types of
        enclosures shall comply with NSF Standard 49.
                                                   15-31

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.8.2  BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
        Laminar-flow biological safety cabinets shall meet minimum standards for cabinet classifications in NSF 49
        for personnel, environmental, and product safety and shall be listed and identified by a distinctive NSF seal.
        Field recertification, performed by an NSF 49 listed competent technician and done according to the
        procedures outlined in NSF 49, will be required once the cabinet(s) is installed. Cabinet classification shall
        be determined during laboratory programming, in consultation with the users of the facility.  These types of
        cabinets have special design requirements depending on their intended use (such as  protecting personnel
        from harmful agents inside the cabinet; protecting the work product, experiment, or procedure from
        contaminants outside the cabinet; or protecting the laboratory environment from contaminants inside the
        cabinet) established by the end user and listed in the design criteria/POR.

15.8.3  FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE CABINETS
        Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class II, and Class IIIA liquids shall be provided in accordance with the
        design, construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA  30, Chapter 4. Venting of storage
        cabinets is not required  for fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to  comply with local codes
        or authorities having jurisdiction. Nonvented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs supplied with the
        cabinet or with bungs specified by the manufacturer of the cabinet.

        If cabinet venting is required, the cabinet shall be mechanically vented to the outside in accordance with
        requirements of NFPA 30, Chap. 4 listed below:

        •    Both metal bungs must be removed and replaced with flash arrester screens (normally provided with
             cabinets). The top opening will serve  as the fresh air inlet.
        •    The bottom opening must be connected to an exhaust fan by a substantial metal tubing having an inside
             diameter no smaller than the vent.  The tubing should be rigid steel.
        •    The fan should have a non-sparking fan blade and non-sparking shroud.
        •    The cabinet shall exhaust directly to the outside (the cabinet shall not be vented through the fume hood)
        •    The total run of exhaust duct should not exceed 25  ft (17.6 meters).
        •    The design velocity of the duct should not be less than 2,000 fpm per Table 3-2, Industrial Ventilation,
             22nd Edition.
        •    The cabinets shall be  marked in conspicuous lettering "Flammable - Keep Fire Away. "
15.9   Air Filtration  and Exhaust Systems

15.9.1   DRY FILTRATION
        Air filters for ductwork and equipment installation shall be easily removable, serviceable, and maintainable.
        Air filters shall have face velocities as recommended by the filter manufacturer in order to achieve the
        specified efficiency at the lowest possible pressure drop.  Filters shall be constructed of noncombustible
        materials that meet the requirements of UL 900, Class I.  Air filters shall be located on the suction side of
        fans and coils and in other special locations as required for air treatment. Air-filter pressure drop gauges of
        the diaphragm-actuated dial type (preferred) or the inclined manometer type shall be located on all filter
        assemblies except small fan coils and fan-powered VAV terminal units.  The ASHRAE dust spot method
        shall be used in specifying the efficiencies required for medium-efficiency  filters. Filters shall be specified,
        and installed for use, as prefilters, medium-efficiency filters, or high-efficiency filters.

15.9.2   ABSOLUTE FILTRATION
        Absolute filtration, where required in fume hood exhaust systems, will have an efficiency of 99.97 percent,
        as determined by the dioctyl phthalate (DOP) aerosol test for absolute filters and shall satisfy ASHRAE 52-
        76.
                                                   15-32

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.9.2.1      TEST ACCESS
             The test access location shall facilitate in-place testing of HEPA filters, with particular attention given
             to plenum hardware that allows the HEPA filter bank to be tested without requiring the testing
             personnel to enter the plenum.  Utility services shall be extended to the plenum location (e.g., electrical
             receptacles and compressed air) to facilitate testing work. In-place testing design requirements shall
             meet all the recommendations of UL 586 and ASME N510. HEPA filtration systems shall be designed
             with prefilters installed upstream of HEPA filters to extend the HEPA filter's life.  The installation of
             prefilters may be omitted if an analysis of filtration requirements and consideration of the filter
             assembly justify omission.

15.9.2.2      FIRE PROTECTION OF HEPA FILTER ASSEMBLIES
             In providing fire protection for the HEPA filters, the design shall sufficiently separate prefilters or fire
             screens equipped with water spray from the HEPA filters in order to restrict impingement of moisture
             on the HEPA filters. Under conditions of limited separation, moisture eliminators or other means of
             reducing entrained moisture shall be provided. Moisture eliminators may be omitted where system
             design provides sufficient filter redundancy to ensure continued  effluent filtration in the event of fire
             within any portion of the system. The HEPA filter fire protection system shall be activated in a manner
             consistent with the fire protection system in the room or building in which the filters  are located.

15.9.3  AIR-CLEANING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
        Filters include dry-type dust collectors, wet collectors, centrifugal collectors, absorbers, oxidizers, and
        chemical treatment filters, which are used primarily in industrial and  process-type applications associated
        with air or gases that have heavy dust loadings in exhaust systems or stack gas effluents.  Filters shall be
        designed according to the requirements given in the project criteria, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
        Systems  and Equipment and ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.

15.9.4  OPERATION
        All building  systems shall be designed for continuous operation, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, unless
        otherwise specified in the project criteria. Additionally, night and weekend set backs are  required.

15.9.5  MAINTENANCE ACCESS
        The air supply and exhaust plenums shall be designed so that such  elements as motors, bearings, control
        valves, and steam traps are easily accessible for maintenance.

15.9.6  LOCATION OF AIR INTAKE
        The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building
        and shall be  so placed, relative to the building's exhausts and vent  stacks, as to prevent entrainment of
        contaminated air from outside sources, including, but not limited to, fume hood exhaust, vehicle exhaust,
        exhaust from adjacent structures, and sources of potential microbial contamination, such as vegetation,
        organic matter, and bird and animal droppings. Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air
        intakes toward the loading dock area. Idling trucks located in loading dock areas may cause contamination
        of intake air.  For security reasons, air intakes must be located in accordance with "Guidance for Protecting
        Building Environments from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological  Attacks" DHHS (NIOSH)
        Publication 2002-139, May 2002.

15.9.7  AIR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS STUDY
        The location and design of the exhaust stacks as well as the fresh-air  intakes to avoid adverse air quality
        impacts shall be based on criteria developed by a study of prevailing wind patterns utilizing recognized
        wind modeling technology, such as the EPA Industrial Source Complex Model (ISC3) utilizing Briggs
        plume rise equations, and the design criteria of Chapter 16 of the 2001  ASHRAE Handbook, and  Chapter
        44 of the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook, as applicable. In addition, the study should take into consideration
                                                    15-33

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        recommendations of Sect. 5.16, Exhaust Stack Outlets, including Figures 5-29 and 5-30, of Industrial
        Ventilation, 22nd Edition, as applicable.


15.10 Plumbing

15.10.1 GENERAL
        The criteria in this section apply to plumbing systems (fixtures, supply piping, drain, waste and vent piping,
        service water heating system, safety devices, and appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet beyond
        the building exterior wall. Plumbing shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) or
        local plumbing code, the ASHRAE handbooks, and ASHRAE standard 90. Access panels shall be provided
        where  maintenance or replacement of equipment, valves, or other devices is necessary.

15.10.2 WATER SUPPLY
        Type K copper tubing shall be used below grade. Type L copper tubing shall be used above grade.
        Polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe and tubing may be used in lieu of copper tubing above grade where not
        subject to impact damage or otherwise prohibited by the project criteria.  For new systems, domestic water
        shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a combined fire protection and potable-water service
        or a combined process water and potable-water system within the building.

        •   Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for
            Type L tubing shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper.  Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing shall
            be solvent-cemented or shall use Schedule 80  threaded. No lead solder shall be used for copper pipe in
            potable-water systems.

        •   Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture.  Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches
            serving floors, fixture batteries for isolation, or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also
            shall be provided to isolate equipment,  valves, and appurtenances for ease of maintenance.

        •   Accessible drain valves  shall be provided to drain the entire system.  Manual  air vents shall be
            provided at high points in the system.

        •   Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction cause piping systems
            to move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the piping system
            as laid out, by loops, by manufactured expansion joints, or by couplings.

        •   Accessible manufactured water hammer arresters shall be provided.  Dielectric connections shall be
            made between ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe.

        •   Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be
            provided to protect against differential  settlement or seismic activity, in accordance with the NSPC and
            NFPA 13, respectively.

15.10.2.1    METERING
            All incoming water to an EPA  facility shall  be directly metered so that the total facility water
            consumption is measured and known.  Facility subsystems, such as cooling towers and reverse osmosis
            equipment, that may consume a significant (10 percent or more) portion of the facility water intake,
            based on engineering calculation or estimate, shall be equipped with flow-totalizing sub-meters.
            Meters and sub-meters shall be calibrated and maintained according to the manufacturer's
            specifications.  Total metered and sub-metered water consumption shall be recorded and tracked at
            least monthly in a manner that allows facility operating personnel to identify and resolve any unusual or
            unexpected consumption.


                                                   15-34

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.10.2.2    LEAD IN POTABLE WATER
            Potable water systems components, such as piping, valves, fittings, drinking fountains, and fixtures,
            shall conform with requirements of the EPA National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (NPDWR)
            for lead and copper, 40 CFR Parts 141  and 143.  Components shall not be incorporated unless bearing
            the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 mark signifying compliance with NPDWR
            requirements. Upon substantial completion of the building, the potable water system within the
            building as well as the potable water supply main shall be tested for lead content in accordance with
            EPA Publication entitled "Lead in Drinking Water in Schools and Residential Buildings," EPA 812-B-
            94-002, April 1994.  Testing of the building potable water system and the potable water supply main
            shall be coordinated with the local water company as well as the state environmental protection agency.

15.10.2.3    STERILIZATION
            New supply systems  or existing supply systems that have undergone rehabilitation will require
            sterilization in accordance with American Waterworks Association (AWWA) C652, AWWA C5186,
            or the  local governing plumbing code.

15.10.3 DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES
        Underground lines that do not service laboratory areas shall be service-weight cast-iron soil pipe hub-type
        (with gasket); hubless cast-iron soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible. Aboveground
        (above grade) lines that are !1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hubless or hub-type (with
        gasket)  service-weight cast-iron pipe.  Lines that are !1/2 inches through 6 inches in diameter may be
        acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe where allowed by the project criteria. Pipe and fittings shall be
        joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals.  Lines that are less than !1/2 inches in diameter shall be either
        (1) Type L copper with solder-type bronze fittings or wrought copper fittings or (2) galvanized steel with
        galvanized malleable iron recessed threaded and coupled fittings. Cast-iron  soil pipe fittings and
        connections shall comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) guidelines. Provisions for expansion
        shall be included, as above.

        Underground lines servicing the laboratory  area shall be acid-resistant sewer pipe ANSI/ASTM D-2146-69;
        polyethylene plastic pipe and fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM D-1785; PVC plastic  pipe, Schedule 80 and 120,
        ASTM D-2241; PVC plastic pipe (SDR-PR), ASTM  D-2683; polypropylene fusion welded pipes, Schedule
        80, and approved equal products; or socket-type polyethylene fittings for outside diameter-controlled
        polyethylene pipe. They  shall be welded together following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS)
        Dl.l, structural welding code; ASTM D-2241; and ASTM D-2855.

15.10.3.1    TRAP SEAL PROTECTION
            A trap primer valve and floor/funnel drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall  be used
            where  there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps.

15.10.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
        Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure-zone type shall be provided on any domestic water and fire
        protection  lines serving the building. All domestic water lines shall be provided with water hammer
        suppressors and vacuum breakers at high points of supply lines or at  the fixture.

15.10.5 SAFETY DEVICES
        Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe pressure-balance type.  Hot-water generation equipment shall be
        provided with ASME code-stamped tanks, when of sufficient capacity, water temperature, or hot input rate
        to be within the jurisdiction of the ASME Boiler and  Pressure Vessel Code.  Approved pressure-relief
        devices, such as combination temperature-pressure or separate units, depending on the application, shall  be
        provided.  Backflow preventers and air gaps shall be used to prevent cross-connection (contamination) of
        potable-water supplies. Vacuum breakers (to prevent back-siphonage) shall  be used only in conjunction
        with administrative controls.
                                                   15-35

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.10.5.1    PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
            Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the
            normal operating range recommended by the manufacturer. Wherever a pressure-reducing valve's
            failure may cause equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-re lief valve shall be provided
            downstream of the reducing valve.

15.10.6 LABORATORY SAFETY DEVICES
        Eye and face washing equipment and safety showers must be provided for every laboratory and laboratory
        support room where chemicals are being utilized, or stored, in accordance with the American National
        Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Z358.1.  The location and installation  of emergency showers and
        eyewash equipment shall be in accordance with the Safety Manual.  Discharge from emergency showers or
        eyewashes should not impinge on powered electrical equipment. Safety equipment must meet ADA
        accessibility requirements.

15.10.6.1    EMERGENCY EYEWASH UNITS
            Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety shower units shall be provided in all work
            areas where, during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual
            may come  into  contact with a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue
            damage, or that is toxic by absorption.  At least one eyewash, initiated  by a single action, shall be
            provided within every laboratory, or for every two laboratory modules. Eyewash  units shall be
            designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously and to provide hands-free operation.
            The eyewash units chosen should provide protection of the nozzle area with pop-off covers, and other
            protective  features to prevent contamination of the flushing system. Design, operation, flow, water
            temperature, and similar characteristics shallmeet the criteria in ANSI  Z358.1-1998.  Water for the
            units shall  be supplied by the potable-water system.  The temperature of flushing fluid for the
            emergency units shall be tepid, 60-95 ฐF. Emergency eyewash units shall be provided with sanitary
            drains.

            Eyewash units shall be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach. Their
            location in all laboratory spaces  shall be  standardized as much as possible. Units shall be placed in a
            location away from potential sources of hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and  near the exit  door. The  location
            shall be well lighted and shall be clearly identified with a highly visible sign.  Final  location shall be
            approved by the EPA project officer during the design phase.

15.10.6.2    EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWERS
            Emergency safety shower  units shall be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during
            foreseeable emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive,
            severely irritating to the skin, or toxic by  skin absorption. Each safety  shower unit shall be equipped
            with an installed flexible hand-held drench hose with a spray head like  that used in hand-held eyewash
            units; this  shall be mounted on a rack. All piping  for the emergency safety showers shall be above the
            ceiling except for the shower head and the pull bar connection. Design, operation, flow rates, and
            similar characteristics shallmeet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1998. Water for shower units shall be
            supplied by the potable water system.  The temperature of flushing fluid for the emergency units shall
            be tepid, 60-95  ฐF. Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and  should
            extend to within 54 inches of the floor. The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be
            textured, well lighted, identified with a highly visible sign, and maintained free of items that obstruct its
            use. A water flow alarm shall sound when the safety shower is activated.

            Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much as possible.  Emergency safety showers in
            laboratories shall be located at the room entrance on the right-hand  side of the exit door (hinge side);
            instrument laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have showers located in the corridor at the
            pull side of the  room door. Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations that require no


                                                   15-36

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

            more than 10 seconds to reach from hazard locations, preferably inside or just outside the door of each
            laboratory work area. Safety showers should be no more than 50 feet travel distance from the hazard
            source. Refer to Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual for additional information.

15.10.7 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
        Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets and shall be
        compatible with their intended use.  All service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be of cast brass with a
        minimum copper content of 85 percent, except for items that are to be brass-forged or bar stock.  All service
        valves, fittings, and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use.  All laboratory service
        fittings shall have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating  applied over a clean, polished,
        chrome-plated surface.  Service fittings at fume hoods shall have  an acid-resistant and solvent-resistant
        plastic coating applied over  a fine sandblasted surface, properly cleaned.

15.10.8 GLASSWARE  WASHING SINKS
        Sinks dedicated to the purpose of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot with
        a swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a
        hand-held sprayer whose weight is supported  for ease of operation.  All glassware washing sinks shall be
        ventilated at a rate of 280 to 300 cfm with an  exhaust air duct connection at the top of the sink below the
        bench top.

15.10.9 CENTRALIZED LABORATORY WATER SYSTEMS
        The following requirements  apply to laboratory water systems.

15.10.9.1    DEIONIZED WATER (DI) SYSTEM
            Unless otherwise specified in the project  criteria, the central  deionized water system shall have a
            resistivity of greater than 10 megaohms at the tap  in each laboratory.  This  system may be a centralized
            system or several decentralized systems depending on the requirements of the  specific laboratory
            facility. Water quality shall conform to ASTM Type  I requirements for reagent-quality water and to
            American Pharmaceutical Association (APhA) requirements  for water used in microbiological testing.
            Type I water is typically prepared by reverse osmosis, then polishing it with mixed-bed deionizers and
            passing it through a 0.2-micron membrane filter. Pipes and fittings for the  DI  system shall be
            polyvinylidine fluoride  (PVDF) schedule 80 or unpigmented polypropylene. A bypass or drain legs
            shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to  avoid stagnation  of water at the branch
            pipes during extended periods of non-use.

15.10.9.2    HOT AND COLD WATER, POTABLE
            The laboratory potable-water supply shall be piped in Type K or Type L  copper.  Only potable water
            shall be used for emergency eyewash units and emergency showers.

15.10.9.3    INDUSTRIAL HOT AND COLD WATER, NONPOTABLE
            The laboratory nonpotable-water supply,  identified as industrial hot/cold water, shall be  piped in Type
            K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable
            water system from the potable-water system. Hot-water supply shall be insulated, and hot water shall
            be recirculated to conserve energy.

15.10.9.4    CULTURE WATER SYSTEM
            Culture water system piping shall be of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no
            metal in contact with the water.  The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene.
            Transfer pumps shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene.
                                                   15-37

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.10.9.5    METERS
            Special centralized laboratory water supply systems, such as deionized water, reverse osmosis water, or
            culture water systems shall be equipped with flow totalizing meters that measure total water
            consumption.

15.10.9.6    SIZING
            Systems shall be sized to meet the needs of the facility. Designs should accommodate anticipated
            future growth through the ability to add modular additional capacity, rather than by providing initial
            overcapacity.

15.10.10 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
        At least one drinking fountain shall be provided on each block of space so  that no person will have to travel
        more than 150 feet to reach it. Self-contained mechanically refrigerated coolers shall be provided wherever
        a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ARI 1010.  Electrical equipment shallbe UL
        listed. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled using lead solder, and all components must bear the
        marking NSF 61 indicating the components are free of lead. All drinking fountains and locations for
        drinking fountains shall comply with ADA.

15.10.11 TOILET FACILITIES
        Separate toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided.  The facilities must be located so that
        employees will not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach them. The toilet rooms' hot water should be
        set at 105 ฐF, or as required by the project criteria. Water closets and urinals shall not be visible when the
        toilet room entry door is open. All public toilet rooms shall be located along an accessible path of travel;
        must  have accessible fixtures, accessories, and doors and adequate  maneuvering clearances; and shall meet
        UFAS and ADA requirements.

15.10.11.1  TOILET SCHEDULE
            Unless otherwise specified by EPA, each toilet room shall have a minimum of two for each men's toilet
            room and a minimum of four for each women's toilet room, enclosed with modern stall partitions and
            doors. Each men's toilet room should also have at least two urinals. The number of water  closets in
            each women's toilet room shall be no less than the  sum of water closets plus urinals of the adjacent
            men's toilet room.  The number of water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall comply with all state and
            local codes and  with project criteria.  If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and
            local codes, the  more stringent shall apply unless otherwise directed by the contracting officer.

15.10.11.2  ACCESSORIES
            Each main toilet room shall contain:

            •    A soap dispenser, shelf, and mirror above the lavatory
            •    A toilet paper dispenser in each water closet stall
            •    A coat hook on the inside face of each water closet stall door and  on the wall immediately inside
                 the door of the toilet room.
            •    At least one modern paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle for every two lavatories
            •    A coin-operated sanitary napkin dispenser in women's  toilet rooms
            •    Ceramic tile or comparable wainscot from the floor to a minimum height of 4 feet 6 inches
            •    A disposable toilet-seat-cover dispenser
            •    A convenience electrical outlet located adjacent to one mirror in each toilet room
            •    A small covered container located inside each water closet partition enclosure in the women's
                 toilet room  for the disposal of used sanitary napkins
            •    Toilet partitions made of recycled material.
                                                    15-38

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

             The toilet room shall have at least one towel rack, towel dispenser, and other dispensers and disposal
             units mounted no higher than 48 inches from the floor, or 54 inches if a person in a wheelchair has to
             approach it from the side. One mirror with shelf shall be provided above the lavatory at as low a height
             as possible and no higher than 40 inches above the floor, measured from the top of the shelf and the
             bottom of the mirror. A common mirror provided for both the able and the disabled must provide a
             convenient view for both.

15.10.11.3   TOILET STALL ACCESSIBILITY
             All toilet rooms designated for public access shall have one toilet stall that:

             •    Is 60 inches wide.
             •    Has a minimum depth of 56 inches when wall-mounted toilets are used or 59 inches when floor-
                 mounted sets are used.
             •    Has a clear floor area.
             •    Has a door that is 32  inches wide and swings out.
             •    Has handrails on each side (front-transfer stall) or on the side and back (side-transfer  stall).
                 Handrails shall be 33 to 36 inches high and parallel to the floor, shall be 1 to !1/2 inches in outside
                 diameter, shall have !1/2 inches of clearance between rail and wall, and shall be fastened securely
                 at ends and center.  Handrails shall have no  sharp edges and must permit the continuous sliding of
                 hands.
             •    Has a water closet mounted at a height of 17 to 19 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the
                 seat. Hand-operated  or automatic flush controls shall be mounted no higher than 44 inches above
                 the floor.

             A toilet stall measuring 36 or 48 inches wide by  66  inches, but preferably 72 inches, deep may be
             acceptable, as determined by EPA.

15.10.11.4   LAVATORY ACCESSIBILITY
             At least one lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance of 29 inches from the  floor  to the top of the
             bottom of the apron. The height from the floor to the top of the lavatory rim shall not exceed 34
             inches. Faucets shall be lever operated, push type, or electronically activated  for one-hand operation
             without the need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must
             be covered, insulated, or recessed far enough so that individuals  in wheelchairs who are without
             sensation will not burn themselves.

15.10.11.5   URINAL ACCESSIBILITY
             Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-mounted urinals with elongated lips,  with the  basin opening no
             more than  17 inches above the floor.  Accessible floor-mounted stall urinals with basins at the level of
             the floor are  acceptable.

15.10.11.6   WATER-CONSERVING WATER CLOSETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
             Flow control devices shall be installed (unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria) on all water
             closets, sinks, and lavatories. Devices shall limit water closet flow to 1.6 gallons per flush, urinals to
             1.0 gallon per minute, and regular lavatories to 1.5 gallons per minute.  New lavatory faucets shall be
             equipped with automatic,  sensor-operated shut-off valves.  Automatic sensors shall be adjusted and
             maintained according to the manufacturer's specifications.  Waterless urinals shall be considered
             whenever new facilities are built or renovations are  made to an existing site.

15.10.12 SHOWER STALLS
        Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, shower head, separate hot-
        and cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain.  Shower stalls shall also
                                                    15-39

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        provide a small change area with lockers. Emergency shower deluge heads shall not be used in regular
        shower stalls.  Shower stalls shall conform with requirements of ADA and/or UFAS, as applicable.

15.10.13 HOSE BIBBS
        Three-quarter-inch hose bibbs should be provided on exterior walls of the building(s), 30 inches above
        grade.  At least one hose bibb shall be installed on each wall.  When an exterior wall exceeds 75 feet in
        length, additional bibbs shall be installed so that distance between bibbs does not exceed 75 feet.
        Depending on the geographical location of the facility, the design professional shall use freeze-proof hose
        bibbs.

15.10.14 WATER CONSERVATION ELEMENTS AND TECHNIQUES
        All significant water-using processes should be evaluated using the pollution prevention hierarchy of
        reduce, recycle, and reuse. Water use reduction should be considered as the first alternative. Each system
        shall be designed and operated in a manner that uses the minimum amount of water practicable.  Within a
        system, water shall be recycled to the maximum degree practicable, prior to discharge. Water discharged
        from processes that require high quality water shall be considered for reuse in systems where the residual
        quality is sufficient for proper operation.

15.10.15 SINGLE PASS COOLING
        Use of potable water for single pass cooling is prohibited. Acceptable replacements for single pass cooling
        are recirculated chilled water loops or point of use chillers.
15.11  Acid Neutralization System
        All nonsanitary laboratory wastewaters are required to pass through an acid neutralization system to control
        pH as well as other chemical and/or material constituents, before discharging into a local publicly owned
        treatment works (POTW). The system shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 40 CFR 403.5,
        National Pretreatment Standard Prohibited Discharges, the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
        System (NPDES), and the local POTW. The system shall have the capability of automatic, continuous
        monitoring and recording of wastewater discharge flow, pH, and other constituents to conform with POTW
        requirements.  System components shall be accessible for monitoring, sampling,  and maintenance. In
        addition, the system shall be provided with emergency power and an audible and visual alarm to alert staff
        in event of non-conforming discharges.


15.12  Laboratory Gases and  Process Piping Systems

15.12.1  NONFLAMMABLE AND FLAMMABLE GAS SYSTEMS
        Systems for flammable and nonflammable gas must meet the following requirements.

15.12.1.1    GENERAL
            Special gas services for flammable and nonflammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories
            requiring their use. Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with NFPA 45, Fire Protection for
            Laboratories Using Chemicals', NFPA 50A, Gaseous Hydrogen at Consumer Sites; NFPA SOB,
            Liquified Hydrogen at Consumer Sites', NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code; and NFPA 55,
            Compressed and Liquefied Gases in Portable Cylinders, as applicable.  In situations not covered by
            NFPA code, the Compressed Gas Association (CGA) shall be consulted  for guidance. No piping from
            any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit corridors.

            •   Gas cylinders for nonflammable  gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded from a
                remotely located space that is central to the laboratory areas and served by and accessible from the
                                                  15-40

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

                 main storeroom or loading and receiving dock area.  This space shall be designed and ventilated in
                 accordance with code requirements.
             •    Flammable-gas cylinders shall be provided at the point of use only and shall be housed in
                 ventilated cabinet enclosures mechanically ventilated to atmosphere with leak detection and alarm-
                 monitoring devices.

15.12.1.2     DISTRIBUTION  SYSTEMS
             For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a seamless-copper-piping gas distribution
             system for nonflammable gases shall be provided to all designated laboratories. Ideally, the length of
             the gas distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet to avoid the necessity for pipe joints. If pipe joints
             are required due to line length, prior approval by EPA is required.  The process piping contractor shall
             propose proper sleeving.  Regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required to furnish gas at the
             required pressures shall be provided.  Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the
             gas  from the cylinders(s) to the point of application.  The number and type of gas outlets in  each room
             are indicated in the room data sheets.  Exact and final outlet location in each laboratory must be
             approved by EPA during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual
             room cutoff.

15.12.1.3     DISTRIBUTION  TO METALS  LABORATORIES
             For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a seamless Teflon-piping gas-distribution system shall be
             provided.  The lines shall be  placed inside larger PVC pipes and vented to the outside of the building.
             Each line in this system shall be equipped at both ends with regulator valves and other auxiliary
             equipment required to furnish gas  at required pressures. Gas-distribution systems other than Teflon
             may be utilized if approved by EPA.  Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the
             gas  from the cylinder(s) to the point of use.

15.12.1.4     BOTTLE GAS SUPPLY
             The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic changeover valves
             and controls.  For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the
             laboratories.  Rooms may be clustered in the panel as long as the distance between the point of use and
             the panel does not exceed 75 feet.

             When toxic or explosive gases are used in a confined space, a multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system
             shall be provided to monitor concentration of the gases within this space. This system shall consist of
             gas  sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a microprocessor-based monitoring-and-alarm control panel.  The
             number and type of sensors/ transmitters shall depend on the specific application. Each
             sensor/transmitter shall transmit a  frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and shall have
             a special amplifier to eliminate the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be
             capable of monitoring, and providing an alarm on, different types of gases in different zones; the panel
             shall have an audible and a visible alarm.  The control panel shall also have a factory-wired terminal
             strip to interface with the energy management system for remote monitoring and alarms.

15.12.1.5     LIQUID NITROGEN AND LIQUID ARGON
             Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form. Insulation in the
             delivery system must be  sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The  gas distribution
             room for these two gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the gases are
             used—preferably adjacent to  them.  This gas distribution room shall also be directly accessible from the
             outside of the building without use of the laboratory corridors. One large tank for each gas  shall be
             provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the room.  The tanks shall be outfitted with necessary
             valves and controls, as required by the gas supplier.
                                                    15-41

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.12.1.6    NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
            Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each laboratory must have a natural gas distribution
            system.

15.12.1.7    TESTING AND PURGING
            Before acceptance, the distribution system must be pressure tested and purged.  The required level of
            purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
            purging.

15.12.2 COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
        When compressed-air systems are required, these systems should have oil and water traps, a dryer, and all
        controls. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed-air system shall have duplex
        compressors (one redundant) with an  automatic lead/lag switch and a single compressor tank. Compressed-
        air systems for processes shall be completely independent of the compressed-air system for the HVAC
        controls. The compressed-air system  shall provide a water trap and pressure regulation at each laboratory.
        An audible alarm  and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure.  Air
        compressors shall use vibration pads and springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound
        generated by compressors.  Further, compressor location should minimize transmission of vibration and
        sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.

15.12.3 VACUUM SYSTEMS
        When a laboratory vacuum system is required, it shall be composed of several vacuum pumps capable of
        evacuating air at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria. Storage
        volume and number of pumps shall be determined at the design stage as needed to meet laboratory
        benchwork requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have
        duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch, and a single tank. An audible alarm and remote annunciation
        shall be provided  to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum. Vacuum pumps shall use vibration pads and
        springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound generated by the pumps.  Further, pump
        location should minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the pumps
        service.
15.13 Testing and Balancing

15.13.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
        An independent air balance and testing agency that specializes in the balancing and testing of HVAC
        systems shall be used to balance,  adjust, and test air-moving equipment and the air distribution system,
        water system, gas system, and compressed air-piping systems, as applicable.  The independent contractor
        shall be an organization (1) whose specialty is testing and balancing environmental systems, (2) that is a
        member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau
        (NEBB), and (3) that has satisfactorily balanced at least three systems whose type and size are comparable
        to those of this project. The independent testing and balancing contractor shall be  registered in the  state in
        which the project is located.

15.13.2 SCOPE OF WORK
        The testing and balancing (TAB) work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following
        items:

        •   All air-conditioning supply and return systems
        •   Air exhaust systems
                                                   15-42

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        •   Laboratory fume hood (LFH) supply and exhaust systems (including certification and performance
            testing of the laboratory fume hoods in accordance with EPA Procedure for Certifying Laboratory
            Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards)
        •   All hydronic systems
        •   Gas and compressed-air systems.

15.13.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
        The TAB procedures shall be in accordance with those prescribed by AABC or NEBB.  The certification of
        the newly installed laboratory fume hoods requires use of test methods described in the ANSI/ASHRAE
        110 "Method of Testing Performance Laboratory Fume Hoods" and the Scientific Equipment & Furniture
        Association, "Laboratory Fume Hoods Recommended Practices." The tests are modified to meet EPA
        standards and include:

        •   Measurement of cross draft velocities using a velocity anemometer located with the tip of the probe
            approximately 12 to 18 inches in front of the hood. Cross draft velocities should be measured parallel
            and perpendicular to hood face opening in front of the left, center and right sides  of the hood.
        •   Measurement efface velocity with the vertical sash open 100 percent, 80 percent (design opening and
            height of mechanical sash stop) and  vertical 6 inches open.  The grid velocity measurements must be
            made using a velocity anemometer.  Each grid velocity measurement should be recorded as the average
            velocity over a minimum of 10 seconds or ten readings per grid location.
        •   Smoke Visualization Tests at the 80% design sash opening. The smoke tests must include a low
            volume challenge and a high volume challenge.
        •   VAV Tests that measure flow response and stability in response to sash movements between 6 inches
            open and 80% open. The VAV tests are conducted by measuring face velocity or slot velocity in the
            baffle (variations in face velocity greater than 10 percent requires slot velocity measurement). A data
            logger is required to record face velocity data at a rate of at least 1 sample per second. The VAV  tests
            consist of a 5 minute response test and two five minute stability tests. The response test is conducted
            by recording velocity while raising and lowering the sash three times during the 5 minute period.  The
            sash is raised and lowered at a rate of approximately 1.5 ft/sec following the sash being lowered for 30
            seconds and raised for 60 seconds. The stability tests are conducted by measuring velocity for five
            minutes at the 6 inch sash height and the five minutes at the 80% sash height.
        •   Recording  of exhaust flow at the 6 inch sash opening and 80%  sash opening. The flow rates are
            particularly important when slot velocities are measured and be  verified against face velocity
            measurements.

        The certification and/or performance testing of the LFH shall be performed by the fume hood manufacturer
        in presence of a SHEMD representative after the testing and balancing work has been completed, and the
        testing and balancing report submitted and approved by SHEMD.  The TAB contractor shall be present and
        available to make needed adjustments during certifications and performance testing of LFHs by the LFH
        manufacturer. Criteria for the tests are summarized in Table 15.13.3.1.

 Table 15.13.3.1 Testing Criteria for Newly Installed Laboratory Fume Hoods
Test
Cross Draft Test
Face Velocity - 1 00% Open
Face Velocity - 80% Open
Criteria
Vcd < 25 fpm
Max < 50 fpm
Vfavg = 80 fpm
Vfmin > 70 fpm
Vfmax < 90 fpm
Vfavg = 1 00 fpm
Vfmin > 90 fpm
Vfmax < 110 fpm
Notes
Sash 80% open
VAV hoods can have 100 fpm face
velocity at 100% sash full open.
Mechanical sash stop installed.
Monitor must indicate within 10% of
actual face velocity.
                                                   15-43

-------
July 2004
                                     Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                    Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
 Table 15.13.3.1 Testing Criteria for Newly Installed Laboratory Fume Hoods
 Test
 Criteria
Notes
 Face Velocity - 6" Open
 VAV Response Test
 VAV Stability Test - 6 inch
 Opening
 VAV Stability Test - 80%
 Opening
     Vf avg < 300 fpm for CAV
     hoods
     Vfavg 100 fpm for VAV hoods

 Dynamic Sash Movement
     DSSV6 > 100 fpm (equivalent
     slot velocity)
 •    DSSD6<10%
     DSSV80 = 100 fpm  ฑ 10 fpm

 •    DSSD80<10%
     DRT80 < 5 seconds
 •    DRD80 < 20%
 Stability Test
 •    SSSV6>100fpm
 •    SSSD6<10%
     QBAS6 > 50 cfm/linear ft of
     hood width

 Stability Test
 •    SSSV80 = 100 fpm ฑ 10
 •    SSSD80<10%
         QBAS80 ฑ 10% of design
	flow	
    Average steady state velocity at 6
    inches
    Steady state deviation
    Average steady state velocity at
    80% open
    Steady state deviation
    Response time
    Max deviation from average steady
    state velocity.

Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
or equivalent
Steady state deviation
Reported flow at 6 inch opening
Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
or equivalent
Steady state deviation
Reported flow at 80% opening
15.13.4  TESTING AND BALANCING DEVICES
        HVAC air and water distribution systems shall be provided with permanently installed, calibrated testing
        and balancing devices, such as pressure gages, balancing valves, pilot tubes, dampers, thermometers, test
        holes, with access, as needed, to accurately measure and adjust water and air flows, pressures, and
        temperatures as required. At a minimum, the balancing devices in Table 15.13.4.1, Required Balancing
        Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems, and Table 15.13.4.2, Required Balancing Devices for
        Air Distribution Systems, shall be provided. Test devices shall be located and installed according to AABC
        Volume A-82.
                                                 15-44

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

        Table 15.13.4.1 Required Balancing Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems	
        System Components (Water)                        Required System Devices
        Pump suction and discharge piping                   Manifold pressure gauge with pressure taps
        Pump discharge piping                              Flow-measuring device (type depending on accuracy
                                                          required) or inlet and discharge pressure gauges
        Chiller evaporator water suction and discharge piping   Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge and
                                                          gaugecock
        Boiler or heat exchanger suction and discharge piping  Same devices as required for chiller evaporator
                                                          piping
        Heating or cooling coil (air-handling unit [AHU])        Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge/pressure tap
        suction and discharge piping
        Heating or cooling coil (AHU) discharge piping         Presettable calibrated  balancing valve with integral
                                                          pressure test ports
        Reheat coil, fan coil unit, unit heater, ports, and finned  Presettable calibrated  balancing valve with integral
        tube radiation, convector: (1) discharge piping         pressure test ports; temperature test; and pressure
        (2) suction piping                                   tap
        Three-way control valves (each port) suction and       Pressure tap
        discharge piping
        Boiler discharge piping                              Flow-measuring device (orifice or venturi type)
       Table 15.13.4.2 Required Balancing Devices for Air Distribution Systems	
       System Components                              Required System Device
       Diffusers, grilles, registers                         Round butterfly or square/rectangular opposed-blade
                                                        volume damper, either integral with device or in spin-in
                                                        takeoffs
       Branch ductwork runs                             Rectangular/square or round (with more than one
                                                        opposed-blade damper and terminal device). Sealed
                                                        test hole for pitot tube traverse
       Fan discharge ductwork                           Sealed test holes for pitot tube traverse.  Sealed test
                                                        hole for static pressure measurements
       Fan suction ductwork                             Sealed test hole for static pressure measurement
       Cooling coil suction and discharge airstreams        Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
       Heating coil suction and discharge airstreams        Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
       Mixed-air plenum airstream                         Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
15.13.5  REPORTING
        At the completion of the testing and balancing work, the testing  and balancing contractor shall submit a
        report for EPA approval that conforms in format, and content to the requirements of AABC and/or NEBB
        The report shall reflect all aspects of the testing and balancing work, including a comparison of the
        adjusted/balanced performance of the systems with design requirements.  The report shall be delivered at
        least 15 days prior to final inspection of the building.
                                                  15-45

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.14 Commissioning

       Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning requirements.


END OF SECTION 15
                                              15-46

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
                         Section  16 - Electrical Requirements

16.1   General

16.1.1   CODE COMPLIANCE
        All work done in this section shall comply with the applicable requirements of the most current edition of
        the following codes and references:

            National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70)
            National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)
        •   Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
            Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
        •   Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 110)
        •   Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111)
            Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780)
        •   Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-4, Transformers
            29 CFR งง1910.303-305
        •   Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research Council
        •   Title III Standards for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility
            Standards, sections 2, 3, 4, and 4a, respectively, of the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, as amended
        •   NACE International Standards
        •   Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
        •   American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
            National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
        •   Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IBS) Lighting  Handbook
        •   Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
        •   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards
            PB S-P1 00, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service.

        In addition, all work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes, regulations,
        ordinances, publications, and manuals.  All newly manufactured equipment shall be listed by Underwriters
        Laboratories Inc. (UL) or a similar testing laboratory acceptable to EPA. When codes conflict, the most
        stringent standard shall govern.

16.1.2   ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
        Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke
        control, zoning, and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA
        101.

16.1.3   ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DESIGN
        After careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
        departments, the design professional shall design systems that meet facility operating requirements in an
        energy-efficient manner. The health and safety aspects of the operation must retain first priority, however,
        and cannot be relaxed or traded off for more efficient systems. System and lighting design shall comply
        with the requirements of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
        (ASHRAE) standard 90, IBS Lighting Handbook, the Facilities Management and Services Division
        (FMSD) Energy Conservation Planning Handbook, EPA's  Energy Star Program, and any state or local
        energy conservation codes or recommendations.
                                                   16-1

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.1.3.1     LOCAL ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMS
            The local utility company shall be contacted to find the latest information on any and all energy
            conservation programs in effect sponsored by the utility company.  The economic validity of pursuing
            these programs shall be presented to EPA with the first design submittal, and if the programs are
            deemed viable, they shall be incorporated into the design for the project. The design professional, with
            EPA, shall pursue rebates and other assistance to install energy conserving equipment, if applicable.

16.1.3.2     LOAD SHEDDING/PEAK SHAVING
            The payback and attributed atmospheric admissions involved in introducing a load-shedding/peak-
            shaving system into the facility design shall be evaluated.  If a preliminary evaluation indicates a
            payback of 5 years or less, a detailed evaluation  of load shedding/peak shaving systems for the project
            shall be prepared and submitted to EPA for funding consideration. The  operational duty ratings of the
            systems evaluated and proposed is of utmost importance.  Continuous duty operation equipment is
            required.  Factors such as the various fuel sources, exhaust fume contribution to outdoor air quality,
            local air quality standards, and energy-efficient generator equipment shall also be considered.

16.1.3.3     DEMAND-SIDE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
            A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand of the facility below a predetermined
            level shall be evaluated. An economic analysis to determine the payback on such a system shall be
            performed.  This system, if feasible, shall have the capability to follow the demand variations as an
            operator manually switches the loads.

16.1.4  COORDINATION OF WORK
        A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural; electrical; heating, ventilation, and
        air-conditioning [HVAC]; plumbing; equipment; and structural systems for bidding) shall be provided.
        Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work among the trades and delineate the coordination
        responsibilities of the contractor.  Special attention shall be given to designed-in equipment and equipment
        to be provided by the facility occupants.

16.1.5  POWER FACTORS
        The design professional shall design the facility's electrical system so as to assure that the overall power
        factor of the entire electrical installation is a minimum of 90 percent. This power factor may be achieved by
        selection of electrical utilization equipment with individual power factor ratings that would render the
        required facility power factor or through the installation of power factor correction devices to meet the
        overall facility power factor requirement.  The design professional shall assure that certain groups of
        inductive type loads, such as motors of 5 HP and above, fluorescent lighting  fixtures, transformers, etc., are
        equipped with power factor  correction at an individual level so that combined, the overall facility power
        factor will be attained. All required power factor correction devices shall be switched with the utilization
        equipment unless doing so results in an unsafe condition.

16.1.6  HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
        The facility shall also comply with the electrical requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility
        Standards (UFAS) (1984), adopted by the General Services Administration (GSA) in 41 CFR Parts 101-
        19.6, as well as with ADA and all state and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities that must be
        accessible and usable by physically handicapped people.  The most stringent of these codes shall apply.

16.1.7  MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
        All specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers that are regularly and
        currently engaged in production of such items. Items that are obsolete or to be discontinued by the
        manufacturer, as well as materials and equipment of an experimental nature (or products that would be
        installed in a facility for the  first time with this project), are not acceptable and will not be permitted. All
                                                    16-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        material and equipment shall be specification grade, new, free from defects, and high quality, and shall be
        entirely suitable for these specific facilities.

16.1.8  ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
        Careful consideration shall be given in the design to the types of materials to be used for the project as they
        relate to the environment in which they will be installed.  Exterior equipment may be subject to different
        types of corrosive atmospheres and environments. Interior equipment in laboratories and testing and
        storage areas may also be subject to corrosive conditions.  All equipment and material shall be suitable for
        the environment in which it will be installed.  Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment such as
        transformers and generators. Environmental considerations for electrical raceways and enclosures are
        further discussed in paragraph 16.13 of this section.

16.2   Primary Distribution

16.2.1  DUCTBANKS AND CABLE
        All primary electrical distribution at new sites shall be underground.  Underground cables should be
        preferably installed in conduit; however, very long cable runs may be installed where the cost of installing
        cables in conduit is extremely high. A cost comparison between direct burial cables and cables installed in
        conduit shall be submitted to the Project Officer for approval within ten (10) calendar days after contract
        award.  The minimum conduit size for primary voltage cables shall be 4 inches.  On multiple conduit
        ductbanks for primary distribution systems and for the emergency power distribution system up to the
        emergency distribution switchgear, 25 percent and not less than one (1) spare empty conduit shall be
        provided.  Spare empty conduits for other critical equipment feeders, like the central HVAC equipment,
        shall be provided as directed by the FOR or the Project Officer.

16.2.1.1      DUCTBANK ENCASEMENT
             All underground cables and wires shall be installed in conduit. Underground conduit for circuits rated
             600 volts or higher shall be encased in concrete. Multiple ductbanks where the heat produced by
             adjacent circuits affect the current carrying capacity of each individual circuit shall be encased in
             concrete.

16.2.2  SWITCHES
        When a new campus-type utility distribution system or an extension of an existing campus-type distribution
        system is  a part of the project, a loop system shall be considered.  This system shall have sectionalizing
        primary switches. Primary switches shall be of load break design.  All switches shall be pad mounted and
        lockable.  Enclosures for switches shall be suitable to the environment in which the switches will be located.
        Where switches are to be located indoors, they shall be physically isolated from any emergency electrical
        equipment and shall be located in electrical rooms only.

16.2.3  OVERHEAD POWER SUPPLY LINES
        Overhead power supply lines can be used only where service is to be installed in remote or unsettled areas,
        industrial areas, or areas where underground service  is not feasible.  Maximum use shall be made of single-
        pole structures. Overhead power supply lines may also be used for feeders to small single-phase loads or
        buildings. Careful consideration shall be given to the location of overhead lines in relation to future land
16.2.3.1      POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES
             Joint use of poles for power and communications distribution shall maintain safety standards and shall
             limit electrical interference to communications services. In joint use of poles, either for multiple
             electrical distribution systems or for both electrical distribution and communication lines, underbuilt
             lines or cables shall be of vertical construction. Use of double-stacked cross run construction shall be
             allowed  only where proper clearances for hot-line maintenance work can be ensured. Clearances shall


                                                    16-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            comply with the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) [American National Standards Institute
            (ANSI) standard C2].

16.2.4  TRANSFORMERS
        Transformers shall be located and installed in accordance with NEC Article 450 and in such a way as to
        minimize the fire and contamination hazards to the EPA facility and its occupants. The following
        requirements also apply:

        •   Whenever any public utility transformer or other equipment involves a dielectric fluid that is
            combustible, toxic, or otherwise hazardous, it shall not be located inside an EPA facility.

        •   Utility transformer vaults or transformer locations abutting an EPA building shall conform to the
            requirements of the NEC.  Transformer equipment shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath,
            any exit.

        •   Transformers, fluorescent ballasts, and other electrical devices containing polychlorinated biphenyls
            (PCBs) shall not be used in EPA facilities.

        •   All transformers located within an EPA building shall be dry-type only (unless they are located within a
            transformer vault and furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure relief vent).

16.2.4.1     DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
            Dry-type transformers shall be provided with four 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated
            primary voltage. All transformers shall be designed for continuous operation; the insulation for dry
            type transformers shall be class "H." All transformers shall conform to the design, temperature-rise,
            testing, and other requirements specified by the Acoustical Society of America (ASA), NEMA, and
            IEEE standards  and shall have a rated sound level of 45 decibels  (dBA) or below.  To ensure against
            objectionable levels of noise being transmitted through the building, the dry-type transformers shall be
            mounted on approved vibration-isolation mountings.  Connection to transformers shall be made with
            flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) with grounding jumper. All dry-type transformers shall be designed
            for nonlinear loads and  shall be isolated-type  transformers.  They shall be K-rated and shall be shielded
            and located as close as possible to the load. The designer shall consider the use of shielded isolation
            transformers for sensitive computer and  other electronic equipment loads.

16.2.4.2     OUTSIDE  SUBSTATIONS AND TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
            In addition to the requirements above, outside substations and transformers meet the most current
            requirements of Article 450  of the NEC  and applicable local utility company substation construction
            standards.

16.2.5  SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
        A risk/benefit analysis  should be performed to justify added capital costs for system redundancy.
16.3   Service Entrance

16.3.1   GENERAL
        All service entrance equipment shall be UL listed for use as service entrance equipment. All components
        shall be factory wired for switchboards, panelboards, or unit substations before shipment.  Service entrance
        equipment shall be physically isolated from all emergency power systems so that a failure in either system
        will not affect the operation of the other system.  All service switchboards shall have factory-installed
        ammeters and voltmeters.
                                                    16-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.3.2  OVERHEAD SERVICES
        Overhead services to buildings should not be used except in particular circumstances where underground
        services are not feasible, and then only with approval of the EPA contracting officer's representative
        (COR). Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads, and
        supports shall be provided.  The main service switch, panelboard, or switchboard shall be located
        immediately adjacent to the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be
        maintained under all overhead lines. The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall be
        grouted or otherwise fire-stopped.

16.3.3  UNDERGROUND  SERVICES
        All underground secondary (voltage less than 600)  conductors shall be installed in direct buried conduits.
        Where secondary-service reliability is a prime consideration, secondary service ductbanks shall be concrete
        encased. Minimum  duct size of service entrance ducts shall be 4 inches, all other secondary conduits that
        might be necessary for power distribution to exterior lighting and other electrical loads shall be sized based
        on conduit fill as calculated in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. A minimum of 25 percent
        spare service entrance ducts (but not less than one spare duct) shall be provided. Spare ducts shall be
        plugged or capped to prevent contamination. The locations where manholes (if required) are to be included
        shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly.

16.3.4  SERVICE CAPACITY
        Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to  accommodate
        the full design load plus 30 percent.  To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be
        located outside of the actual building. If public utility transformers must be located within  buildings
        because of site constraints, they  shall be installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the
        requirements of the NEC. These vaults shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from
        the building. In calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for lighting and
        fixed mechanical equipment loads  and a demand factor of 75 percent for all other loads.  The incoming
        service shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the full design load plus 30 percent additional
        capacity for future growth.

16.3.5  METERING
        Where medium voltage power is brought to the facility, electrical energy metering (kilowatt hour [kwh])
        shall be furnished at  each substation of 500 kilovolt-ampere (kVA) or greater capacity. Demand metering
        (kilowatt demand [kwd]) shall be furnished as required for load management. The economics of primary
        metering and secondary metering for campus-type facilities shall  also be investigated; the most cost-
        effective method shall be used. Coordination with the local utility company should be performed to
        determine points of utility metering requirements. Single metering is preferred.  Sub-metering of lighting
        and equipment in individual buildings is encouraged to monitor and adjust energy performance.

16.3.6  SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
        Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker  or circuit
        breakers, or a main switchboard  or panelboard. In determining whether the service entrance equipment
        should be of the fused or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit
        current available at various points in the proposed distribution system.

16.3.5.1     SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
            All service entrance equipment shall have copper busing.  If the main service consists of a switchboard
            or panelboard, it shall have  at  least 10  percent of the  switchboard rating as spare breaker or switches
            and  20 percent of the rating as bused spaces.  The electrical system shall be properly coordinated for
            selective tripping in order to permit removal of only that portion of the system that has experienced a
            fault or overload condition.
                                                    16-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.3.5.2     RENOVATION
            If this project is a renovation or an extension of an existing building, the history of the loads shall be
            carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient capacity to handle
            the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.


16.4   Interior Electrical Systems

16.4.1   BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
        Electrical systems shall be designed so that all components operate within their capacities for initial and
        projected loads. Preferred standard voltages (per ANSI C84.1) shall be used, with a single voltage level
        characteristic in any classification, in order to minimize stocks of spare equipment and to standardize
        operating and maintenance practices and procedures. On-site acceptance testing shall be required for each
        major electrical system. Tests shall be performed in the presence of EPA personnel.  Copies of all test
        results shall be  submitted for approval. All receptacles, switches, and wiring devices shall be specification
        grade. All safety switches shall be heavy duty. All equipment shall be new and shall be installed and used
        in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling as required and acceptable to EPA
        (i.e., UL listing or other EPA acceptable listing).

        The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account
        the effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system. Harmonics from nonlinear
        loads can affect the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors, and emergency
        generators.  "K" rated transformers shall be used where the associated panelboards are feeding a large
        quantity of nonlinear loads.  Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by variable-speed
        and variable-frequency drive units used for control of HVAC equipment.

16.4.2   CONDUCTORS
        All conductors  (wire and cable) shall be copper. All conductors for systems operating at 480 volts and
        below shall have 600-volt insulation with distinctive markings, as required by UL, for identification in the
        field. All conductors shall be continuous, without splices. All conductors operating at  600 volts and above
        shall be insulated and shall have the appropriate voltage and insulation ratings  as required by their location
        in the system and in the facility.  Branch circuit wiring shall not be smaller than No.  12  American Wire
        Gage (AWG). All conductors shall be color  coded to identify each phase and the neutral. The grounding
        conductor shall be green or bare.

16.4.3   RACEWAYS
        All electrical wiring  shall be installed in conduit or raceway or shall be otherwise physically protected in
        accordance with the NEC. Conduit shall  be at least % inch.

16.4.3.1     SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT
            Service entrance conduit shall be  provided as permitted by the NEC for the intended purpose. Service
            entrance conduits shall be enveloped in a minimum of 2 inches of concrete encasement. An empty
            conduit shall be provided up to the service entrance disconnect.

16.4.3.2     FLEXIBLE-METAL CONDUIT
            Liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit shall be used for connections to meters, transformers, pumps, and
            other equipment, as required by the NEC and local codes, where vibration or movement can be a
            problem and where there is a need for protection from liquids, vapors, or solids.

16.4.3.3     RATED ASSEMBLIES
            Raceways that penetrate fire-rated assemblies shall be noncombustible.  Openings shall be sealed to
            maintain the established fire ratings as defined by UL.


                                                    16-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.4.3.4      SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
             Surface metal raceways shall be used to provide receptacles with power and for low-potential services
             (e.g., data and telecommunications wiring) in the laboratories themselves.  The design professional
             shall review and make recommendations to EPA concerning the type of surface metal raceways
             appropriate to the project.  The design professional shall consider using single-compartment surface
             metal raceways (2% inches high by 1% inches deep, minimum size) where only power receptacles are
             required and double-compartment surface metal raceways (4% inches high by 2% inches deep,
             minimum size) where both power receptacles and telecommunications/data outlets are required.
             Raceway covers shall be precut to 12-inch sections. The raceway shall be divisible into two or three
             separate wiring components to facilitate installation of power or low-potential wiring.  The material and
             color of the raceway shall be appropriate to the atmosphere in which the raceway will be installed.

16.4.3.5      PLENUMS, DUCTS, AND OTHER AIR-HANDLING SPACES
             All wiring shall be in accordance with NEC Article 300, except that communication circuits (Article
             800) and Class 2 and Class 3 circuits  (Article 725) need not be run in conduit when conductors are of
             materials that are classified by UL as  having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
             characteristics.

16.4.4  NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
        The neutral conductors of four-wire system feeder(s), directly serving nonlinear load shall be sized at
        double the ampere rating of the phase conductors through the entire interior electrical distribution system.
        The neutral conductors of 480/277-volt, four-wire feeders  serving the lighting panels that control the
        electronic ballast fluorescent fixtures shall be sized at double the wire size of the phase conductors. Neutral
        conductors of circuits serving nonlinear load shall be dedicated to the circuit only. Therefore, when there is
        more than one circuit in a single conduit run and any of the circuits are serving nonlinear load, a dedicated
        neutral wire for each of the circuits serving nonlinear loads, in  addition to the neutral wire serving the other
        circuits,  shall be provided.

16.4.5  PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
        Panelboards shall comply with UL 50 and UL 67. Panelboards for use as service-disconnecting means shall
        also conform to UL 869A.  Panelboards shall be equipped with a main circuit breaker and all branch circuit
        breakers as required.  Design shall be such that any individual breaker can be removed without disturbing
        adjacent units and without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining
        clearances as required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, provisions  should be made for the future
        installation of a breaker, which shall be sized as indicated. All panelboard locks included in the project
        shall be keyed alike. All distribution panels serving fluorescent fixtures, laboratory room distribution
        panels, and any other panels serving nonlinear load shall be UL listed and labeled for nonlinear loads.  An
        isolated neutral bus shall be provided in each panel for connection of circuit-neutral conductors.  A separate
        ground bus marked with a yellow stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet shall be provided for
        connecting grounding conductors.  A separate ground bus marked with a green strip  along its front and
        isolated from the panel cabinet  shall be provided for connecting isolated insulated ground wires.

16.4.5.1      DIRECTORIES
             Directories shall be provided to indicate the load served by each circuit. These  directories shall be
             typed and shall be mounted in a holder behind a transparent protective covering. Bus board shall be
             supported on bases independent of the circuit breakers.  Main buses and back pans shall be designed so
             that breakers may be changed  without machining, drilling, or tapping.

16.4.5.2      CIRCUIT BREAKERS
             Molded-case circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1  and UL 489 and UL 877 for circuit
             breakers and circuit breaker enclosures located in hazardous (classified) locations.  Circuit breakers
             shall be thermal magnetic type with an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes  symmetrical minimum.


                                                    16-7

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            The design professional is required to submit for approval by the EPA, short circuit calculations; if
            these calculations indicate that a higher circuit breaker interrupting capacity is required, then circuit
            breakers with the calculated interrupting capacity shall be provided.  Breaker terminals shall be UL
            listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided.  Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable.
            Common trip-type multiple breakers with a single operating handle shall be provided. Breaker design
            shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.  Phase sequences
            should  be maintained throughout each panel so that any adjacent breaker poles are connected to phases
            A, B, and C, respectively. Circuit breakers should be provided with ground fault interrupter as required
            by the NEC and in conformance with UL 1053.  In addition,  ground-fault circuit interrupter circuit
            breakers should be provided with a push-to-test button, visible indication of tripped condition, and an
            ability to detect a current imbalance of approximately 5 milliamperes.

16.4.5.3     SHUNT TRIP BREAKERS
            Shunt trip main breakers shall be provided in panelboards to  remove power to laboratory modules upon
            activation of fire protection systems or devices and emergency power off (EPO) button(s) in the
            immediate lab module.  Shunt trip branch circuit breakers may also be required in order to remove
            power to other specific areas or equipment (e.g., to elevators with equipment room protected by a
            sprinkler system,  computer rooms protected by sprinkler systems). It shall be  the responsibility of the
            design professional to consult with the EPA very early in the electrical design  (such as during the
            conceptual design phase) to enable the EPA to indicate and designate where shunt trip breakers are
            required in each specific facility that is being designed. Note: The activation of a fire sprinkler head in
            an individual laboratory module is required to shutdown the power to that laboratory module.  This
            power shutdown may be accomplished through the use of shunt trip breakers in the power panels.

16.4.5.4     LABORATORY MODULE
            Each laboratory module shall be provided with a separate 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
            panelboard. The  branch circuit system shall be  as flexible as possible to accommodate any type of
            laboratory alteration.  In addition, each laboratory module shall be provided with  emergency power
            from an emergency power panelboard; the emergency power panelboard may serve more than one
            module. The panelboard should be rated for nonlinear loads. Each lab module shall be provided with
            UPS power from  a UPS power panelboard. The UPS power panelboard may serve more than one lab
            module.

16.4.5.4.1        EMERGENCY POWER OFF (EPO) BUTTON
                 Each laboratory module and computer rooms protected by sprinkler systems shall have an EPO
                 button by each main exit into the corridor.  Activation of the EPO button shall shut down the
                 power to the  normal power panelboard for the laboratory module. The EPO button shall
                 simultaneously shut down the power of each emergency circuit into the lab module  and each UPS
                 circuit into the  lab module.  The EPO button should activate the appropriate circuits via shunt trip
                 breakers in the  normal, emergency, and UPS power panels.  The design professional should
                 confirm with EPA early in the design if any HVAC components or equipment are required to be
                 shutdown or required to provide a reduced air flow in the lab module when an EPO button is
                 activated

16.4.6  MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS
        Motor controllers and starters shall be provided for all motors and equipment containing motors. All
        controllers shall have  thermal-overload protection in each phase.  Solid-state motor controllers shall have
        undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have
        undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches.

        When used  with a pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, the controller
        shall have a hand-off-automatic selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        the normal automatic regulatory-control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position.
        All safety control devices, such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-
        overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic"
        positions.  Control circuit connections to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one
        automatic regulatory-control device shall be made in accordance with a manufacturer-approved wiring
        diagram.  The selector switch shall be capable of locking in any position.

        For each motor that is not in sight  of the controller, either the controlled disconnecting means shall be
        capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated,  nonfused switch that will disconnect
        the motor from the source of supply shall be placed within sight of the motor location.

        Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings, shall be of the thermal
        inverse-time-limit type, and shall include a manual-reset pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller
        case. The cover of a combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked
        with the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker so that the cover cannot be opened unless the
        handle of the switch or circuit breaker is in the off position.  Variable-frequency drive units shall be
        considered for larger HVAC equipment loads, and for other motor loads as feasible. See Section 15,
        Mechanical Requirements,  of this Manual for equipment to be used with variable-speed drives.

16.4.6.1      CONTROL EQUIPMENT
             Control equipment shall comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
             Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) standards, NFPA 70  (NEC), and with UL 508.  Single-phase
             motors may be controlled directly by automatic control devices of adequate rating.  Automatically
             controlled polyphase motors and all polyphase motors rated greater than 1 horsepower (hp)  shall have
             magnetic starters.  Control devices shall be of adequate voltage and shall have an adequate current
             rating for the duty to be performed. Pilot control circuits shall operate with one side grounded and at
             no greater than 120 volts. Where control power transformers are required, they shall be located inside
             the associated motor starter housing, shall be protected against faults and overload by properly sized
             overcurrent devices, and shall be of sufficient capacity to serve all devices connected to them without
             overload.  Reduced-voltage starters or variable frequency drives  (VFDs) shall be provided for larger
             motors to avoid an unacceptable voltage dip when the motors are started.  As  a minimum, reduced
             voltage starters shall be required when the locked rotor current of motors exceeds the full-load of
             supply transformers or supply conductors.

16.4.6.2      SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES
             Safety disconnect switches shall be provided for all hard-wired electrically operated equipment and
             motors in locations where they are required by code. Switches shall meet the  requirements of NEMA
             Type HD.  Enclosure shall be NEMA 1  for indoor use and NEMA 3R for exterior use. All safety
             switches shall be horsepower rated. The switches shall be of the quick-make quick-break type, and all
             parts shall be mounted on insulating base to permit replacement of any part from the front of the switch.
             All current-carrying parts shall be of higher rated load without excessive heating. Contacts shall be
             plated to prevent corrosion and oxidation and to ensure suitable conductivity.

16.4.6.2.1        GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
                 With the exception of emergency systems, systems carrying  150 volts or greater to ground and not
                 exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase shall be provided with ground fault protection for each
                 service-disconnecting means rated 1,000 amperes or more. Necessary precautions shall, however,
                 be taken to minimize the possibility of nuisance tripping. In addition, all buses or other conductors
                 at motor control centers, switchgear, switchboards,  and busways shall be  insulated or isolated.  The
                 facility may have special requirements with respect to ground fault protection on the main
                 switchboard (such as two levels of ground fault). Very early in the design phase (such as during
                 the conceptual design submittal phase), it shall be the responsibility of the design professional to


                                                    16-9

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                 consult with EPA concerning any special requirements above those required by the NEC.  All
                 special ground fault requirements above those required by the NEC shall be incorporated into the
                 facility design.

16.4.6.2.2        GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL
                 At a minimum, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection shall be provided for all  125-volt,
                 single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles located outdoors; elevator electrical systems; as
                 required by NEC Article 620, the Safety Manual, and the National Research Council's Prudent
                 Practices', and receptacles installed on roofs. GFCI protection shall also be required in the
                 following circumstances:

                 •        In  any location where EPA personnel are operating electrical equipment in direct contact
                         with water or other liquids or where electrical receptacles are installed within 6 feet of a
                         sink provided with a plumbed water supply or a drain, tub, or other water source.

                 •        If GFCI protection is prescribed for electrical equipment by the equipment's
                         manufacturer.

                 •        If previous experience indicates a need for GFCI protection.

                 This protection shall be provided in new and existing construction by means of interrupter devices
                 incorporated in receptacles or circuit breakers. These GFCI receptacles maybe terminating type
                 or feed-through type,  whichever will satisfy the need.  GFCI receptacles  shall be color coded or
                 shall otherwise indicate GFCI protection.  Scheduled testing of the GFCI is required in accordance
                 with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than semiannually. Upon completion of the
                 initial installation, the electrical ground system shall be checked or verified for continuity with the
                 conduit system, the equipment housing, and the final connection to the receptacle grounding stud.
                 In aquatic laboratories and other required  areas, not only will the GFCI-protective  device be
                 installed in  the receptacle, but also the receptacles will be connected to the grounded system.

16.4.6.2.3        REMOVAL OF GFCI CIRCUITS
                 Existing circuits with GFCI protection shall remain unless persistent problems are  encountered or
                 unless renovations occur that would alter the  use so that GFCI protection is not necessary. An
                 example of such a renovation would be converting an aquatic laboratory to office space.

16.4.6.3     MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
            Where several motors (all of larger-than-fractional horsepower) are located in one room or space, a
            motor control center should be used. Busing in the control center should be arranged so that the center
            can be expanded from both ends. Bus shall be of silver-plated copper. Interconnecting wires shall be
            copper.Terminal blocks should be of the plug-in type so that controllers may be removed without
            disconnecting individual control wiring.

16.4.7  GROUNDING
        The grounding  system must meet the requirements  of the NFPA 70 and IEEE 142. All electrical outlets and
        non-current carrying metal parts of permanently connected electrical equipment shall be permanently
        connected to ground. All EPA facilities will be provided with two different equipment grounding systems:
        the general facility grounding system that is connected to the building structure and other systems, and an
        isolated grounding system to provide equipment grounding to the laboratory and critical computer
        equipment. Raceway systems  shall not be  accepted as the only grounding path. The isolated grounding
        conductors shall be green and the general facility ground conductor shall be gray.
                                                   16-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.4.7.1     LABORATORY BUILDING MODULE GROUNDING
            All laboratory building modules shall be connected to the isolated grounding system described in
            paragraph 16.4.8. The isolated grounding system shall consist of a bare earth copper ground grid or
            field, direct buried outside to provide an isolated ground for instrumentation. This ground system
            (critical computer equipment in areas of the facility other than in the laboratory modules are also
            connected to this isolated grounding system) shall be clearly identified and protected against improper
            usage.  All building ground systems shall be tied together as required by NEC Article 250.

16.4.7.2     GROUND BUS
            Every panelboard and switchboard in the facility shall be provided with a ground bus.

16.4.8  LABORATORY POWER REQUIREMENTS
        Specific and generic electrical requirements are indicated for most spaces in the room data sheets generated
        during the pre-design process. In the design of a new facility, however, these requirements must be
        reviewed, verified, and tested with the appropriate EPA representatives and must gain approval from EPA.
        This reviewing, verification, and testing should occur during the program verification and design phase of
        the project.

        Duplex convenience outlets shall be laboratory standard grade, 20 amps, 120 volts in surface metal
        raceways, as defined below. These outlets should be provided in addition to specific electrical outlets and
        receptacles called for or shown in the respective room data sheets, and in addition to outlets needed  to feed
        the equipment used in each room.  These convenience outlets shall be located either on the reagent shelf or,
        if no reagent shelf is required, 8 inches above countertop level when base cabinets are used, and  44 inches
        above floor level in other locations. The maximum spacing between convenience outlets shall be 3 feet. In
        addition, the following requirements apply:

        •   Peninsulas. Provide a quadruplex receptacle outlet every 3 feet over the peninsula on overhead carriers
            (these carriers also support the various gas lines that terminate at the peninsulas). No pedestal
            receptacle outlets shall be installed. The receptacles on the overhead carriers shall be installed in
            surface metal raceway mounted to the overhead carriers.

        •   Equipment Outlet Location. Electrical outlet location shall be near the equipment to be powered; the
            exact location of equipment and outlets shall be determined by the Government during early design
            stage.

        •   All 120-volt general convenience receptacles  shall be rated a minimum of 20 amperes and shall be
            grounding type (NEMA 5-20R) and specification grade.

        •   120-volt circuits shall have a minimum rating of 20 amperes.

        •   A maximum of four general convenience receptacles shall be connected to a circuit.

        •   Equipment such as refrigerators, freezers,  and centrifuges shall each have individual dedicated circuits.

        •   Receptacles located within 6 feet of a sink (or other water sources) shall be GFCI type.

        •   All branch circuits or panelboard feeder conduit runs shall be  provided with separate equipment
            grounding conductors sized per NEC Table 250.122.

        •   Each laboratory shall be provided with separate, dedicated 120/20 8-volt, three-phase, four-wire
            panelboards; panelboards shall be spaced at a maximum spacing of one panelboard every two modules.
                                                   16-11

-------
July 2004
                                    Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            Additional panelboards shall be provided as required by electrical usage or as directed by the EPA
            project officer.


        •   Each laboratory panelboard shall be provided with a separate ground bus.


        •   Receptacles that are located above wall, peninsula, or island benches and at equipment spaces shall be
            in surface metal raceways wherever possible.  Raceways shall be single compartment or double
            compartment  (for both power and telecommunications/data) as directed by the EPA project officer.


        •   In accordance with NEMA 14-30R, 30-ampere, 125/250-volt single-phase receptacles will be provided
            for 30-ampere, 208-volt single-phase equipment.


        •   One receptacle on a dedicated 20-ampere, 120-volt emergency power circuit shall be provided in each
            laboratory. Emergency power shall also be provided for special equipment requiring such power.


        •   UPS systems  within the computer/data-processing rooms and laboratories and their supply and output
            circuits shall comply with NEC Article 645.10.  The disconnecting means shall also disconnect the
            battery from its load.


16.5   Interior Lighting  System


16.5.1   ILLUMINANCE LEVELS
        The minimum acceptable levels of maintained general overhead illuminance shall be as indicated in Table
        16.5.1, Illuminance Levels, for the particular areas. The  maximum illuminance level shall be  no greater
        than 115% of the minimum level of the table. Illuminance levels shall manifest an energy conserving
        design that indicates coherence to EPA energy conserving initiatives. For areas not listed in Table 16.5.1,
        the recommendations of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IBS) handbooks shall be followed. The
        lighting illuminance on the work surface or at the prescribed height above finished floor (AFF) is to be the
        area with the highest illuminance level within the lab module or office space.


Table 16.5.1  Illuminance Levels
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
General office space - ambient and task          50
Animal room                                  70
Autopsy                                      100
Boiler room                                   20
Corridors                                      10
Emergency lighting (general, at floor level)         3
Emergency lighting in laboratory blocks, at floor
  level                                         5
Examination                                  100
Laboratory module at work surface 36 inches
  AFF (dual switching)                      50/100
Loading dock                                 20
Lobby                                         20
Locker rooms                                 20
Shops (dual switching)                     50/100
General office and record rooms - ambient
and task                                      50
                        Parking, driveway, and walkways
                        Stairways
                        Storage
                          Inactive
                          Rough bulky
                          Medium
                          Fine
                        Telephone equipment room
                        Toilets
                        Exterior entrances
                        Desk level (task lighting)
                        Utility rooms
                        X-ray
                        Parking decks
                                             1-3
                                              20

                                               5
                                              10
                                              20
                                              50
                                              70
                                              30
                                               5
                                          50-100
                                              20
                                              10
                                               5
Library-conference rooms (dual switching)    50/100
Note: These values represent general illumination 30 inches above the floor unless indicated otherwise.
                                                  16-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.5.2  LIGHTING CONTROLS
        Switches shall be provided to control lighting in all areas.  Provide at least one switch for room lighting at
        54 inches above the finished floor at each door that provides hallway egress and the controls described
        below.  Large rooms (more than 200 square feet) shall have multiple switching to reduce the lighting level
        by approximately half.

16.5.2.1      DAYLIGHT-LEVEL SENSORY CONTROLS
             In building areas (except laboratories) that are larger than 200 square feet and that will have a large
             contribution of natural daylight, daylight-level sensory controls shall be used to control lighting levels.

16.5.2.2      BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
             In buildings with building automation systems (BAS), the B AS (in addition to light switches) shall
             control overall building lighting. Each floor shall be a separate control zone with appropriate
             subzoning of each floor for special functions.

16.5.2.3      OCCUPANCY SENSORS
             Occupancy sensors shall be provided (in addition to switches) to control lighting in offices and smaller
             rooms, bath and locker areas, conference rooms, storage rooms, and mechanical rooms. For offices,
             conference rooms and other non-support rooms, the occupancy sensors shall be manual on/automatic
             off type.

16.5.3  LAMPS AND BALLASTS
        Electrical discharge lamps and high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps should be the primary lamps
        considered in the selection of the illumination concept. The lighting system shall use, to the maximum
        extent feasible, energy-efficient fixtures with electronic high-frequency ballasts, T-5 and T-8 fluorescent
        lamps, and high-quality light reflectors and lenses. The use of filament light sources should be kept to an
        absolute minimum (i.e., only in spaces that do not have a need for high levels  of illuminance, that are
        normally occupied only for short durations, and for which  discharge lamps are not suitable).  Where
        fluorescent lamps will be utilized, these lamps shall be of the  T-5 or T-8 type to conserve energy.

16.5.3.1      INDOOR HID LIGHTING
             In using HID lighting indoors, the required color rendition shall be carefully considered from both
             visual and health safety perspectives.

16.5.3.2      BALLASTS
             All ballasts to be used in EPA facilities shall be of the energy-saving type (electronic high-frequency
             ballasts shall be used in all possible locations).

16.5.3.3      LIGHT FIXTURE SELECTION
             The selection of light fixtures should involve careful consideration of the quality of construction, ease
             of maintenance, ease of relamping, efficiency, illumination characteristics, mounting technique, and
             special purpose characteristics (e.g., vapor-proof, explosion-proof, elimination of radio frequency
             interferences).  For office areas and laboratories,  pendant lighting with direct/indirect light is
             recommended.

16.5.4  EMERGENCY LIGHTING (GENERATORS AND BATTERY UNITS)
        An emergency lighting system shall be provided in accordance with NEC Article 700 and arranged to
        provide a minimum of 3 footcandles of illumination (measured at floor level) throughout the path of egress,
        including exit access routes, exit  stairways, and other routes, such as exit passageways to the outside of the
                                                    16-13

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        building.  The emergency lighting system in laboratory modules shall provide a minimum of 5 footcandles
        of illumination.

        •   Laboratories and large open areas such as cafeterias; assembly areas; large mechanical, electrical, and
            storage rooms; and open-plan office spaces where exit access is normally through the major portion of
            the areas shall be provided with emergency lighting.  In addition, emergency lighting systems shall be
            provided in computer rooms and in any location where chemicals are stored, handled, or used.

        •   The emergency lighting in laboratory rooms should provide at least 5 footcandles of illumination,
            measured at the exit access door.

        •   The type of system used shall be such that it will operate in the event of any failure of a public utility or
            internal disruption of the normal power distribution system in a building.

        •   Buildings seven stories high  or less may be powered from two separate substations which are served by
            two different primary lines not  constructed in the same right of way or path.  This dual feeder
            arrangement can be used instead of having to install an emergency  generator, but the transfer to feed
            the building from one substation to the other must be automatic and within the maximum time lapse
            required by the life safety code and the facility operation needs.

        •   Egress  lighting in offices/lab areas should be connected to the fire alarm system, where permitted by
            code, so that these lights do not remain on 24 hours/day.

        •   The emergency lighting shall be connected to a generator, when a generator is provided. In buildings
            where there is no emergency generator, battery backup shall be provided for egress and emergency
            lighting. This battery backup may be by unit-type battery fixtures,  battery packs in fluorescent fixtures,
            or use of inverters.  Where HID lamps are used (and connected to a generator), a standby lighting
            system  shall be provided to meet emergency lighting requirements  during HID  lamp restrike  periods.

16.5.5  ENERGY CONSERVATION
        EPA seeks to minimize energy use dedicated to electric lighting and the resulting cooling loads through
        proper use of natural lighting in the facility.  In effect, it seeks  a well-integrated lighting system for its new
        buildings that makes optimum use of both natural and artificial lighting sources and balances the buildings'
        heating and cooling needs. A  lighting-power budget shall be determined, in conformance with ASHRAE
        90, and strictly adhered to in the design  of the lighting and cooling load for each facility.  This budget may
        be exceeded in laboratory areas and in shops where a higher level of illumination is required because of the
        type of work being performed. All  design of lighting for EPA facilities shall be in accordance with the EPA
        Energy Star Program.

16.5.6  GLARE
        The selection of the type of diffuser and lens to be used on the lighting  fixtures shall take into account the
        glare that  can be produced on  the work surface. All lighting design shall minimize the effects of glare on
        the task surface. Indirect lighting shall be used wherever possible. Additionally, fixtures  should be located
        to keep glare to a minimum. In locating lighting fixtures, consideration must be given to the fact  that many
        of the surfaces in the facility (especially in laboratory areas) have highly reflective materials at the task
        location.

16.5.7  AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING AREAS
        Lighting fixture types, location, and illumination levels shall be coordinated with the equipment and
        functions  of the telecommunications, alarm,  and automatic data processing (ADP) centers to provide the
        required illumination without:
                                                    16-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        •   Interfering with prompt identification of self-illuminated indicating devices
        •   Creating reflecting glare that might detract from adequate observations of essential equipment
        •   Creating electrical or electromagnetic interference detrimental to proper operation of equipment.
16.6   Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
        Lighting fixtures shall comply with the NEC and the following criteria.

16.6.1   MOUNTING
        All lamps shall be mounted in a way that prevents direct contact between the lamp and any combustible
        material. Wherever accidental contact is remotely possible, the lamp shall be protected by a guard, globe,
        reflector, fixture, or other protective means (NEC Article 410).

16.6.2   FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
        All fluorescent fixtures installed indoors shall be provided with ballasts that have integral thermal overload
        protection (NEC Article 410).

16.6.3   LIGHT DIFFUSERS
        Light diffusers shall be either of noncombustible material or of a design or material that will drop from the
        fixture before  ignition.  Where combustible dropout-type fixtures are used, plastic material shall not
        constitute more than 30 percent of the total ceiling area. Where luminous or diffuser ceilings are used,
        these restrictions also apply.

16.6.4   LOCATION
        Lighting in locations where dangerous gases, liquids, dusts, or fibers may exist shall meet the requirements
        of NEC Article 500.
16.7   Exterior Lighting Systems

16.7.1   GENERAL
        Exterior lighting systems shall comply with the IBS Lighting Handbook. System controls shall use a time
        clock and/or photocell to provide illumination only when needed.  In buildings with a building automation
        system (BAS), exterior lighting circuits shall be switched by photocells and the BSA system, which shall be
        able to override the photocell switch on request.

16.7.1.1     EXTERIOR LIGHT GLARE
            Light glare shall be kept to a minimum in situations where it would impede effective operations of
            protective force personnel; interfere with rail, highway, or navigable water traffic; or be objectionable
            to occupants of adjacent properties. Uplighting should be minimized.

16.7.1.2     HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
            Maximum use shall be made of HID lamps such as metal halide or high-pressure sodium vapor lamps.

16.7.2   PARKING LOT LIGHTING
        Lighting over driveways and parking areas shall consist of a complete  HID lighting system, including
        control equipment, underground wiring, luminaries, and all necessary accessories for a complete and
        functioning system. The maintained level of illumination shall be  at least 1 to 3 footcandles. Consideration
        shall be given to reducing the amount of light in parking lot areas during times (e.g.,  between 12:00 AM to
        4:30 AM) when it is very unlikely that the lots will be in use.  EPA personnel at the site shall be contacted
        and approval must be obtained from the appropriate EPA facility personnel prior to incorporating this
        lighting feature into the design.

                                                   16-15

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.7.3   BUILDING EXTERIOR LIGHTING
        Appropriate security and accent lighting shall be provided.  All exterior doors and entrance ways shall be
        illuminated for security. Entrance ways shall have a maintained illumination level of at least 3 footcandles.
        Entrance ways with cameras shall have an illumination level as required by the security camera to operate.

16.7.4   TRAFFIC CONTROL LIGHTING
        If the facility is on a site where traffic controls are necessary and will not be provided by the local
        municipality or state transportation authority, a complete traffic control system for the facility shall be
        designed, including all stoplights, directional lights, controls, and wiring, for a complete operating system.

16.7.5   ROADWAY LIGHTING
        All new access roadways, or continuations of loop or access roadways, and driveways shall be lighted.  The
        maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles on vehicular roadways and pedestrian
        walkways. The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots (HID source) shall be used for roadways.

16.7.6   EXTERIOR ELECTRIC SIGNS
        All exterior electric signs and nonelectric signs shall be integrated into the total design of the facility and
        approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR).


16.8   Emergency Power System

16.8.1   GENERAL
        An emergency power system shall be designed and provided for all administrative and laboratory space.
        The system shall provide electric power in the event of loss of normal power and shall provide power for
        emergency and egress lighting.  The system shall also supply power to critical equipment during planned
        outages for maintenance. The emergency power system shall comply with NFPA 37, NFPA 70 (the NEC),
        NFPA 101, NFPA 110, and IEEE 446.

16.8.1.1     BATTERY-TYPE LIGHTING
            In smaller buildings when the emergency power system is installed primarily for egress lighting,
            battery-type lighting units shall be used.

16.8.1.2     EMERGENCY POWER
            In facilities where the emergency power needs are larger than can be handled by battery packs, an
            emergency power source shall be supplied.  Normally,  the emergency power source will be a generator;
            however, other power sources should be considered by the design professional whenever they appear to
            be feasible, can be justified for approval by EPA, are allowed by the applicable code(s) (e.g., NFPA
            101  and NFPA 110), and are acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction.  Alternate sources
            that might be considered, but not necessarily be limited to, fuel cells, micro turbines, turbines,
            photovoltaic (solar), wind, and biomass. The design professional shall justify the use of emergency
            power sources other a than generator by submission of design justification documents to EPA for
            approval.  These justification documents shall include a complete life cycle cost analysis indicating a
            payback period acceptable to EPA, a narrative pertaining to the reliability of the current technology of
            the source, a narrative of the availability and applicability of the particular source to the specific facility
            and environment, a discussion of environmental impact considerations, and any other pertinent
            information relating to the alternative source that may be necessary for EPA to determine if the
            alternative source is acceptable for the specific project.

            When it is not feasible to consider other sources for a specific project or when other sources prove to
            be unacceptable, a diesel engine-driven generator shall be provided to serve as the emergency source of
            power.  If the loads and the availability of natural gas allow, a natural gas generator shall be


                                                   16-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

             considered. Any emergency power system provided shall be equipped with phase-synchronized
             automatic transfer switch or switches and with necessary controls for automatic operation.  All
             automatic transfer switches shall be of the isolation/bypass type. The generator(s) (or alternate
             emergency power source) shall transfer and pick up the critical load(s) within 10 seconds.  The system
             shall be able to carry a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours.  The generator exhaust and fuel
             pipe vents shall be arranged and located away from fresh-air intakes. The generator exhaust shall be
             located where maximum dilution can be accomplished. The generator  shall be water cooled. The
             emergency power source shall be designed to handle nonlinear loads.

16.8.1.2.1        EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENTS
                 Table 16.8.1, Emergency Power Requirements, outlines the emergency power requirements for
                 different building heights and particular fire safety systems. Generators are not required by these
                 criteria unless an analysis of the cost of installation and maintenance of acceptable emergency
                 power sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power source or as required by
                 applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction (however, a generator may be required by EPA
                 regardless of the outcome of this analysis).  Automatic  switching schemes shall be provided for all
                 emergency power sources.  Where emergency generators are used, their installation shall be in
                 accordance with NFPA 110 and NEC Article 700.

 Table 16.8.1  Emergency Power Requirements
Acceptable Sources of Emergency Power*
Emergency System
Emergency lighting (1% hours)
Exit lighting (1% hours)
Fire alarm
Fire pump
Jockey pump
Elevator
Smoke control
Sprinkler system air compressor
Special extinguishing system power supply (dry chemical,
CO2, or other EPA-approved system)
Fume hoods (full or partial containment or where deemed
necessary)
Building Height f
75 Feet or Less
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,3
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
—
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
Building Height f
Over 75 Feet
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,2
1,2
1,2*
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
 Note:  1 = Generator; 2 = Connection either to two separate primary sources or to a utility network system; 3 = Battery with charger;
 N.R. = Not Required.

 * Power source must be capable of providing power to one elevator on a selective basis when the building contains six or fewer elevators.
   Otherwise, two elevators must be supplied on a selective basis.
 1 The building height for application of the criteria shall be determined by measurement of the distance from grade level of the lowest
   accessible floor to ceiling height of the highest occupied floor in the building. Mechanical rooms and penthouse are not considered occupied
   floors in this case.
16.8.1.3     EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION
             The preferable location for the generator is outdoors.  However, whatever the final approved location
             of the generator might be, the design professional must adhere to the following location parameters:
             locate with exhaust away from fresh air intakes; and locate away from vibration, acoustic, or
             electrically sensitive equipment.  The location should be such that the generator will be hidden from
             view (including screening, as necessary, to appropriately hide the generator) and should be to the rear

                                                     16-17

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            of the main facility when located outdoors (the preferred location). The generator should be placed
            over vibration isolators and should make use of noise dampers and other devices, as required, to
            substantially attenuate noise and vibration resulting from its operation.  The generator exhaust
            requirements must be addressed and incorporated into the design.  The  generator shall be equipped
            with a low-noise exhaust silencer (hospital or critical type) and weatherproof housing (outdoor
            locations).  If the generator is located indoors, the size and shape of the generator room, including
            usable space around the generator, must be considered and resolved during the facility design phase.
            Additionally, fuel supply and location (incorporating code and environmental requirements) must also
            be addressed during the design phase.

16.8.1.4     ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
            For all installations where a generator is provided, an economic analysis shall be done to determine the
            economic feasibility of including load-shedding or peak-shaving equipment as part of the installation.
            EPA will provide instructions on the possible inclusion of this item in the project after the economic
            analysis has been completed. It shall be the  responsibility of the design professional to  specifically
            request these instructions pertaining to the inclusion of this item from EPA after completion of the
            economic analysis.

16.8.1.5     FUEL STORAGE TANK
            If a diesel-type generator is used, the system shall be provided with a fuel storage tank that is capable
            of carrying a continuous full  load for not less than 24 hours.  The preferred type of tank is an
            aboveground storage tank.  If allowed by EPA, the tank may be installed underground.  If so, the tank
            shall be of double-wall construction and of noncorrosive material with  interstitial monitoring
            capabilities. The tank shall meet the most current promulgated rules  effective on the date of
            installation. The design professional shall justify in writing the need  or lack of need, whichever may be
            the case, for a cathodic protection system for the site and type  of construction and equipment specified.
            This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission.

16.8.2  EMERGENCY LOADS
        In addition to the loads required by NFPA 101, NEC, and the room data sheets, the following loads shall be
        connected to  the emergency power system:

        •   Fire alarm system
        •   Exit lights
        •   Emergency lighting system—3  footcandles minimum for egress; 10 footcandles at switchboards
        •   Critical operations laboratory equipment
        •   Telephone relay system
        •   Certain HVAC systems (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
        •   Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls
        •   All animal care facilities
        •   Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms
        •   Paging system
        •   Selected elevators (as required by the applicable state and local codes  and as directed by EPA)
        •   Gas chromatograph
        •   Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by EPA)
        •   Incubators
        •   X-ray fluorescent analyzer
            UPS system
        •   Air-conditioning system associated with computer rooms,  UPS room, and environmental rooms
        •   Security systems
        •   Safety alarm systems.
                                                    16-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.8.3  UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
        A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power. The application of UPS
        systems shall comply with IEEE 446.  The design professional shall make a recommendation concerning the
        appropriate type of system for a particular facility (i.e., rotary or stationary [static] type). UPS equipment
        shall be capable of supplying power through multiple means-(normal, static switch bypass, and total system
        bypass). The UPS system shall be sized to provide at least 5 minutes of protection upon loss of normal
        power. The UPS system shall be rated for "multi-range" input voltage and shall provide a sinusoidal or, as
        a minimum, a quasi-sinusoidal power output wave form. Total system bypass power shall include an
        isolation transformer. All components shall be UL listed.  The supplied UPS system shall be specified to
        operate properly with an emergency generator.

16.8.3.1      MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
             The UPS system shall operate continuously and in conjunction with the existing building electrical
             system to provide precise power for critical equipment loads. The  static system shall consist of a solid-
             state inverter, a rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch, synchronizing
             circuitry, and an internal maintenance bypass switch.  The rotary system shall include a  solid-state
             inverter, a battery charger, a storage battery, an automatic transfer assembly, an  internal (automatic)
             bypass switch, and a low-voltage transient synchronous generator with flywheel. The UPS system,
             along with the  supporting equipment, shall be housed in dedicated room(s) under controlled
             environmental conditions that meet the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.

16.8.3.2      CODES, STANDARDS, AND DOCUMENTS
             The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following:

                 NFPA
                 NEMA
             •    IEEE inverter standards
                 ASA
             •    American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                 National Electrical Code (NEC)
             •    Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
             •    Local codes.

16.8.3.3      ON-LINE REVERSE  TRANSFER SYSTEM
             The UPS shall be designed to  operate as an on-line-reverse transfer system in the following modes:

             •    Normal  (Static).  The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The
                 rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and it
                 shall in turn supply direct current (DC) power to the inverter while simultaneously  float-charging
                 the battery.

             •    Normal (Rotary).  The critical load shall receive power from the motor-generator set which is
                 supplied power from the utility company. While  the motor-generator supplies power to the critical
                 load, it simultaneously charges the batteries.

             •    Emergency (Static).  Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied
                 by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains its power from the storage battery.  There
                 shall be  no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.

             •    Emergency (Rotary). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the control logic shall turn on
                 the inverter which is supplied power from the battery. The inverter then supplies AC power to the
                                                    16-19

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                 motor-generator set which subsequently supplies power to the critical load. The inverter shall be
                 capable of full-power operation within 50 milliseconds after loss of utility power.

             •    Recharge. Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to complete discharge of the battery),
                 the rectifier/battery charger powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery.  This
                 shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.

             •    Bypass mode.  If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal
                 failures, the static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the utility alternating
                 current (AC) source without interruption. Automatic transfer of the load shall be accomplished
                 after the UPS inverter output synchronizes to the utility alternating current (AC) source (or the
                 bypass input source).  Once the sources are synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall
                 transfer the load from the bypass input source to the UPS inverter output by paralleling the two
                 sources and then disconnecting the bypass  AC input source. Overlap shall be limited to one-half
                 cycle.

             •    Maintenance bypass/test. Test switching shall be provided to simulate a normal power outage,
                 transfer the load to the source of backup power through the UPS, and switch the load back to the
                 normal power source upon completion of the test.

             •    Downgrade. If only the battery will be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be
                 disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external battery
                 disconnect. The UPS  shall continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage
                 protection and transient characteristics.

16.8.3.4      UPS OUTPUT
             The UPS output shall have the following characteristics:

             •    Frequency:  60 hertz (Hz) nominal +0.5 Hz (when synchronized to the bypass AC input source).

             •    Output voltage transient characteristics for:

                     25 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ฑ4 percent
                     50 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ฑ6 percent
                     100 percent voltage fluctuation load step change +10 percent/-8 percent.

             •    Output voltage transient response: The system output voltage shall return to within +1 percent of
                 the steady state value within 30 milliseconds.

             •    Output voltage regulation:  The steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than +1.0
                 percent from no load to full load.

16.8.3.5      OUTPUT FREQUENCY REGULATION
             The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency ฑ0.1 percent when the UPS
             inverter is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line and also when the utility
             alternating current (AC) source is not available (i.e., operation from battery source only).

16.8.3.6      SYSTEM OVERLOAD
             System overload is a load of at least 125 percent of the system rating for a period of 10 minutes, and
             150 percent  current for 1 minute.  Overloads in excess of 170 percent of the UPS rating, on an
             instantaneous basis, or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall cause the static
             bypass transfer switch to reverse-transfer and allow the AC bypass input source to supply the necessary


                                                    16-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

             fault-clearing current.  After approximately 5 seconds, the static bypass transfer switch shall
             automatically forward-transfer, and normal UPS operation shall resume. If the overload still exists
             after the 5-second period, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically reverse-transfer the load
             to the AC bypass input source and the UPS inverter shall turn off. The system  shall require manual
             restart after this sequence.

16.8.3.7      SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
             The overall efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 95 percent with the battery fully charged and the
             inverter supplying full-rated load.

16.8.3.8      LOCATIONS AND LOADS
             The UPS system shall be located in special rooms or in the same room as computer equipment. These
             rooms shall have special HVAC equipment to maintain the proper environmental conditions for the
             UPS system and its batteries both under normal conditions and during a power outage.

                 UPS LOAD
                 The UPS load will consist of the equipment and outlets designated for UPS power connection in
                 the room data sheets.

                 BATTERY ROOM
                 The battery room for the UPS shall be well ventilated so as not to allow an explosive mixture of
                 hydrogen to accumulate.  Refer to Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this manual for the
                 following battery room requirements: minimum air change rate,  make-up air, monitoring,
                 ventilation, emergency eyewash station, emergency shower,  and  all other mechanical requirements
                 for this room. Additionally, these battery rooms shall contain all devices required by the Safety
                 Manual (including mechanical ventilation, an emergency eyewash station, and a fire/smoke
                 sensing device). The ventilation fans shall be connected to the emergency power system so that in
                 the event of normal (utility) power system failure, electrical power to the fans will be maintained.
                 The installation of the UPS system shall be in accordance with NFPA  111. Explosion-proof wiring
                 methods, however, are normally not required in battery rooms. The provision for sufficient
                 diffusion and ventilation of the gases from the battery to prevent the accumulation of an explosive
                 mixture, as required by this paragraph and Section 15 of this manual, is necessary in order to
                 prevent classification of the battery room as a hazardous (classified) location, in accordance with
                 NEC Article 500.  A fire- or smoke-sensing device shall be installed in battery rooms.  Selection of
                 this device should be appropriate to the design of the battery room.

16.9    Lightning Protection  System

16.9.1    MINIMUM SCOPE
         A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as
         for facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials. The requirements and installation criteria for
         lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with  NFPA 780, UL 96A, and the local building code.

16.9.2    ADDITIONAL SCOPE
         For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of
         loss due to lightning.

16.9.3    MASTER LABEL
         For buildings described in subsection 16.9.1 and for facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780),
         equipment,  accessories, and material necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system
         for all building components should be furnished and installed.  The system shall comply with NFPA 780,
                                                    16-21

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        UL 96A, and Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) 175. All cables, lightning rods, and accessories shall be
        copper.  All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.

16.9.3.1     MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
            The installed system shall be unobtrusive, with conductors built during construction (so they are
            concealed).  The system shall also be properly flashed and watertight.  Installation shall be done in
            conformance with shop drawings prepared by the supplier and approved by the EPA.

16.9.3.2     CERTIFICATION DELIVERY
            Before the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
            supervising architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.

16.10 Seismic Requirements

16.10.1 SEISMIC REVIEW
        The design and construction of all new EPA facilities shall comply with those standards and practices that
        are substantially equivalent to, or exceed, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP)
        Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures.

16.11 Automatic Data  Processing  (ADP)  Power Systems

16.11.1 COMPUTER POWER
        All ADP equipment in a centralized ADP room shall be connected to the uninterruptible power supply
        (UPS) power. Utility or emergency input power to the UPS system shall be 480 Volt, 3 phase. Output
        power from the UPS system shall be 208Y/120 Volts. Power distribution units (PDUs) shall have
        208Y/120 volt input and output power.  UPS and PDUs shall have monitoring capabilities with transient
        protection.  PDU shall limit the cable runs to 100 feet from the PDU to the ADP equipment.  The user will
        provide  a list of equipment cable types and plug types. All circuits shall have separate neutrals. All UPS
        units and PDUs shall be connected to a  central monitoring and control system.

16.11.2 NON-UPS/PDU OUTLETS
        Non-UPS/PDU outlets shall be spaced every 20 feet around the computer room for utility use (vacuums,
        drills, etc.).

16.11.3 LIGHTING
        Under-floor lights with cutoff timer(s) shall be installed in computer room(s). Room lighting for  computer
        rooms shall be either indirect lighting, to reduce glare on terminal screens,  or overhead lighting of the
        parabolic type, to reduce eye strain.

16.11.4 GROUNDING
        All computer power shall be grounded to the isolated grounding system described in paragraph 16.4.8 of
        this section. This isolated grounding system can only be connected to the general facility power grounding
        system at the main building service entrance grounding electrode or at the isolation transformer/equipment
        grounding on a separately derived system. A grounding mat may be locally provided to the computer room
        to connect the non current carrying metal parts of the  critical equipment, but this mat must be electrically
        isolated from the general facility grounding system in order to meet the NEC.

16.12 Cathodic Protection

16.12.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
        An investigation  shall be conducted and a determination made, on whether cathodic protection is required
        for buried utilities.  The design professional  shall justify in writing the need or lack of need, whichever may

                                                  16-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        be the case, of a cathodic protection system for the type of construction and equipment specified for each
        specific buried utility. This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission. For additional
        information on corrosion control requirements for underground fuel storage tanks, see paragraph entitled
        "Fuel Storage Tank" of this section. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be
        recommended to satisfy the local conditions.  The cathodic protection system shall be designed by a
        professional who is certified by NACE International as a Cathodic Protection Specialist or Corrosion
        Specialist or who is a registered professional corrosion engineer. Additionally, the design professional must
        have a minimum of 3 years experience in similar installations.  The cathodic protection design, as a
        minimum, shall be in compliance with the applicable NACE International standard corresponding with the
        type of structure that is to be cathodically protected.  The installed cathodic protection system shall be able
        to provide protective currents to the intended structure meeting the minimum performance criteria as
        defined in NACE International standards.

16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways, Enclosures)

16.13.1 CORROSIVE  ATMOSPHERE
        Special consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (such as
        chemical storage areas, some laboratories, and areas near air exhausts for spaces with corrosive fumes). All
        raceways to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the raceway manufacturer for the
        atmosphere in which they will be installed.

16.13.1.1    EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
            The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels,  switches, breakers) shall have the proper NEMA
            rating for the atmosphere in which the equipment is being installed.

16.13.2 SALTWATER ATMOSPHERE
        Only hot-dipped galvanized steel and  PVC conduit and fittings are acceptable for buildings in salty weather
16.13.3 EXTREME COLD
        Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers, and switch gear installed in weatherproof
        enclosures of the facility that are subject to extremely cold temperatures should be provided with
        supplemental heating within the enclosures.

16.14 Communication Systems

16.14.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA SYSTEMS
        One telephone outlet and one Local Area Network (LAN) computer shall be provided per 125 net usable
        square feet (NUSF) of office space. If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125  NUSF, one
        telephone outlet and one LAN outlet will be required per workstation or single module space. One
        telephone outlet and one Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS) shall be provided per single
        laboratory module space. One LIMS outlet shall be provided per 125 NUSF of laboratory office space.
        The exact location for all communications/data outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early
        design stage.  All telephone and computer outlets shall be provided with PVC or equivalent corrosion-
        resistant cover/face plates; metal covers shall not be used.

16.14.2 VIDEO CONFERENCE ROOMS
        Cabled video teleconference space (CVTS) communication wiring should be limited to 300 unrepeated
        cable runs.  The network interface (service delivery point) to support CVTS rooms will be located in the
        network control facility (NCF); therefore, CVTS room locations must be within 300 cable feet of the NCF
        and have conduit access for 22-gauge shielded solid copper twisted-pair wire. Longer runs may require
                                                  16-23

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        repeaters and require additional expenses, but they must remain within the 1.5-decibel loss specifications of
        the technical advisory manuscript concerning the wiring.

16.14.3 RECORDING SYSTEMS
        In areas where conferences are to be recorded, built-in microphones shall be provided along with a closet
        containing the recording equipment. Wiring shall be installed from the microphone (omnidirectional) to
        recorders  for a complete system.

16.14.4 SATELLITE DISHES
        An area may be required for the installation of satellite dishes that will be used for telecommunications,
        television reception, or data transmission.  If required, an area shall also be designed for location of satellite
        dish head-in equipment (receivers and transmitters). Where use of a satellite dish is required, power shall
        be furnished for all head-in equipment. Cable raceways shall be provided from the satellite dish location to
        the room for the head-in equipment and from the head-in equipment to each outlet served and to the
        controller location for the  dish. All equipment and cable will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.5 TELEVISION BROADCAST SYSTEMS
        In facilities from which a local or national television station will be broadcasting live meetings or press
        conferences, a complete raceway (or cable-tray) system shall be furnished to allow the station to run cables
        from the designated television van parking areas to the conference/press room.  If cable tray is provided, it
        shall be completely accessible throughout its length.

16.14.5.1     WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
             In addition, weatherproof receptacles or disconnect switches (fused) shall be provided at the van
             parking areas to allow each van to receive power from the building.

16.14.6 MICROWAVE COMMUNICATIONS
        Where required, an area shall be designed for the installation of a microwave dish that will be used for
        telecommunications or data transmission. An area shall also be designed for microwave head-in equipment.
        Power shall be furnished for all head-in equipment. Cable raceways shall be provided from the microwave
        dish location to the room for the head-in equipment and, from there, to the room where the controller will
        be located. All equipment and cables will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.7 OTHER
        A complete raceway system shall be furnished for other communication/data systems (systems not otherwise
        mentioned in subsection 16.14).  The raceway  system shall include raceways, outlet and junction boxes,  and
        power connections (direct or receptacle) for all associated equipment to be located in the facility.  Unless
        otherwise directed by EPA, all cabling and equipment for these other systems will be furnished by EPA.
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems

16.15.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
        Fire alarm systems must be installed in accordance with NEC Article 760 and NFPA 72.  Devices that
        activate fire alarm systems and evacuation alarms must be completely separated from other building systems
        such as environmental monitoring systems and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm system
        (e.g., fan shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of the fire alarm
        system must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated  in this subsection. In general,
        auxiliary functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm system
        but by other mechanical or electrical systems.  The main fire alarm system should supervise any auxiliary
        system (e.g., computer room). Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible (and visual,
        if applicable) devices of the auxiliary system in the associated alarm area. The fire protection system shall


                                                    16-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        be in compliance with the most current codes and publications, as listed below (see other sections for
        additional codes and standards):

             Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13
        •    Standpipe and Hose Systems, NFPA 14
             National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
             National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72
        •    Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, NFPA 90A
             Life Safety Code, NFPA 101
             GSA handbook PBS-P100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service
        •    UF AS and ADA  Requirements
        •    Safety Manual, Chapter 2
        •    Local codes.

16.15.1.1     GENERAL  SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
             Pull stations  shall be installed adjacent to  all exit doors and all exit stairs' access doors.  Automatic
             smoke and temperature rise detectors shall be installed as required by all applicable national and local
             codes and as determined by the standard practice.  Activation of a manual station or any of the
             automatic detectors shall set off the fire alarm system throughout the building or the building zone, and
             shall send an alarm signal to the local fire department or a central station service unit. Activation of
             any automatic fire suppression system (sprinkler or chemical) shall set off the fire alarm as described
             for a manual station but will also send a suppression activated signal to the local fire department or a
             central station service unit, as required.  The fire alarm system shall be totally supervised.  All alarm
             initiating devices, all the alarm conditions indicating devices, all fire alarm signal carrying circuits, the
             fire alarm back up battery system, the circuits carrying the fire alarm signal to the local fire station or to
             a central station service unit, all the sprinkler system and/or standpipe system valves and switches
             operational position shall be supervised. The supervisory system alert signal shall be different than a
             fire alarm signal  and shall be transmitted both to the local fire station or central station service unit and
             to the building's  fire alarm control panel.  The buildings shall be divided into fire zones and  the
             elevator lobbies smoke detection system shall have its own zones  with its own identifiable codes or
             labeling system.  Activation of any smoke detector shall send a pre-alarm conditions signal to the local
             fire station or central station service unit and to the building's fire alarm control panel.

16.15.1.2     BASIC REQUIREMENTS
             Unless the most recent edition of NFPA 101 has more stringent requirements, fire alarm systems are
             required, as a minimum, in any office, computer room, library, classroom, meeting room, cafeteria, or
             similar business-type occupancy, if the occupancies have any of these characteristics:

             •    The occupancies are two  or more stories above the level of exit discharge.
             •    The occupancies may have  100 or more occupants, above or below grade.
             •    The occupancies consist of more than 50,000  square feet.
             •    A human voice, gas-powered horn, or other similar nonelectric system cannot efficiently or
                 effectively be used to alert occupants to an emergency.

             Storage occupancies equal to or larger than 100,000 square feet shall have fire alarm systems. All
             other occupancies shall follow the requirements in NFPA 101.

16.15.1.3     MANUAL SYSTEMS INPUT
             Each system  shall provide manual input from manual fire alarm stations, which shall be located in exit
             or public corridors adjacent to each stairway  and to each exit from the building.  Additional stations
             may be provided at any location where there is a special risk or where the travel distance to the nearest
             station exceeds 200 feet.  As a general principle, the station shall be placed so that a person using it will


                                                    16-25

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            be between the fire and the exit. If necessary, emergency telephone systems shall be provided in the
            exit stairs or in another protected location, as indicated for manual fire alarm stations. In addition,
            telephones shall be provided at each elevator lobby, at the ground floor, and on alternate elevator-
            capture floors.

16.15.1.4    AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS INPUT
            Automatic fire detection shall be provided as described below.

            •    A water flow switch shall be provided for each floor or fire area protected by wet-pipe sprinkler
                 systems.  Other types of sprinkler systems will be activated by a pressure switch at the dry or
                 deluge valve only.

            •    Automatic heat or smoke detection shall not be installed in lieu of automatic sprinkler protection
                 unless this decision is otherwise supported through recognized equivalency methodologies (NFPA
                 101 A). Detection shall be provided where a preaction or deluge sprinkler system exists.
                 Automatic sprinkler protection requirements are described in Section 13, Special  Construction, of
                 this Manual.

            •    In accordance with NFPA 72, smoke detectors shall  be provided for essential electronic
                 equipment, air-handling systems, and elevator lobbies and machine rooms. All smoke detectors
                 shall be approved for their intended use and installation. Smoke detectors require periodic
                 maintenance, and arrangements for this should be made at the time of installation to ensure proper
                 operation and to guard against false alarm or unintended discharge.

            •    Heat and smoke detection in air-handling systems shall comply with NFPA 90A.  Detectors, when
                 required, shall be located in the main supply duct downstream of a fan filter and in the return air
                 ducts for each floor or fire area.

            •    When heat and smoke detectors are installed, they shall be designed and installed in accordance
                 with NFPA 72.

            •    Special hazard protection systems shall initiate an alarm. These special systems include, but are
                 not limited to, dry chemical extinguishing systems, elevator recall systems, and computer detection
                 systems.

            •    Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:

                     Operation of generator
                     Operation of fire pump
                     Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump, or extinguishing system
                     Failure of any of the alarm initiating devices or circuits (open, grounding, etc.)
                     Failure of any of the alarm conditions indicating devices or their circuits (open, short,
                     grounded, etc.)
                     Malfunctioning of the fire protection system battery back-up system
                     Failure of any of the signal circuits to equipment that respond to alarm initiating devices (e.g.,
                     signal circuits to elevators, to automatic fire doors, to smoke dampers, to automatic valves of
                     dry sprinkler systems)
                     Failure of one of the circuits/channels that carries the fire alarm signal to the  remote,
                     constantly manned Central Fire Station
                     Loss of air pressure for dry-pipe sprinkler system
                     Loss of a central processing unit (CPU) or of CPU peripheral equipment in a multiplex system
                     Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks, or reservoirs


                                                    16-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                     When control valves in the supply or distribution lines of automatic sprinkler systems, fire
                     pumps, standpipe systems, or interior building fire main systems are closed either a maximum
                     of two complete turns of a valve wheel or 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less.
                     (In this case, the signal will be transmitted by tamper switches.)

16.15.1.5     AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS OUTPUT
             The signal to all alarm condition indicating devices, the Central Fire Station, and all equipment, fire
             doors, etc., that respond to a fire alarm shall be transmitted automatically once a fire alarm station or a
             detector is activated. In no case shall these alarms depend on manual action. Various outputs include
             those listed below.

             •    Elevator control smoke detector actuation shall  sound an alarm at the fire alarm panel, recall
                 elevators, and notify the fire department but shall not initiate an audible alarm signal to building
                 occupants or start any smoke control system, except as noted below.  The smoke  detector alarm
                 signal shall be received at a central station or  some other location that is constantly attended.  This
                 will ensure an investigative response to the alarm.

             •    General area smoke detectors shall initiate an evacuation alarm for the portion of the building or
                 area in which they are used to increase the level of protection. In such situations, smoke detectors
                 and fire alarm panels equipped to provide alarm verification maybe desirable.

             •    All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous.  Where public address systems are provided for
                 the facility, there shall  be provisions for making announcements from the main fire alarm panel or
                 from an attended location where the fire alarm signal is received. The public address system  does
                 not have to be an integral part  of the fire alarm system.  Coded alarm signals are unacceptable.

             •    The output of special extinguishing  systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include the
                 actuation of the building fire alarm system.  Special detection systems shall indicate a supervisory
                 signal at the fire alarm  panel.

             •    If an entire building can be evacuated within 5 minutes, the fire alarm shall sound either
                 throughout the building or on selected floors.  Where selective evacuation is used on the basis of
                 local code requirements, features such as smoke control and automatic sprinklers shall be
                 provided, as necessary, to ensure the safety of occupants remaining in the building.

             •    For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below,  and  the
                 floor above are expected to relocate or evacuate. These occupants must automatically receive that
                 message and be notified of the emergency.  Where automatic prerecorded voices  are used,  message
                 arrangement and content shall  be designed to  fit the needs of the individual building (e.g., bilingual
                 messages where appropriate).

             •    The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in
                 accordance with NFPA 72 and Title III standards of ADA and UFAS, as applicable.

             •    Every alarm reported on a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the
                 following:

                     A transmitter listed by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective
                     signaling system conforming to NFPA 72.  The central-station facility shall be listed by UL;
                     automatic telephone dialers shall not be used.
                                                    16-27

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                             Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                     An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local fire
                     department, in accordance with NFPA 72.

                     A direct supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a
                     constantly manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.

                     As a last resort, an alternate method approved by SHEMD.

                 Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 seconds after the initiation of an
                 alarm. The specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel after
                 they arrive.

                 A supervisory condition shall transmit a separate signal to a central station, different from an alarm
                 signal.  No more than one supervisory signal shall be provided for an entire building.  Refer  to the
                 automatic systems input information in subsection  16.15.1.3 above for required supervisory
                 conditions.

                 Additional automatic actions shall be  performed for smoke control, elevator capture, and door
                 closings. Smoke control and elevator capture shall be coordinated with the evacuation plan for a
                 building. (A summary of system actions is shown in Table 1 6.15.1.)
Table 16.15.1 Status Condition
Input Device
Output Function
Transmit signal to fire department
Indicate location of device on control panel and annunciator
Cause audible signal at control panel
Initiate emergency operation of elevators
Initiate smoke control sequence
Result in a record on system printer
Cause audible alarm signal throughout building
(voice or nonvoice)
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

B
X
X
X
X*

X


c
X
X
X


X


D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

E
X
X
X


X


F

X
X





 A = Manual fire alarm station
 B = Smoke detectors (other than duct)
 C = Duct smoke detectors
D = Water flow detectors and automatic extinguishing systems
E = Supervisory device
F = Emergency telephone
 Note: Only smoke detectors associated with the elevators (e.g., the elevator lobby) must initiate elevator emergency operation.
16.15.1.6    MANUAL SYSTEMS OUTPUT
             Any action that can be performed automatically must be able to be initiated manually from the control
             center or fire alarm system control panel. A smoke control panel shall be provided when smoke control
             systems are required. The control center, or fire alarm system control panel, shall have the capability
             of canceling and restoring any action that has been initiated automatically or manually.

16.15.1.7    SYSTEMS FEATURES
             All systems shall include the following:

             •    Indication of normal  or abnormal conditions
                                                     16-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

             •    Annunciation of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions by zone
             •    Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone
             •    Ringback feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.

16.15.1.8     HIGH-RISE SYSTEMS FEATURES
             For buildings 12 stories tall or higher, the systems shall also include the following:

             •    Permanent record of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions via printer
             •    Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.

             All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements ofNFPA
             70 (NEC)andNFPA72.

16.15.1.9     RELIABILITY
             The maximum elapsed time from the moment that an alarm is activated to the moment that all alarm
             condition indicating devices and all alarm responding equipment are in operation shall not exceed 10
             seconds.  In accordance with and as defined in NFPA 72, the design professional shall indicate by class
             and style, the initiating device, notification appliance, and signaling line circuits, which shall define the
             circuit's capability to continue to operate during specified fault conditions.  As a minimum, the system
             shall be designed such that any system alarm input device shall be capable of initiating an alarm during
             a single break, or a single ground fault condition, on any system alarm-initiating  circuit.  In addition,
             any signaling line circuit of a multiplex system (other than combination multiplex-point wired systems)
             shall also perform its intended service during a wire-to-wire short or a combination of a single break
             and a single ground of a circuit. The system shall also be designed requiring the provision of a looped
             conduit system such that if the conduit and all conductors within are  severed at any point, all indicating
             device circuits (IDC), notification appliance circuits  (NAC) and signal line circuits (SLC) will remain
             functional.

16.15.1.10   CODE COMPLIANCE,  MANUAL SYSTEM
             A complete, code-complying fire alarm system shall be designed.  For small buildings, and where
             allowed by code, the system may be a manual system only.  The manual system shall include manual
             stations, fire alarm annunciator signals, and an annunciator panel indicating the zone where the alarm
             was initiated. The alarm shall be sent to the local fire station.

16.15.1.11   CODE COMPLIANCE,  AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
             In large facilities, or where required by code, the systems shall be automatic and shall include smoke
             detectors, manual pull stations, rate of rise detectors, alarm bells or horns and strobe lights, sprinklers,
             and a central annunciator panel. Suppression systems shall be tied to the central annunciator panel.
             The fire alarm system shall be tied  to the local fire station in the area. Smoke detectors shall be
             provided in all corridors and designated laboratory modules.

16.15.1.12   CENTRAL, LOCAL, AND PROPRIETARY ALARM SYSTEM
             The building(s)  shall be protected by a central, local, proprietary-type fire alarm system.  Location of
             pull stations, bells, automatic fire detectors, and other equipment pertinent to the fire alarm system shall
             be in accordance with the referenced NFPA and local codes. When there is a difference between the
             NFPA codes and local codes, compliance with the most stringent code will be required.  Visual alarms
             are required throughout the facility for handicapped fire warning.

16.15.1.13   CENTRAL STATION SERVICE
             The building(s)  shall be protected by a local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a UL-listed fire
             department station or a central station service unit meeting the requirements  ofNFPA 72.
                                                    16-29

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.15.1.14   FIRE ZONES
             Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by NFPA and state codes. Graphic
             annunciators shall be provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These
             annunciators shall clearly show the outline of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating
             devices. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each device shall have its own address, which
             shall report to monitoring devices in the English language for clear and quick identification of the
             alarm source).

16.15.1.15   WIRE CLASS AND CIRCUIT SURVIVABILITY
             The fire alarm  system-initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, Style 7, and alarm-indicating
             circuits (visual and audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72).

16.15.1.16   CONTROL CENTER
             Building(s) must have a control  center where fire-related control panels are located. This control
             center must be located next to the main entrance and shall be separated from the rest of the building by
             1-hour fire resistive construction.  Emergency power, room illumination,  room HVAC, telephone, and
             fire protection  systems that operate independently of the effect of a fire anywhere in the building shall
             be provided in the control center.

16.15.1.17   HELD-OPEN FIRE DOORS
             Fire doors that are normally held open by electromagnetic devices should be released by the activation
             of any automatic detection, extinguishing, or manual alarm signaling device.  Additional information on
             door requirements may be  found in Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual.  Maintenance,
             operation, testing, and equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

16.15.1.18   ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
             The fire alarm  system shall be totally supervised. All initiating device circuits (including those for
             smoke detectors), signal line device circuits, and notification appliance circuits must be electrically
             supervised. The system shall monitor all electrically supervised circuits.  A trouble alarm and visual
             indicator shall  activate upon a single break, open, or ground fault condition which prevents the required
             normal operation of the system.  The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (ac)
             supply, loss of stand-by generator power,  low battery voltage, removal of alarm zone module  (card, PC
             board), and disconnection of the circuit used for transmitting alarm signals off-premises.  The system
             shall also provide electrical supervision (capable of detecting any open, short, or ground) for circuits
             used for supervisory signal services (e.g.,  sprinkler systems,  valves).  The fire alarm control panel shall
             provide supervised relays for HVAC shutdown. An override at the HVAC panel shall not be  provided.
             The fire alarm  control panel  shall provide the required monitoring and supervised control outputs
             needed to accomplish elevator recall. All supervisory signals (except for the transmitter disconnect
             switch provided to allow testing and maintenance of the system without activating the transmitter) shall
             be transmitted both to the fire station  or central station service unit and to the building's fire alarm
             control panel.

16.15.1.19   EMERGENCY POWER
             Emergency power shall be provided for the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 101,
             and paragraph  16.8 of this section. If an emergency generator is available at the facility meeting the
             requirements of NFPA 72, then the fire alarm system must be connected to it; otherwise a battery
             backup with charger,  meeting the code requirements specified herein, shall be provided. Emergency
             power must be able to operate the fire alarm system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours and to
             operate all alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes.

16.15.2 SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM
        Requirements for this system are  as follows.


                                                    16-30

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.15.2.1    ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
            A central safety alarm system annunciator panel that will indicate any abnormal condition shall be
            designed for the facility. The annunciator panel shall include all relays, switches, and controls, as
            required for system operation. The basic operation of the panel shall indicate any abnormal condition
            in a function supervised by the annunciator system, causing the associated indication to flash and the
            common audible signal to sound continuously. The audible signal can be silenced at any time by the
            operation of an "acknowledge" push button. The audible signal will automatically sound again with
            any new indication.  The visual signal shall become steady when acknowledged.

16.15.2.2    INDICATING PLATES
            Indicating plates shall be red with filled-in place characters.  All lamps in the annunciator are tested
            simultaneously by pressing the remotely mounted "Lamp Test" push button.  The annunciator shall
            indicate the following systems and equipment statuses:

            •   Fire alarm initiation
            •   HVAC system motors alarms
            •   Emergency generator running
            •   Freezer and cold box temperature alarms
            •   UPS  system failure
            •   Fume hood and bio-safety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow)
            •   Location of activated detection,  extinguishing  or manual alarm device
            •   Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
            •   Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
            •   Acid neutralization system alarms
            •   Power failure
            •   Incubator temperature alarm
            •   Gas alarm
            •   Sensor (gas) alarm
            •   Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm
            •   Additional systems to be identified by the agency.

16.15.3 SECURITY SYSTEMS
        General requirements and requirements for particular types of systems and facility and site areas are as
        follows.

16.15.3.1    GENERAL
            A complete security system  shall be designed for the facility. All security systems shall be operated
            and monitored from a central point selected by EPA. All security systems shall have a primary and  an
            emergency power  source.

16.15.3.1.1      STANDBY BATTERIES
                Standby batteries or a UPS shall be furnished to power the system automatically in the event of
                commercial power failure.  If the facility has a generator, batteries shall ensure that there is no loss
                of power to central equipment until the generator takes over. An alarm shall not be generated
                when the equipment transfers from AC to  DC operation as it does from DC to AC operation. If the
                facility does not have an emergency generator, sufficient batteries shall be  provided to power the
                controller and necessary devices to prevent unauthorized entry into the building (electronic locks
                shall stay in the locked  position  upon power loss but shall still allow emergency egress). Batteries
                shall be chargeable. If batteries lose charge, an alarm condition shall indicate this at the control
                console.
                                                   16-31

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.15.3.2    ACCESS SYSTEMS
            A complete building access system shall be designed as an on-line type that reports to a central
            controller. The professional designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the
            design of similar installations.

16.15.3.2.1      KEY CARD CONTROL
                Key card control shall be provided for all entry to the facility. The key card reader should read
                key cards with numbering encoded within the card. The card reader shall be capable of operating
                in an off-line mode to allow persons to enter and exit without recording of card numbers. The card
                reader shall also be capable of operating in an on-line mode, which causes the card reader to report
                into a central controller that provides additional security checks on the key card and provides a
                printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the person entering or leaving the premises. The
                system shall be of the anti-passback type. In addition, one key access lock  and card reader shall be
                furnished inside the building for every 5,000 square feet of gross floor area (in addition to the
                vestibules) and at entry to controlled computer areas.

16.15.3.2.2      COMPUTERIZED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
                The computerized access control system shall be capable of programming access cards by hour
                and day. The system shall be designed with 50 percent spare capacity for both card readers and
                number of cards on the system. Key cards, once removed from the system, shall be replaceable
                without lowering the integrity of the system or reducing the system's capacity.

16.15.3.2.3      PROXIMITY TYPE CARD READERS
                Card readers shall be of the proximity type and shall be suitable for the environment in which they
                will be located.

16.15.3.2.4      PROGRAMMABLE  KEY PAD,  SMALL FACILITIES
                For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used at each entry to control access to the
                system. The keypad shall be suitable for the environment in which it will be located.

16.15.3.3    INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
            A design professional with a minimum of 3 years' experience in the design of similar installations shall
            design a complete intrusion detection system. The intrusion detection system shall protect all grade
            level doors, operable windows, and openings leading  into  the facility, as well as roof hatches and roof
            access doors.  Operable windows shall be lockable, and accessible windows shall be equipped with an
            alarm.  Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an
            alarm.  All floor telecommunications closets shall be locked with dead bolt locking devices.  In
            addition to installing perimeter protection, the design professional shall equip a minimum of 10 interior
            doors with an alarm. It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to coordinate with EPA for
            the locations of the 10  interior doors to be equipped with the alarms; locations  shall be as directed by
            EPA. Door switches shall be of the balanced magnetic type.

16.15.3.3.1      CENTRAL CONTROL, REMOTELY MONITORED
                The entire system  shall be monitored at the central control desk of the facility and remotely
                monitored either on the campus, by an alarm company, or by the local law enforcement agency.

16.15.3.4    SITE ACCESS SYSTEMS
            One alarm zone with an infrared beam shall be provided to monitor vehicles passing through the gate of
            the fenced area.  The beam should be positioned to monitor the entire length of the fence on the side
            with the gate. The alarm zone shall be monitored at the central alarm  desk (as part of the intrusion
            detection system) by remote monitoring of the same type as the intrusion detection system.  One zone
                                                   16-32

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

             and an infrared beam detection system shall be provided for each location where there is a gate in the
             fenced-in area of the site.

16.15.3.5     CLOSED-CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY SYSTEMS
             A complete closed-circuit television (CCTV) security system shall be designed.  The professional
             designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the design of similar installations.
             Conduit and wiring shall be installed for the system and a camera shall be installed at all entrance and
             exit areas. The location of the camera shall be suitable for monitoring persons' movements when they
             are entering or leaving the building.  An emergency circuit shall provide power for each camera
             location.  Conduit, wiring,  cameras,  and all other appropriate monitoring equipment shall also be
             installed in all parking lots, loading docks, and computer areas.

16.15.3.5.1      CAMERAS, FIXED OR PAN-TILT-ZOOM
                Cameras  shall be of the fixed or pan-tilt-zoom type, low light color, as required for each specific
                location.  Cameras shall be housed in proper enclosures for the environment in which they are to
                operate (e.g., enclosures with defrosters or heaters, weatherproof enclosures, corrosion-resistant or
                vandal-proof enclosures).

16.15.3.5.2      CAMERAS, MONITORED AND CONTROLLED
                All cameras shall be monitored and controlled at the facility's  central control station.  Monitors
                shall be event driven.  A recording device shall be provided to record unauthorized access (control
                by guard). A 120-volt single-duplex receptacle (emergency power) shall be provided immediately
                next to all CCTV camera locations.

16.15.3.5.3      CCTV SECURITY CAMERAS, LOADING DOCKS
                CCTV cameras shall be provided to monitor entry and exit from the loading dock areas. CCTV
                monitors  (in addition to that at the central console for the loading dock areas) shall be provided in
                the loading dock office to provide identification of delivery vehicles before the loading dock doors
                are opened.

16.15.3.6     BUILDING PERIMETER SYSTEMS
             A complete grade-level perimeter intrusion detection system shall be designed.  This  system shall be in
             addition to the intrusion detection system described above and shall be monitored at the same control
             panel provided for the intrusion detection system.

16.15.3.6.1      ULTRASONIC PROTECTION
                Ultrasonic protection should be furnished to  protect the grade-level, glass-enclosed office area and
                any other area that contains exterior glass at  grade level. The ultrasonic control panel shall be the
                type that  controls nominally 20 pairs of transmitters and receivers. Input should be connected into
                the main  alarm panels  as a separate zone. Sufficient transmitter-receiver pairs  shall be installed to
                protect the entire office area and other grade level areas with exterior glass.

16.15.3.7     DATA PROCESSING
             A complete access-intrusion detection system shall be designed for all data processing areas. A card
             reader and balanced magnetic switch shall be provided at each door leading into the data processing
             areas.  Card readers shall be of the proximity type. The system shall be monitored at the central control
             station for the facility.  The control computer shall be capable of programming access cards by hour
             and day.  The central controller shall also furnish a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the
             person entering or leaving the data processing area. The system shall be of the anti-passback type.
                                                    16-33

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.15.3.7.1      COMPUTER AREA DOORS
                If a card access system is being furnished for other doors in the facility, the same cards shall work
                for the computer area doors (if so encoded for certain personnel).

16.15.3.7.2      CENTRAL CONTROL DOOR MONITORING
                The door shall be monitored at the central control station in case it is left open or the card access
                system is bypassed.

16.15.3.8    PARKING CONTROLS
            The parking facility(s) shall be enclosed and equipped with a perimeter sensor system and lockable
            gates.  The gates shall be equipped  with a computerized access control system. EPA card readers shall
            be installed in parallel with any other card readers (if required) on all the access roads.

16.15.3.8.1      ACCESS SYSTEM
                The parking control access system shall have all the components discussed above for access
                systems. For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used in lieu of a card reader.
                The same cards used for building access shall operate the parking controls (if so encoded).

16.15.4 DISASTER EVACUATION SYSTEM
        If the facility is located in an area prone to tornados or hurricanes, a warning/evacuation alarm system for
        the building shall be included.  The system shall provide for building evacuation in accordance with the
        facility's emergency preparedness plan, which shall be coordinated with the community's emergency
        preparedness plan.

16.15.5 EXIT LIGHTING AND MARKINGS
        The requirements for exit lighting and marking are contained in NFPA 101 and the local building code.

        •   Exit lighting  and exit signs shall be provided to clearly indicate the location of exits in conformance
            with 29 CFR ง1910.36 and ง1910.37 and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101).  The means of egress,
            exterior steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent accidents.

        •   Internally illuminated signs shall meet the following criteria:

                Emergency lighting for the area shall conform to OSHA and the Life Safety Code and shall
                provide at least 5 footcandles on the sign surface.

                Exit signs shall be at least 8 inches high by 12!/2 inches long.

                Letters shall be at least 6 inches high.

                The maximum physical distance to a visual sign shall not exceed 100 feet. In addition, an exit sign
                shall be visible from all points  in the corridor.
16.16 Commissioning

        Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning requirements.


END OF SECTION 16
                                                   16-34

-------
July 2004
                                                                   Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                            Appendix A
            American Concrete Pumping                AHA
            Association
            P.O. Box 4307
            1034 Tennessee St.
            Vallejo, CA  94590                          AHLI

ACSM      American Congress on Surveying and
            Mapping
            210 Little Falls St.                           AHMA
            Falls Church, VA 22046

ADA       Americans with Disabilities Act
            (For employment questions)
            U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity           AI
                Commission
            ADA Legal Services
            1801 L St., NW
            Washington,  DC  20507                      AIA

            (For transportation questions)
            U.S. Department of Transportation
            Office of Assistant General Counsel            AIA / NA
                for Regulation and Enforcement
            400 7th St., SW
            Washington,  DC  20590

            (Forpublic accommodations questions)        AIHA
            U.S. Department of Justice
            Office of Americans with Disabilities
                Act
            P. O. Box 66118
            Washington,  DC  20035-6118                 AIC

            (For telecommunications questions)
            Federal Communications Commission
                Consumer Assistance                    AISC
            1919 M St.,NW
            Washington,  DC  20554
                                                       AISI
                                                       AITC
            (For architectural accessibility
            questions)
            Access Board
            1331 F St., NW, Suite 1000
            Washington, DC  20004-1111

AGA       American Gas Association, Inc.
            1515 Wilson Blvd.
            Arlington, VA  22209
AGC       Associated General Contractors of           ALSC
            America
            1957 East St., NW
            Washington,  DC  20006
American Hardboard Association
520 N. Hicks Rd.
Palantine, IL 60067

American Home Lighting Institute
435 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1717
Chicago, IL 60611

American Hardware Manufacturers
Association
931 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173

Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740

American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC  20006

Asbestos Information Association/
North America
1745 Jefferson Davis Hwy., Suite 509
Arlington, VA  22202

American Industrial Hygiene
Association
2700 Prosperity Ave., Suite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031

American Institute of Constructors
20 S. Front St.
Columbus, OH 43215

American Institute of Steel
Construction,  Inc.
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001

American Iron and Steel  Institute
1101 17th St., NW, Suite 1300
Washington, DC  20036

American Institute of Timber
Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140
Englewood, CO 80112

American Lumber Standards
Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
                                                 A-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                 July 2004
Appendix A
AMCA
ANL
ANS
ANSI
APA
APA
APFA
API
AREMA
ARI
ARMA
ARTBA
Air Movement and Control
Association
30 West University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL  60004

Argonne National Laboratory
9800 South Cass Ave.
Argonne, IL  60439

American  Nuclear Society
555 North  Kensington Ave.
LaGrange Park, IL 60525

American National Standards
Institute
25 West 43rd Street, 4 floor
New York, NY 10036

APA - The Engineered Wood
Association
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411-0800

Architectural Precast Association
6710 Winkler Road, Suite 8
Ft. Myers,  FL 33919

American Pipe Fitting Association
8136 Old Keene Mill Rd., #B-311
Springfield, VA  22152

American  Petroleum Institute
1220 L.St.NW
Washington, DC  20037

American Railway Engineering and
Maintenance of Way Association
8201 Corporate Drive, Suite 1125
Landover,  MD  20785

Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute
1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor
Arlington,  VA 22209

Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association
6288 Montrose Road
Rockville,  MD  20852

American Road and Transportation
Builders Association
1010 Massachusetts Avenue, NW
Washington, DC  20001-5402
ASA        Acoustical Society of America
            500 Sunnyside Blvd.
            Woodberry, NY  11797
            American Subcontractors Association
            1004 Duke St.
            Alexandria, VA  22314

ASC        Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc.
            1500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 515
            Arlington, VA 22209-2495
            Associated Specialty Contractors
            7315 Wisconsin Ave.
            Bethesda, MD 20814

ASCC      American Society of Concrete
            Construction
            426 S. Westgate
            Addison, IL 60101

ASCE      American Society of Civil Engineers
            1801 Alexander Bell Drive
            Reston, VA20191

ASHRAE   American Society of Heating,
            Refrigerating, and  Air-Conditioning
            Engineers , Inc.
            1791 Tullie Circle, NE
            Atlanta, GA 30329

ASID       American Society of Interior
            Designers
            1430 Broadway
            New York, NY 10018

ASME      American Society of Mechanical
            Engineers
            United Engineering Center
            345 E. 47th St.
            New York, NY 10017

ASPE      American Society of Professional
            Estimators
            3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
            Westlake, CA 91362
                                                 A-3

-------
July 2004
           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
ASSE       American Society of Sanitary
            Engineers
            P.O. Box 40362
            Bay Village, OH 44140

ASTM      American Society for Testing and
            Materials
            100 Barr Harbor Drive
            West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959

AWCI      Association of the Wall and Ceiling
            Industries International
            25  KSt.,NE, Suite 300
            Washington, DC 20002

AWI        Architectural Woodwork Institute
            2310  S.Walter Reed Dr.
            Arlington, VA 22206

AWS        American Welding Society, Inc.
            550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.
            Miami, FL 33126

AWWA     American Water Works Association
            6666  West Quincy Ave.
            Denver, CO  80235

BHMA     Builder's Hardware Manufacturers
            Association, Inc.
            60  E. 42nd St., Room 511
            New York, NY 10165

BIA        The Brick Industry Association
            11490 Commerce Park Dr.
            Reston, VA  20191-1525

BMRI      Building Materials Research
            Institute, Inc.
            501 5th Ave.,#1402
            New York, NY 10017

BRB        Building Research Board
            2101  Constitution Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20418

BSC        Building Systems Council
            1201  15th Street, NW
            Washington, DC 20005

BSI         Building Stone Institute
            420 Lexington Ave., Suite 2800
            New York, NY  10170
                                    Appendix A

CDA        Copper Development Association
            260 Madison Ave.
            New York, NY 10016

CERC      Coastal Engineering Research Center
            U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
            P.O. Box 631
            Vicksburg, MA  39180

CFR        Code of Federal Regulations
            Superintendent of Documents
            Government Printing Office
            Washington, DC  20402

CGA        Compressed Gas Association
            4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor
            Chantilly,  VA 20151-2923

CGMI      Ceramic Glazed Masonry Institute
            P.O. Box 35575
            Canton, Ohio 44735

CIEA       Construction Industry Employers
            Association
            625 Ensminger Rd.
            Tonawanda, NY  14150

CIMA      Construction Industry
            Manufacturers Association
            111 E. Wisconsin Ave., Suite 940
            Milwaukee, WI  53202-4879

CISCA      Ceilings and Interior Systems
            Construction Association
            1500 Lincoln Hwy., Suite 202
            St. Charles, IL  60174

CISPI      Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
            1499 Chain Bridge Rd., Suite 203
            McLean, VA 22101

CLFMI     Chain Link Fence Manufacturers
            Institute
            10015  Old Columbia Road, Suite B-215
            Columbia, MD 21046

CMAA      Crane Manufacturers Association of
            America
            1326 Freeport Road
            Pittsburgh, PA  15238
                                                A-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                      July 2004
Appendix A
CPMA      Construction Products
            Manufacturing Council
            P.O. Box 21008
            Washington, DC 20009-0508

CRA        California Redwood Association
            405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200
            Novato, CA 94949

CRI        Carpet and Rug Institute
            P.O. Box 2048
            Dalton, GA 30722-2048

CRSI       Concrete Reinforced Steel Institutes
            933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
            Schaumburg, IL 60173

CSI         Construction Specifications Institute
            601 Madison St.
            Alexandria, VA 22314

CSSB       Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
            P.O. Box 1178
            Sumas,WA 98295-1178

 CTI        Ceramic Tile Institute
            700 N. Virgil Ave.
            Los Angeles, CA 90029
            Cooling Tower Institute
            P.O. Box 73383
            Houston, TX 77273

DFI        Deep Foundations Institute
            326 Lafayette Avenue
            Hawthorne, NJ 07506

DHI        Door and Hardware Institute
            7711  Old Springhouse Rd.
            McLean, VA 22101-3474

DIPRA     Ductile Iron Pipe Research
            Association
            245 Riverchase Parkway E., Suite 0
            Birmingham, AL 35244

DOE        U.S. Department of Energy
            1000  Independence Ave., SW
            Washington, DC 20585
DOE/OSTI  DOE/Office of Scientific and
            Technical Information
            P.O. Box 62
            Oak Ridge, TN 37831

DOT        U.S. Department of Transportation
            400 7th St., SW
            Washington, DC 20590

EIA        Electronics Industries Association
            2001 Eye St., NW
            Washington, DC 20006

EIMA      Exterior Insulation Manufacturers
            Association
            Box 75037
            Washington, DC 20013

EO         Executive Orders
            National Archives and Records
               Administration
            8th St. and Pennsylvania Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20408

EPA        Environmental Protection Agency
            1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
            Washington, DC 20460

ESCSI      Expanded Shale, Clay and Slate
            Institute
            6218 MontroseRd.
            Rockville, MD 20852

FCC        Federal Construction Council
            Building Research Board
            National Research Council
            2101 Constitution Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20418

FEMA      Federal Emergency Management
            Agency
            Federal Center Plaza
            500 C  St., SW
            Washington, DC 20472

FGMA      Flat Glass Marketing Association
            White  Lakes Professional Building
            3310 Harrison St.
            Topeka, KS 66611

FHA        Federal Housing Administration
            451 7th St., SW,  Rm. 3158
            Washington, DC 20410
                                                A-5

-------
July 2004
                                                      Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
FIPS       Federal Information Processing
            Standards
            National Bureau of Standards
            Room 64-B, Technology
            Gaithersburg, MD 20899

FM         Factory Mutual Engineering and
            Research
            1151  Boston-Providence Turnpike
            Norwood, MA
                                                                               Appendix A

                                           IAEA      International Atomic Energy Agency
                                                      Vienna International Center
                                                      Wagranerstrasse 5
                                                      Post Fach 100
                                                      A-1400 Vienna, Austria

                                           IALD      International Association of Lighting
                                                      Designers
                                                      18 E. 16th St., Suite 208
                                                      New York, NY  10003
FPL        Forest Products Laboratory
            USDA Forest Service
            One Gifford Pinchot Dr.
            Madison, WI 53705-2398
                                           IAPMO    International Association of
                                                      Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
                                                      20001 Walnut DriveS.
                                                      Walnut, CA 91789
FPS        Forest Products Society
            2801 Marshall Ct.
            Madison, WI 53705-2295

FR         Federal Register
            Superintendent of Documents
            U.S. Government Printing Office
            710 North Capitol St., NW
            Washington, DC 20402
                                           ICAA      Insulation Contractors Association of
                                                      America
                                                      15819 Crabbs Branch Way
                                                      Rockville, MD 20855

                                           ICC       International Code Council
                                                      5203 Leesburg Pike
                                                      Suite  600
                                                      Falls Church, VA 22041
FS
GA
GBCA
GSA
HPVA
Federal Specifications
Attention:  NPFC Code 1052
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099

Gypsum Association
1603 Orrington Ave., Suite 1210
Evanston, IL 60201

General Building Contractors
Association
36 S. 18th St.
P.O. Box 15959
Philadelphia, PA 19103

General Services Administration
Public Buildings Service
1800 F St., NW
Washington, DC 20405

Hardwood Plywood and Veneer
Association
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 20195
ICEA       Insulated Cable Engineers
            Association
            P.O. Box 1568
            Carrollton, Georgia 30112

ICRP       International Commission on
            Radiological Protection
            Maxwell House
            Fairview Park
            Elmsford, NY 10523

IEEE       Institute of Electrical and Electronics
            Engineers
            345 E. 47th St.
            New York, NY  10017

IES         Institute of Environmental Sciences
            940 East Northwest Highway
            Mount Prospect, IL 56056

IESNA      Illuminating Engineering Society of
            North America
            120 Wall Street,  Floor 17
            New York, NY 10005

IFI         Industrial Fasteners Institute
            1505 E. Ohio Building
            Cleveland, OH 44114
                                                 A-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                 July 2004
Appendix A

IHEA
IILP
ILIA
IMI
ISDI
LANL
LBL
LLNL
LPI
MBMA
Industrial Heating Equipment
Association
3900 N. Fairfax Drive, Suite 400
Arlington, VA  222093

International Institute of Lath and
Plaster
P.O. Box 1663
Lafayette, CA 94549

Indiana Limestone Institute of
America
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, IN  47421

International Masonry Institute
823 15thSt.,NW, Suite  1001
Washington, DC  20005

Insulated Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit  Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Los Alamos  National Laboratory
P.O. Box 1663
Los Alamos, NM 87545

Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
1 Cyclostron Road
Berkeley, CA 94720

Lawrence Livermore National
Laboratory
7000 East Ave.
Livermore, CA 94550

Lightning Protection Institute
3335 N. Arlington Hts. Rd., Suite E
Arlington Hts., IL 60004

Metal Building Manufacturers
Association
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
            Mechanical Contractors Association
            of America
            5410 Grosvenor, Suite 120
            Bethesda, MD 20814

MIA        Marble Institute of America
            33505 StateSt.
            Farmington, MI  48024

MFMA     Maple Flooring Manufacturers
            Association
            60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
            Northbrook, IL  60062

MLSFA     Metal Lath/Steel Framing
            Association
            600  S. Federal, Suite 400
            Chicago, IL 60605

MSS        Manufacturers Standardization
            Society of the Valve and Fittings
            Industry
            127  Park St., NE
            Vienna, VA 22180

NBMDA    North American Building Material
            Distributors Association
            1701 Lake Ave., Suite 170
            Glenview, IL 60025

N AAMM   National Association of Architectural
            Metal Manufacturers
            600  South Federal St.
            Chicago, IL 60605

NACE      NACE International
            P.O. Box 201009
            Houston, TX 72216-1009

NADC      National Association of Demolition
            Contractors
            4415 W. Harrison St.
            Hillside, IL  60162
MCAA     Mason Contractors Association of
            America
            33 South Roselle Road
            Schaumburg, IL  60193
                                                      National Association of Dredging
                                                      Contractors
                                                      1625 ISt.,NW, Suite 321
                                                      Washington, DC 20006
                                                 A-7

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
NAEC      National Association of Elevator
            Contractors
            4053 LaVista Rd., Suite 120
            Tucker, GA 30084

NAFCD     National Association of Floor
            Covering Distributors
            401  North Michigan Avenue
            Suite 2400
            Chicago, IL 60611-4267

NAHB      National Association of Home
            Builders
            1201 15th Street, NW
            Washington, DC 20005

NAHRO    National Association of Housing
            Redevelopment Officials
            630  Eye Street, NW
            Washington, DC 20001

NAPA      National Asphalt Pavement
            Association
            6811 Kenilworth Ave., Suite 620
            P.O. Box 517
            Riverdale, MD  20737

NAPHCC   National Association of Plumbing,
            Heating, and Cooling Contractors
            P.O. Box 6808
            Falls Church, VA 22046

NARSC     National Association of Reinforcing
            Steel Contractors
            10382 Main St.
            P.O. Box 225
            Fairfax, VA 22030

NASA      National Aeronautics and Space
            Administration
            300  E St., SW
            Washington, DC 20546

NAVFAC   U.S. Naval Facilities Engineering
            Command
            Attention Cash Sales/Code 1051
            Naval Publications and Forms Center
            5801 Tabor Ave.
            Philadelphia, PA  19120-5099

NAWIC     National Association of Women in
            Construction
            327  S. Adams St.
            Fort Worth, TX 76104
                                     Appendix A

NBMA      National Building Manufacturers
            Association
            142 Lexington Ave.
            New York, NY 10016

NBS        National Bureau of Standards
            (currently National Institute of
            Standards and Technology)

NCA        National Constructors Association
            1101  15th St., NW, Suite 1000
            Washington, DC 20005

NCMA      National Concrete Masonry
            Association
            13750 Sunrise Valley Drive
            Herndon, VA 20171

NCRP      National Council on Radiation
            Protection and Measurement
            7910  Woodmont Ave., Suite 800
            Bethesda, MD 20814

NCSBCS    National Conference of State
            Building Codes and Standards
            481 Carlisle Dr.
            Herndon, VA 22070

NEC        National Electrical Code
            National Fire Protection Association
            1 Batterymarch Park
            Quincy, MA  02269

NECA      National Electrical Contractors
            Association
            7315  Wisconsin Ave.
            13th Floor, West Building
            Bethesda, MD 20814

NEMA      National Electrical Manufacturers
            Association
            1300  North 17th Street, Suite 1847
            Rosslyn, VA 22209

NESC       National Electrical Safety Code
            Institute of Electrical & Electronics
            Engineers, Inc.
            345 East 47th St.
            New York, NY 10017

NFPA       National Fire Protection Association
            1 Batterymarch Park
            POBox 9101
            Quincy, MA  02269

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                      July 2004
Appendix A
            National Forest Products Association
            1250 Connecticut Ave.,NW, Suite 200
            Washington, DC 20036

NGA       National Glass Association
            8200 Greensboro Dr., Suite 302
            McLean, VA 22101

NIH        National Institutes of Health
            U.S. Dept. of Health and Human
            Services
            9000 Rockville Pike
            Bethesda, MD 20892
NOFMA    National Oak Flooring
            Manufacturers Association
            P.O. Box 3009
            Memphis, TN 38173-0009

NPA        National Particleboard Association
            2306 Perkins PL
            Silver Spring, MD  20910

NPCA      National Paint and Coatings
            Association
            1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
            Washington,  DC 20005
NIJ         National Institute of Justice
            633 Indiana Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20531

NIOSH     National Institute of Occupational
            Safety and Health
            200 Independence Ave., SW
            RoomVlSH
            Washington, DC 20201

NH&RA    National Housing & Rehabilitation
            Association
            1625 Massachusetts Avenue, NW
            Suite 601
            Washington, DC 20036-4435

NKCA      National Kitchen Cabinet Association
            P.O. Box 6830
            Falls Church, VA 22046

NLA        National Lime Association
            200 North Glebe Road, Suite 800
            Arlington, Virginia 22203

NLBMDA   National Lumber and Building
            Material Dealers Association
            40 Ivy St., SE
            Washington, DC 20003

NOAA      National Oceanic and Atmospheric
            Administration
            Washington Science Center, Building 5
            6010 Executive Blvd.
            Rockville, MD 20852
NRC
NRCA
NRMCA
NSA
NSF
National Precast Concrete
Association
10333 North Meridian St., Suite 272
Indianapolis, IN 46290

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Publications Division
Washington, DC  20555

National Roofing Contractors
Association
1 O'Hare Center
6250 River Rd.
Rosemont, IL 60018

National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association
900 Spring St.
Silver Spring, MD 20910

National Security Agency/
Central Security Service
FortMeade, MD  20755
National Stone Association
1415  Elliot PL, NW
Washington, DC  20007

NSF International
P.O. Box 130140
789 N. Dixboro Road
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
                                                 A-9

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
NSPC       National Standard Plumbing Code
            Published by: National Association of
            Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors
            P.O. Box  6808
            Falls Church, VA  22040

NSPE       National Society of Professional
            Engineers
            1420 King St.
            Alexandria, VA  22314-2794

NTIA       National Telecommunications and
            Information Administration
            Main Commerce Building
            Washington, DC 20230

NTIS       National Technical Information
            Service
            5485 Port Royal Rd.
            Springfield, VA  22161

NTMA      National Terrazzo and Mosaic
            Association
            3166 Des  Plaines Ave., Suite 132
            Des Plaines, IL  60018

NWMA     National Woodwork Manufacturers'
            Association
            400 W. Madison St.
            Chicago, IL  60606

NWWDA   National Wood Window and Door
            Association
            1400 East Touhy Ave., Suite 450
            Des Plaines, IL  60018

OMB       Office of Management and Budget
            Old Executive Office Building
            Washington, DC 20503

OPCMIA   Operative Plasterers' and Cement
            Masons' International Association of
            the United States and Canada
            1125 17thSt.,NW, 6th Floor
            Washington, DC 20036

OSHA      Occupational Safety and Health
            Administration
            U.S. Department of Labor
            200 Constitution Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20201
                                     Appendix A

PLCA      Pipe Line Contractors Association
            1700 Pacific Avenue, Suite 4100
            Dallas, Texas 75201-4675

PCA        Portland Cement Association
            5420 Old Orchard Rd.
            Skokie, IL  60077

PCI        Precast/Prestressed Concrete
            Institute
            209 W.  Jackson Blvd.
            Chicago, IL 60606-6938

PDCA      Painting and Decorating Contractors
            of America
            7223 Lee Highway
            Falls Church, VA 22046

PDI        Plumbing and Drainage Institute
            1106 W. 77th St. Dr.
            Indianapolis, IN  46260

PHCIB     Plumbing-Heating-Cooling
            Information Bureau
            303 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 711
            Chicago, IL 60601

PMI        Plumbing Manufacturers Institute
            800 Roosevelt Rd., Building C, Suite 20
            GlenEllyn, IL 60137

PPI        Plastics Pipe Institute
            355 Lexington Ave.
            New York, NY  10017

PTI        Post-Tensioning Institute
            8601 North Black Canyon Highway
            Suite 103
            Phoenix, AZ  85021

RCRC      Reinforced Concrete Research
            Council
            5420 Old Orchard Rd.
            Skokie, IL  60077

RFCI       Resilient Floor Covering Institute
            401 E. Jefferson Street,  Suite 102
            Rockville, MD 20850

SAMA      Scientific Apparatus Makers
            Association
            225 Reinekers Lane, Suite 625
            Alexandria, VA 22314
                                                A-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                 July 2004
Appendix A
SBA
scs
Systems Builders Association
P.O. Box 117
West Milton, OH 45383

Soil Conservation Service
U.S. Department of Agriculture
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250
SPRI       Single Ply Roofing Institute
            77 Rumford Avenue, Suite 3B
            Waltham, MA 02453

SSFI       Scaffolding, Shoring, and Forming
            Institute, Inc.
            1230 Keith Building
            Cleveland, OH 44115
SDI        Steel Deck Institute
            P.O. Box 25
            Fox River Grove, IL 60021
            Steel Door Institute
            30200 Detroit Road
            Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

SIGMA     Sealed Insulating Glass
            Manufacturers Association
            111 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 600
            Chicago, IL 60601

SJI         Steel Joist Institute
            3127 10th Ave. North Ext.
            Myrtle Beach, SC 295776760

SMA       Screen Manufacturers Association
            2850 South Ocean  Boulevard, #114
            Palm Beach, FL 33480-6205
                                           SSPC      Steel Structures Painting Council
                                                      4400 5th Ave.
                                                      Pittsburgh, PA 15213

                                           SBIC      Sustainable Buildings Industry
                                                      Council
                                                      1331 H Street, NW, Ste. 1000
                                                      Washington, DC 20005

                                           SWI       Sealant and Waterproofers Institute
                                                      3101 Broadway, Suite 300
                                                      Kansas City, MO 64111
                                                      Steel Window Institute
                                                      1230 Keith Building
                                                      Cleveland, OH 44115

                                           TCA       Tile Council of America
                                                      100 Clem son Research Blvd.
                                                      Anderson, SC 29625
            Stucco Manufacturers Association
            2402 Vista Nobleza
            Newport Beach, CA 92660

SMACNA   Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
            Contractors National Association
            4201 Lafayette Center Drive
            Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209

SMWIA    Sheet Metal Workers International
            Association
            1750 New York Ave., NW
            Washington, DC 20006

SNL        Sandia National Laboratories
            P.O. Box 5800
            Albuquerque, NM  87185
                                           TCAA
                                           TIMA
                                           UL
            Tilt-Up Concrete Association
            PO Box 204
            Mt. Vernon, IA 52314

            Tile Contractors Association of
            America, Inc.
            4 East 113th Terrace
            Kansas City, MO 64114

            Thermal Insulation Manufacturers
            Association
            7 Kirby Plaza
            Mount Kisco, NY 10549
            Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
            333 Pfingsten Rd.
            Northbrook, IL 60062
                                                A-ll

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
USACE     U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
            441 G Street, NW
            Washington, DC  20314

USAF      U.S. Air Force
            Manuals may be ordered from
            headquarters of any Air Force Base

VMA       Valve Manufacturers Association of
            America
            1050 17th St., NW, Suite 701
            Washington, DC  20036

WMA      Wallcovering Manufacturers
            Association
            355 Lexington Ave.
            New York, NY 10017
                                     Appendix A

WEF       Water Environment Federation
            601 Wythe St.
            Alexandria, VA 22314-1994

WRC       Water Resources Council,
            Hydrology Committee
            U.S. Department of the Interior
            C St. between 18th & 19th Sts., NW
            Washington, DC 20240

WRI       Wire Reinforcement Institute
            PO BOX 450
            Findlay, OH 45839-0450

WWPA     Western Wood Products Association
            Yeon Building
            522 SW 5th Ave.
            Portland, OR  97204
END OF APPENDIX A
                                                 A-12

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

      supplier's support is required.  The integrated commissioning process should have the distinct phases outlined
      below.

Bl.2.1    PRE-DESIGN PHASE
          The objectives  of this phase are to document the owner's vision, requirements and future expectation for
          the facility, select the Commissioning Authority, document the initial design intent, and begin
          development of the Commissioning Plan. The roles and responsibilities of the owner, the Project
          Manager, design team, the Commissioning Authority and contractors must be defined for the
          commissioning process.

          During pre-design, the commissioning team should include the EPA Project Manager, the Commissioning
          Authority, and the design team. The main commissioning tasks of the pre-design phase include:

          •   The EPA Project Manager should send out requests for qualifications for commissioning services,
              develop the scope of the commissioning effort, and select a Commissioning Authority and design
              team.
          •   The Commissioning Authority assembles the commissioning team and develops a draft design phase
              commissioning plan.
          •   The Commissioning Authority recommends the commissioning roles and scope for all members of
              the design  and construction teams.
          •   The Commissioning Authority reviews the design intent for clarity and completeness.
          •   The Commissioning Authority delivers a draft design phase commissioning plan and comments on
              the Design Intent document.

Bl.2.2    DESIGN PHASE
          The goals of commissioning during the Design Phase are to ensure that the concepts for building systems
          developed during pre-design are included in subsequent design phases; that the design record document is
          updated; and that commissioning is adequately reflected in the contract documents.  During the design
          phase, there are four primary commissioning activities: developing the Basis of Design and expanding
          design intent as necessary; performing commissioning-focused design reviews(s); expanding and
          modifying the Commissioning Plan to include the  construction phase; and developing commissioning
          specifications for the construction phase. The main design phase commissioning tasks are outlined
          below:

          •   The Commissioning Authority updates the design phase commissioning plan started during pre-
              design phase.

          •   The design team develops Basis of Design documentation.  The Commissioning Authority reviews
              this documentation for clarity, completeness, constructability and compliance with the EPA's design
              intent. In addition, all changes to the initial design intent must be documented, reviewed, and
              approved by the Commissioning Authority and EPA.

          •   The Commissioning Authority attends selected design team meetings and formally reviews and
              comments  on the design at 15%, 35%, 65% and 100% stages of development.  Potential system
              performance problems, energy-efficiency improvements, indoor environmental quality issues,
              operation and maintenance issues, and other issues should be addressed in these design reviews. The
              Commissioning Authority ensures that the design follows and meets the original design intent.  The
              Commissioning Authority also makes recommendations to  facilitate commissioning and improve
              building performance.

          •   The Commissioning Authority, in cooperation with the A/E team, develops detailed commissioning
              specifications to be included by the design team in the final contract document.  The commissioning
              specifications detail the commissioning process and the scope of work for all participants including
              contractors and vendors.  The specifications comprise commissioning-related requirements that will
              be the contractor's responsibility, including equipment installation and start-up, documentation, and
              functional testing.

          •   While writing the specifications for Commissioning, the Commissioning Authority develops a
              Preliminary Commissioning Plan. This plan becomes a scope of work that names actual components
              and systems in the design documents.  The Commissioning Authority shall develop procedures for
              each of the systems to be commissioned.  This interim plan should be incorporated into the
              specifications to give contractors the best possible idea of his part in the process. In addition, the


                                                    B-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

               Commissioning Authority shall recommend enhanced language regarding training, documentation,
               installation, and system checkout for inclusion in non-commissioning sections of the specifications.

           •    The commissioning provider compiles and updates the design records as design progresses.

           •    The Commissioning Authority shall deliver regular commissioning progress reports and comments
               and recommendations from design reviews to EPA project manager.  The Commissioning Authority
               shall submit updates of the design records, initial construction phase commissioning plan and
               commissioning specifications.

           •    The review performed by the Commissioning Authority shall determine that the documents are
               consistent with the design intent, specify commissionable systems, include inspection and testing
               details, include equipment parameters that can be verified, incorporate a layout that allows testing
               and maintenance and fully describe the Commissioning process for the contractors. The
               Commissioning Authority will also review the contract documents to  confirm that each piece of
               equipment or system is capable of being tested and has objective performance parameters that can be
               confirmed.

           The EPA Project Manager shall monitor the design phase process and shall make certain that procedures
           are in place within the team so issues the Commissioning Authority raises are reviewed and the team
           comes to a consensus.  If a consensus cannot be reached on an issue, the team should document the issue,
           and EPA should provide a decision and direction in consultation with the appropriate design professional.

1.2.3       BIDDING/CONTRACT NEGOTIATION PHASE
           The Commissioning Authority will participate  in the pre-bid conference presenting a brief overview of
           the commissioning process and answer specific questions posed by the Contractors. The Commissioning
           Authority may review bids, alternates, and addendums to ensure that commissioning and the Owner's
           Project Requirements are not compromised by the changes.

1.2.4       CONSTRUCTION PHASE
           The main construction phase commissioning tasks are listed below:

           •    The Commissioning Authority will update the construction phase commissioning plan,  which
               includes a list of all systems and specific equipment and components to be commissioned, the
               process to be  followed, communications, reporting and documentation protocols, and an estimated
               schedule for the commissioning process. The final draft of the Commissioning Plan will be
               completed during the early stages of construction after all equipment  submittals have been approved
               and before equipment has arrived on the site. The Plan will start with the requirements on a  system-
               by-system basis and on the actual design and the equipment ordered.  The Commissioning Plan
               developed at this point will have detailed information on the support required from contractor and
               responsible subcontractor personnel.

           •    The Commissioning Authority will coordinate a construction phase commissioning kickoff meeting
               that include the EPA project manager, construction manager, design team, Commissioning Authority,
               and respective representatives from the general contractor and mechanical, electrical, controls, and
               TAB subcontractors. At this meeting, the  Commissioning  Authority outlines the roles and
               responsibilities of each project team member, specifies procedures for documenting commissioning
               activities and resolving issues, and reviews the preliminary construction phase commissioning plan
               and schedule.

           •    The Commissioning Authority will attend  periodic planning meetings to update parties  involved in
               commissioning. During the  initial stages of construction, the commissioning provider may attend
               regular construction meetings and hold a line item on the agenda.  Later in construction the
               commissioning provider may coordinate entire meetings devoted to commissioning issues.

           •    The Commissioning Authority will develop and keep a record of issues and findings throughout the
               construction phase commissioning process that require further attention, tracking, or correction.

           •    The Commissioning Authority reviews and comments on contractor submittals of equipment to be
               commissioned during the normal submittal review process and forward them to the EPA Project
               Manager and  designer.
                                                    B-3

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

          •    The Commissioning Authority should assist the EPA Project Manager in monitoring the development
               of coordination drawings to ensure interface between trades.

          •    The Commissioning Authority reviews the O&M manual to ensure that it complies with the
               specifications, is complete, clear, and is well organized and accessible for use by the O&M staff.

          •    The Commissioning Authority will visit the construction site periodically, note any conditions that
               might affect system performance or operation and provide construction observation reports.

1.2.4.1         FIELD VERIFICATION
               The Field Verification phase of commissioning starts when the Commissioning Plan is completed,
               equipment is ordered, and construction begins.  The Field Verification phase lays the foundation for
               equipment startup by confirming that installed equipment can function in a safe and effective manner.

               The Commissioning Authority will develop and provide construction checklists for installation, start-
               up and initial checkout of the equipment and systems to the contractor for execution.  These
               checklists will also incorporate manufacturers' requirements. The Commissioning Authority will
               witness some of the start-up execution and will spot-check selected items on the checklist prior to
               functional testing. The contractor will execute construction checklists provided by the
               Commissioning Authority and equipment  manufacturer and submit them to the Commissioning
               Authority for review before functional testing begins.

1.2.4.2         FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
               Functional performance testing is conducted to verify that the performance of all integrated systems
               meets the specified objectives defined in the Design Intent. Functional performance testing ensures
               that equipment and systems are installed correctly, tested, and adjusted so that they operate
               efficiently and according to design intent under a variety of conditions. This testing is intended to
               document the completion and performance of all components, equipment and systems.

               Functional performance testing should progress from functional verification to performance
               verification in sequence, from individual equipment or components through subsystem operation to
               complete systems. At the end of the testing, every mode of building and system operation, all system
               equipment, system interfaces, and every item in the control sequence description will be proven
               operational under all normal operational modes including load, in all seasons, and under abnormal or
               emergency conditions.

               a.   Functional Verification
                   Equipment is  to be started up for the first time with required factory representatives in
                   attendance. The equipment should  be tested at all required speeds and preliminary programming
                   should be completed as required to  allow subsequent safe and easy starting.

                   •    The Commissioning Authority  will develop written test procedures manage, witness, and
                       document the functional tests, with the actual hands-on execution of the test procedures
                       typically  carried out by subcontractors, particularly the controls contractor.

                   •    Acceptable performance is reached when equipment or systems meet specified design
                       parameters under  full-load and part-load conditions during all modes of operation, as
                       described in the commissioning test requirements of the specifications and commissioning
                       plan (some testing will be completed by monitoring system operation over time through the
                       building automation system or  data loggers a few weeks after occupancy).

                   •    The Commissioning Authority  will not re-test systems that have been tested and approved
                       by regulatory authorities. The  Commissioning Authority will prepare test plans, assist with
                       execution and document tests of  commissioned equipment overseen by regulatory
                       authorities.

                   •    The Commissioning Authority  should assist in the programming of the BAS to include the
                       trend logging of a selected group of key performance indicators. These indicators include
                       temperatures and pressures  for boiler and chiller operations, duct pressures, outside
                       airflows,  and some typical variable air volume terminals operating  parameters, and unitary
                       equipment performance parameters.
                                                    B-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

               b.   Performance Verification
                   After equipment has been proved at startup, the Commissioning Authority to confirm that the
                   pieces work together will conduct Functional Performance Tests, which are the heart of the
                   Commissioning process.

                   •    Functional tests will include checking BAS parameters, such as programmed addresses,
                       sensor calibration factors, occupied/unoccupied programming, and trend logging.
                       Programming charts, sequences of operation, block wiring diagrams, and wiring termination
                       diagrams should be included in the report.  All BAS tuning variables,  such as response
                       times, damping variables, delays, and interlocks, should be included in the report.
                       Laboratory and other critical facilities will have the control input and  output points loop
                       calibrated (inputs will be simulated with signal generators).

                   •    The subcontractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing report will be checked for accuracy
                       by sampling the report data.  If a substantial failure rate is encountered, all failures should
                       be corrected and a different sample chosen for a repeat test. The EPA project manager may
                       elect to have the Commissioning Authority to perform TAB.

                   •    As Functional Performance Tests proceed, the Commissioning Authority may find a number
                       of items that do not appear to work as intended. The Commissioning Authority will need to
                       perform a varying amount of re-testing because of system and equipment failures during the
                       initial testing. The amount of retesting that is paid for by the EPA and the amount that is
                       passed back to the Contractor should be very clearly spelled out in the construction contract.

                   •    The Commissioning Authority will verify the accuracy of facility record drawings.

1.2.4.3         FINAL AND POST ACCEPTANCE PHASE
               When the requirements of the contract documents and Commissioning Plan have been completed and
               satisfactorily documented and any additional required documentation has been completed, submitted
               to the design professionals, and accepted, the Commissioning Authority  should recommend Final
               Acceptance of the building and all building systems.  The recommendation is issued subject to any
               outstanding issues or deficiencies that cannot be resolved until a future date.

               The Post-Acceptance Phase is an important step in ensuring the  effective, ongoing functioning of a
               facility's building systems. As  use and function of facilities change, the building systems need to be
               adapted to the changing requirements of occupancy and utilization.  It is appropriate to maintain a
               history of the facility, recording changes  and verifying the effect on the previously commissioned
               systems.

               The Post-Acceptance Phase includes the completion of any outstanding functional performance tests,
               a post-construction review, at a set or variable period after construction,  evaluation and verification
               that the design intent of the building  is still being met and ongoing monitoring.

               Post-acceptance commissioning is the continued adjustment, optimization, and modification of the
               HVAC system to meet specified requirements. It includes updating documentation to reflect minor
               set point adjustments, system maintenance and calibration, major system modifications, and
               provision of ongoing training of operations and maintenance personnel.  The objective of post-
               acceptance commissioning is to maintain the performance of the building systems throughout the
               useful life of the facility in accordance with the current design intent.

               A post-construction  review should be scheduled a set number of years after completion of
               construction or in response to significant changes in the facility  structure, equipment or in the use of
               the facility. As-built documents must be  revised to reflect modifications made  to any part of the
               facility or the building systems. Any change in usage, installed equipment, loads, or occupancy must
               be carefully monitored and documented.  In addition, any system servicing and maintenance
               problems should be documented.  If the variations are significant enough to warrant a
               recommissioning of the individual systems, or as a method of continued maintenance, an earlier
               review should be conducted.

1.2.4.4         DOCUMENTATION
               The Commissioning Authority develops the following documentation during construction phase:
                                                    B-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

               •    Updated construction commissioning plan
               •    Updated commissioning schedule
               •    Minutes from commissioning meetings
               •    Commissioning progress reports
               •    Reports of submittal reviews
               •    Updates to the commissioning issues
               •    Construction checklists and functional test forms
               •    Report of training completion
               •    Report of O&M manual review
               •    Systems Manual
               •    Commissioning Records.

1.2.5      WARRANTY REVIEW AND SEASONAL TESTING
          The successful completion of commissioning should be a requirement for the issuance of the Final
          Certificate for Payment.  The commissioned building should provide the working environment required
          for the occupants and the O&M staff can concentrate on establishing an effective Preventive Maintenance
          Program that should work for the life of the building.

          The certain parts of the building mechanical system cannot be adequately tested due to the season of the
          completion. The commissioning plans should include off-season testing to allow testing certain
          equipment under the most appropriate test conditions. The systems should also be tested during the
          spring and fall seasons for partial load performance of mechanical systems.

          The commissioning contract should provide the EPA with the ability to engage the Commissioning
          Authority for occasional, informal consultations throughout the warranty period or during approximately
          the first year of building operation.

1.2.6.     FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT
          By the completion of training the Commissioning Authority should have completed the Commissioning
          Final Report.  This report should contains copies of the following:

          •    Design Intent
          •    Basis of design
          •    Pre-functional checklists complete
          •    Functional checklists complete
          •    TAB reports
          •    System schematics
          •    Control strategies  and  set points
          •    Deficiency log
          •    Guidelines for energy accounting.

          The Commissioning Final Report, the TAB report, the O&M manuals, and the record drawings and
          specifications form the documentation that will be left with the O&M staff. Additional information on
          building controls that includes block-wiring diagrams; as-built control diagrams and sequences of
          operation will also be included in either the Commissioning Final Report or the O&M manual.

1.2.7.     O&M STAFF TRAINING AND DOCUMENTATION
          The Commissioning Authority will have a significant positive impact on O&M training:

          •    Recommend the necessary O&M staffing (total personnel, qualifications, and required shifts) to
               satisfy the Owner's operational intent.

          •    Develop a facility preventive maintenance plan.  This task is directly tied to the development of the
               O&M staffing. The Commissioning Authority shall develop a facility preventive maintenance plan
               making best use of O&M staffing.

          •    The Commissioning Authority shall reviews the operation and maintenance manuals and verifies that
               they are complete  and  available  for training sessions. Prepare framed instructions showing the
               sequence of operations and interoperability for major systems and component.
                                                    B-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                             July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines


          •   The Commissioning Authority ensures that the contractor uses adequate training plans and that the
              training is completed per the contract documents. The Commissioning Authority should provide
              training agendas to the contractor's/manufacturer's trainers to review and use.


          •   The Commissioning Authority shall compile a Systems Manual consisting of the design record; space
              and use descriptions; single line drawings and schematics for major systems; control drawings;
              sequences of control; a table of all set points and implications when changing them; time-of-day
              schedules; instructions for operation of each piece of equipment for emergencies, seasonal
              adjustment, startup and shutdown; instructions for energy savings operations and descriptions  of the
              energy savings strategies in the facility; recommendations  for recommissioning frequency by
              equipment type; energy tracking recommendations;  and recommended, standard trend logs with a
              brief description of what to look for in them. The Systems Manual with O&M Manuals will form the
              Master O&M Manual.


          •   The Commissioning Authority shall prepare a recommended list of spare parts, bench stock, and
              special tools/equipment required for the first year of building operation.


          •   The Commissioning Authority shall deliver a final commissioning report, summarizing the
              commissioning  effort with the Commissioning Authority's view on each piece of commissioned
              equipment relative to installation and start-up, functional performance, O&M documentation, and
              training. The Commissioning Record also contains  the commissioning plan, functional tests,
              individual commissioning reports, reviews, and issues log.


1.2.8. COMMISSIONING PROCESS MATRIX
                 Task
                Description
      Documents
        Commissioning Authority
        Selection
        Commissioning Contract
        Design Team Kickoff
        Meeting
        Owner Performance
        Requirements (OPR)


        Basis of Design


        35% Plan Review




        65% Plan Review
        95% Plan Review
Develop an RFP for commissioning services.
Negotiate, prepare and execute a
commissioning contract.

Initial ""Kickoff Meeting" with the Design Team
to establish the purpose and proposed
process for commissioning the facility and to
establish the individual roles.

In cooperation with the EPA and the Design
Team, the Commissioning Authority prepares
a design intent summary document.

The design team prepares a Basis of Design
document.

Complete thorough reviews of the 35% plan
documents and submitted criteria (engineering
calculations, system selection and major
component selection).

Review 65% Design Documents (zoning
requirements, specifications, typical room
layouts,  system main layouts, riser layouts,
standard details,  schedules and coordination
requirements).

Draft Construction Commissioning Plan,
Commissioning Specifications and
Supplemental Commissioning Language for
other sections.

Review 95% Design Documents
Updated Commissioning Plan, Final
Commissioning Specifications
RFP Format
Scope of Work
Scoring Matrix

Commissioning Contract
Design Commissioning
Plan
Owners Performance
Requirements (OPR)
Summary

Draft Basis of Design
Comments
Comments
Draft Commissioning
Plan, Commissioning
Specifications
Commissioning
Specifications
Draft Construction
Commissioning Plan
                                                   B-7

-------
July 2004
                                  Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                    Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
                 Task
       Pre-bid Meeting and
       Assistance During
       Bidding process.

       Construction
       Commissioning Kick-off
       meeting
                Description
Pre-bid meeting to assist contractors in
answering any questions about the systems or
the commissioning process.

An initial commissioning meeting with all
contractors and commissioning team
members to establish the purpose and
proposed process for commissioning this
facility.
      Documents
Written Responses or
Recommendations
Final Commissioning
Plan with specific
individual responsibilities
identified.
       Duration Schedule for
       Commissioning Activities
Duration schedule for the contractors for the
commissioning activities required by the
commissioning plan.
Duration Schedule
       Submittal & Shop
       Drawing Review
       Construction
       Commissioning Plan
Review all pertinent approved shop drawings
to support the Commissioning Process.
Submittals & Shop drawings will be reviewed
for commissionability, maintainability and for
compliance to the OPR.

The final commissioning plan will incorporate
all changes established by review with EPA
and the design team. The final commissioning
plan will also include complete FIV, OPT and
FPT protocols for each system.
Commissioning Review
Log
Final Construction
Commissioning Plan
FIV, OPT and FPT
documents and
protocols.
       Field Inspection
       Verifications (FIV)
       Commissioning Team
       Meetings
       Complete all FIVs
       Operational
       Performance Tests (OPT)
Inspect the progress of construction with
respect to the systems being commissioned;
verify that the construction complies with the
plans & specifications and construction quality
practices.

Commissioning meetings on a regular basis
with the commissioning team to review
progress  of the commissioning effort and
reinforce  individual responsibilities.

Complete all field inspection verifications.
Observe or facilitate all equipment and system
start up procedures. The Contractor will
execute all start up and point-to-point tests
and the Cx will witness execution of all OPT's.
FIV Check Sheets, Daily
Log, Commissioning
Issues Log
Commissioning Issues
Log
FIV check sheets,
Commissioning Issues
Log

Completed OPT's,
Commissioning Issues
Log
       Functional Performance
       Tests (FPT)


       Operator Train ing
Observe and facilitate all FPT testing.  FPT's
shall be designed by the Commissioning
Authority and performed by the contractors.

Work with  the contractor and owner to
schedule and plan training activities so that
training occurs in a coordinated and coherent
fashion. Contractors and vendors provide all
training.
FPT Check Sheets,
Commissioning Issues
Log

Coordinated Training
Agendas
       Prepare Final
       Commissioning Report
       Deferred (Off season)
       Testing
Based on the accumulated commissioning
work completed as described above,
assemble the data into a final commissioning
report.

Conduct any testing  required by the
commissioning plan  that was deferred from
the acceptance period.
Final Commissioning
Report
Warranty Commissioning
Plan, FPT Test check
sheets

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

                 Task                             Description                           Documents
        Ten-Month Warranty Visit    Inspect the site and interview building             Commissioning Warranty
                                   operating personnel to identify any                Issues Log,
                                   outstanding warranty failures and to identify        Commissioning report
                                   any persistent equipment failure issues that        addenda
                                   should be handled within the warranty period.
1.3   PREVENTIVE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
      In order to maintain equipment reliability and optimize facility operation after building turnover,
      Commissioning Authority should develop a customized preventive operations and maintenance program. The
      goal of a Preventive Maintenance Plan is to improve equipment reliability and increase equipment life. A
      functional Operation & Maintenance Plan optimizes facility operation to provide significant energy savings
      and comfort benefits.

      The Commissioning Authority should be a valuable training source not only for the specifics of operating and
      maintaining the commissioned equipment, but also for providing the background information needed to assist
      the EPA's O&M staff in understanding system operations and being able to apply practical preventive
      maintenance functions.

1.4.   RETRO COMMISSIONING AND CONTINUOUS COMMISSIONING
      Retro commissioning is a systematic, documented process that identifies low-cost O&M improvements in an
      existing building and brings that building up to the design intentions of its  current usage.  Retro
      commissioning identifies and solves comfort and operational problems,  explores the full potential of the
      facility's energy management system, and ensures that the equipment performs properly after space changes
      have been made.

      The retrocommissioning process is a project-specific effort. Each project's focus and goals depend on the
      needs of the EPA, the budget, and the condition of the facility and equipment.  Retro commissioning most
      often focuses on:

      •   Reducing energy and demand costs
      •   Bringing equipment to its proper operational state
      •   Reducing occupant complaints
      •   Improving indoor environmental quality
      •   Reducing premature equipment failures
      •   Improving facility operation and maintenance procedures

      Retro commissioning project typically occurs in four distinct phases: Planning, Investigation, Implementation,
      and Project Hand-off.

      The primary tasks for the Planning Phase are developing internal goals and objectives  and support for the
      project, selecting and hiring a retro commissioning service provider, assemble the team that will see the
      project through to completion and develop the retro-commissioning plan.

      The primary goals of the Investigation Phase are to understand current operation and maintenance, to  identify
      issues  and potential improvements, and to select the  most cost-effective  ones for implementation. Tasks
      during investigation should include:

      •   Interviewing management and building personnel
      •   Reviewing current O&M practices and service contracts
      •   Spot testing equipment and controls and trending or  electronic data logging of pressures, temperatures,
          power, air and water flows, and lighting levels and use
      •   Gather and review facility documentation
      •   Begin Assessment and Complete Simple Repairs, begin Master List of Potential Improvements
      •   Develop Diagnostic Monitoring and Test Plans. The retro-commissioning service provider should direct
          the functional performance tests and assess and analyze the findings.
      •   Develop an Initial List of Findings
      •   Assemble an interim report describing the findings and recommendations.

      The Implementation Phase activities include Implementation of the major  cost-effective repairs and
      Improvements and verification of results (re-test and monitor).


                                                    B-9

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

      In the Project Hand-off Phase the retro commissioning process is completed.  The final report should include
      the following:

      •   Executive summary
      •   The retro commissioning plan
      •   The Master List of Findings with a description of the improvements implemented
      •   A cost/benefits analysis and the actual improvement costs
      •   A list of capital improvements recommended for further investigation
      •   The BAS trending plan and logger diagnostic / monitoring plan and results
      •   All completed functional tests  and results
      •   Recommended frequency for re commissioning
      •   Documentation of strategies adopted to optimize systems operation
      •   Updated (or Created) Building Documentation

      The retro commissioning service provider either should provide the training or ensure that the
      contractor/manufacturer provides adequate training for operating staff and perform deferred testing (seasonal
      testing).

      Continuous commissioning is similar to retro-commissioning and begins by identifying and fixing HVAC and
      comfort problems in the building. In the continuous commissioning, when the commissioning is complete, the
      team continues to work together to monitor and analyze building performance data provided by permanently
      installed metering equipment.  This process works to ensure that the savings achieved from the commissioning
      continue to persist over time.

1.5   COMMISSIONING AND LEED™ BUILDING RATING
      Fundamental building systems commissioning is a prerequisite for LEED™ building rating and requires having
      a contract in place to implement the following fundamental best practice commissioning procedures:

      •   Engage a commissioning team that does not include individuals directly responsible for project design or
          construction management.
      •   Review the design intent and the basis of design documentation.
      •   Incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents.
      •   Develop and  utilize a commissioning plan.
      •   Verify installation, functional performance, training and operation and maintenance documentation.
      •   Complete a commissioning report.

      Additional System Commissioning has 1 credit point allocated and in addition to the Fundamental Building
      Commissioning prerequisite implement the following commissioning tasks:

      •   A Commissioning Authority independent of the design team shall conduct a review of the design prior to
          the construction documents phase.
      •   An independent Commissioning Authority shall conduct a review of the construction documents near
          completion of the construction document development and prior to issuing the contract documents for
          construction.
      •   An independent Commissioning Authority shall review the contractor submittals relative to systems being
          commissioned.
      •   Provide the owner with a single manual that contains the information required for re-commissioning
          building systems.
      •   Have a contract  in place to review building operation with O&M staff, including a plan for resolution of
          outstanding commissioning-related issues within one year after construction completion date.

1.6   DEFINITIONS
      Commissioning Authority - An independent party with no affiliation to the design team or participating
      contractors, who implements the overall commissioning process.

      Design Intent - Design Intent defines the benchmark by which the success of a project is judged.  It describes
      EPA's program for the planned facility, explains the rationale behind the ideas, concepts and criteria for the
      facility. The Design Intent document is updated and increased in detail with each phase of the  design.  The
      initial Design Intent document is a detailed explanation of the facilities objectives and its  functional and
      operational needs, occupancy requirements, general quality of materials and construction, intended levels and
      quality of environmental control, performance criteria, environmental needs and budget considerations and
      limitations.  The Design Intent document is the starting point for the development of the Basis of Design.  A


                                                    B-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

      Design Intent document is written by the design team in consultation with the EPA and with an input from the
      Commissioning Authority.

      Basis of Design - The documentation of the primary thought processes and assumptions behind design
      decisions that are made to meet the Design Intent.  It shall respond to, and be consistent with, performance
      criteria specified in the Design Intent document (Some reiteration of the design intent may be included).  The
      Basis of Design is written by the design team and describes codes, standards, operating conditions, and design
      conditions, weather data, interior environmental criteria, other pertinent design assumptions, cost goals, and
      references to applicable codes, standards, regulations and guidelines. The Basis of Design increases in detail
      as the design progresses. The Commissioning Authority reviews, comments  on, and approves the design
      progress submissions.

      The commissioning specifications provide the bidders with a clear description of the extent of the required
      verification test. They detail what to test, under which conditions to test, acceptance testing criteria and
      acceptable test  methods.  The documentation, reporting, and scheduling requirements for verification testing is
      also to be included. The verification procedures, which are developed, should include all functional
      performance tests, including the following at a minimum:

      •    Testing, adjusting, and balancing test performance
      •    Equipment performance
      •    Performance of subsystems consisting of combinations of equipment (such as refrigeration cycle, pumps,
           chillers, cooling towers,  and interconnecting piping)
      •    Performance of the automatic controls in all seasonal modes
      •    Integrated  system performance
      •    Performance of all life safety devices and systems as they interface with the subsystems
      •    Architectural and structural system performance
      •    Electrical system performance
      •    Plumbing system performance
      •    Required operation and maintenance training by the contractor, for the owner, his O&M staff and  other
           relevant staff and the facility's O&M documentation requirements.

      Commissioning Plan is a document, or group of documents, that defines the commissioning process at the
      various stages of project development. The plan must create a procedure that will verify and provide
      documentation  that the performance of the building and its individual systems meet the owner's requirements.

      Design Phase Commissioning Plan - The commissioning plan developed during the pre-design phase which
      outlines each team member's role and responsibilities, sets protocols for communication and reviews,
      specifies procedures for documenting commissioning activities and resolving issues, and sets the  schedule for
      commissioning activities during the design phase of the project.  This plan should develop the extent of the
      commissioning process and communicate it to all project participants

      Construction Phase Commissioning Plan - An extension of the commissioning plan developed during the
      design phase, which outlines the roles and responsibilities of each project team member, specifies procedures
      for documenting commissioning activities and resolving issues, and  sets  a schedule for conducting
      commissioning activities during the construction phase of the project.  It is updated as construction
      progresses.

      Construction Checklist -  A checklist to ensure that the specified equipment has been provided, properly
      installed, and initially started and checked out adequately in preparation for full operation and functional
      testing (e.g., belt tension, fluids topped, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, voltage balanced,
      rotation correct).

      Functional Tests - Tests that evaluate the function and operation  of equipment and systems using  direct
      observation or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the assessment of the system's ability to perform
      within the parameters set up in the Basis of Design. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during
      low cooling or  heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures,
      fire alarm, power failure, etc.  The systems are run through all the control system's sequences of operation to
      determine whether they respond as the  sequences state. Functional tests are performed after construction
      checklists are complete.

      Performance Metrics  - verification that a specific element in the Design Intent has been met.  Performance
      Metrics are identified throughout the design of the project with as many as possible being generated during the


                                                    B-ll

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines

      development of the Design Intent.  The design team and Commissioning Authority are responsible for
      Performance Metrics development.

      LEED™ - a voluntary, consensus-based, market-driven building rating system, which was created to provide a
      complete framework for assessing building performance and meeting sustainability goals based on well-
      founded scientific standards. The LEED™ rating system is organized into five environmental categories.
      One of them - Energy & Atmosphere - has prerequisites and number of credits allocated to building
      commissioning.
                                                   B-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                            Appendix C  - Room Data Sheets


C.1  Genera!
      This section contains the sample room data sheets for various typical functional layouts for EPA laboratories and
      laboratory support spaces. These data sheets should be used as guides and references during the programming
      and design process of a specific project. Final laboratory layouts must be developed with the individual users
      and their research requirements as provided in Section 1, General Requirements, as well as in other related
      sections of this Manual.  Specific criteria and requirements should be verified by the design team with EPA,
      local, state, and federal regulatory agencies.


C.2  Typical Room Requirements

C.2.1 ROOM DATA SHEETS
      The room data sheets for typical room arrangements are shown in the following laboratory and laboratory support
      room layouts. Specific requirements, developed during the programming process with the individual user of the
      room, shall be in accordance with Section 1, General Requirements, as well as in other relative sections, of this
      Manual. The final layouts for these areas will be the responsibility of the design professional with approval by
      EPA.

C.2.1 STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
      Standard requirements for each area or room, as indicated in the various sections of this Manual, must also be
      defined for each specific laboratory facility Program of Requirements (POR). A listing and definitions of typical
      standard requirements, symbols, and  abbreviations are provided in the following subsections as examples.


C.3  Definition of Standard Requirements
      All standard requirements shall be in accordance with codes and with all other requirements of this document.
      The narrative and illustrative description of requirements in this section and elsewhere in this Manual shall take
      precedence over drawings. If an item is described in the narrative but not shown in a drawing, that is not to be
      taken as a  waiver of the requirement. The schematic drawings are provided for illustrative purposes only.

C.3.1 LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION STANDARD
      The required construction for all laboratory units shall be classified as Fire Hazard Class B laboratories per NFPA
      45.

C.3.2 ARCHITECTURAL  STANDARDS
      Refer to General Requirements.,  Section 1,  and other relative sections in  tins Manual for the architectural
      standards to be utilized in EPA projects,

C.3.3 MECHANICAL STANDARDS
      Refer to Special Construction, Section 13, and Mechanical Requirements, Section 15, of this Manual for the fire
      protection and mechanical standards to be utilized in EPA projects.

C3.4 ELECTRICAL STANDARDS
      Refer to Electrical Requirements, Section 16, of this Manual for the fire  alarm and electrical standards to be
      utilized in EPA projects.
                                                 C-l

-------
July 2004
     Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                           Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4  Laboratory Symbols List
     Room data sheets and design drawings shall be prepared utilizing the following graphic symbols for laboratory
     modules as they apply to a specific project.


     PLUMBING SYMBOLS
     A       AIR.COMP, (100PSIGU.O.N.)


     LA      AIR, LAB  (15 PSIG U.N.O)


     C02     CARBON DIOXIDE


     RO      REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER


     SS      SAFETY SHOWER


     CW     COLD WATER


     CHWS   CHILLED WATER SUPPLY


     CHWR   CHILLED WATER RETURN
HW     HOT WATER


IZO     CUP SINK


        LAB SINK


|CJ FD    FLOOR DRAIN


[O| FLD   FUNNEL DRAIN


|Q| FO    FLOOR SINK


{Xj-    SHUT-OFF VALVE


EW     EYE WASH
     ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
      D

      rd
        DIMMER SWITCH                      Q)


        20A SGL REC 120V                     wQ


        20A DUPLEX REC 120V                 Q


        30A SGL REC 208V SINGLE PHASE        S Q


        30A SGL REC 120*  208V SINGLE PHASE    I—M


        20A SGL REC 208V 3 PHASE              •<]


        SPECIAL PWR ERC                     WP


 ฎฎ     PEDESTAL BOX WITH REC              EP


-Q P .   SURFACE RACEWAY                   EM
      rO
        JUNCTION BOX


        WARNING LIGHT


        LIGHT FIXTURE


        SAFE LIGHT


        DISC SWITCH


        TELEPHONE


        WEATHERPROOF


        EXPLOSION PROOF


        EMERGENCY CKT


        COMPUTER OUTLET
                                        C-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                               '2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4  Laboratory Symbols List (Continued)
      ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
        CO
        n
        0
Cup Sink

Epoxy Sink


Stainless Steel Sink


Fume Hood



Biological Safety Cabinet


Government Furnished Equipment


Umbilical 5" x 18"
Snorkle
150 cfin Exhaust (U.N.O.)
      COlfflTERTOP MATERIALS
                            Epoxy Top

                            Acid Resistant Plastic Laminate

                            Stainless Steel
                                      C-3

-------
July 2004	_	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                           Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                    APPENDIX C
                      TYPICAL LABORATORY ROOM EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1         1 MODULE LABORATORY


EXAMPLE 2         2 MODULE LABORATORY


EXAMPLE 3         3 MODULE LABORATORY
                                        C-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines   	July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets

                                       ROOM DATA SHEETS

The following information shall be provided for each laboratory space.

SPACE TYPE
Information given to generally describe type of laboratory space by function.

AREA
Information provided as part of a specific space requirement for a particular project.
Example is used to illustrate a Typical J-Module Laboratory.

SPACE NAME
Information provided as part of specific description of space usage for a particular project.

ACTIVITY / PROGRAM NAME
Information provided to assign responsibility for a specific space to a particular Branch / Section for a project.

OCCUPANCY
Identifies number of personnel in a given space for a defined period of time.

BUILDING SECTION
Identifies functional grouping in which space is to be located.

ADJACENCIES
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with  representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.

OPERATION / TASK DESCRIPTION
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with  representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.

LIST OF REQUIREMENTS

      Ceiling - height and type

      Doors — size and type

      Flooring - material

      Walls — materials and finishes

      Window Treatment

      Special Construction - if required

      Outfitting

      Fixed Laboratory Equipment - list of casework requirements such as:
      •   Metal Casework - "C" Frame
          LF of Base Cabinets - 36 Inches High
      •   LF of Wall Cabinets - Glass Door
      •   LF Adjustable Wall Shelving - 2 Tier
      *   Epoxy Top

                                                 C-5

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Appendix C - Room Data Sheets

       •   Fume Hood with Services
          Vented Solvent Storage Cabinet Below Hood
       •   Vented OSHA Cabinet (30 Gallon)
       *   Laboratory Sink
       •   Cup Sink
          Laboratory Desks with Bookshelves, Tackboards and File with Storage Cabinets

       Mechanical Service Requirements
       *   Temperature and Humidity Control
          100 Percent Supply and Exhaust - 24 Hour-Operation

       Electrical Service
       •   120V/20 Amp AC at Fume Hood
          120V/20 Amp Receptacles 24 Inches on Center in Raceway
       •   208V/30 Amp-1 Phase, 4 Wire AC at Fume Hood
          Disconnect Switch at Door for 120/208V Laboratory Power
          Telephone
          Cable Tray
          Emergency Power
          Fluorescent Lighting - 100 Footcandles at 36 Inches AFF
          Security
          Computer Outlets

       Plumbing/Fire Protection
          Industrial Hot and Cold Water, Sink
       *   Industrial Cold Water, Cup Sink
       •   Deionized Water
       *   Laboratory Drain (Acid Waste)
       •   Compressed Air, 15 psi Serrated Connection
       *   Nitrogen Cylinder
          Laboratory Vacuum
       •   Water Sprinklers
          Dry Chemical and Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher in Safety Niches
       •   Safety Shower/Eyewash Station

CHEMICALS USED IN THIS ROOM
Types mid quantities used are to be identified during programming by the design professional in consultation with
representative facility users ami with approval by EPA.  The fallowing is used as an example:
Small quantities of organic solvents, acids, and  bases (generally less than  1 gallon of each at any one time) in
concentrations ranging from weak solutions to concentrated materials.  Standard reagent chemicals in gram proportions.

MOVABLE EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS
List of Government Furnished/Government Installed (GFGI) equipment and furnishings is to be identified during
programming by the design professional in consultation with representative facility users and approval by EPA-  The
following is used as an example:

       •   Analytical Balances
       '   Bench Top Drying Ovens
       •   Refrigerators
       •   Other
                                                 C-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	  July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                   EXAMPLE 1
                            1 MODULE LABORATORY

-------

M:
                                     '•  I;'
                                    6' FUME
                                    HOOD'
                                                                                       Figure 1


                                                                                 . ROOM DATA SHEET



                                                                               1  MODULE / 1  FUME HOOD

-------
July 2004	Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                         Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                  EXAMPLE 2
                           2 MODULE LABORATORY

-------
6*  FUME
HOOD
6'

HOOD
                                                             Figure 3



                                                         ROOM  DATA SHEET




                                                    2 MODULES /  2  FUME HOODS-

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines	July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                 EXAMPLE 3
                    3 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

-------
6'  FUME
HOOD
6'  FUME
HOOD
    I
6'  FUME
HOOD
                                                                                 Figure  6


                                                                            ROOM DATA SHEET


                                                                       3 MODULES / 3. FUME HOODS.'
                                                                             intrnC,. '<ป •'!'••

-------
July 2004	   Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Appendix C - Room Data Sheets

END OF APPENDIX C
                                              C-10

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                               Appendix D
CERCLA      Comprehensive   Environmental
              Response, Compensation, and Liability
              Act

CFCs         chlorofluorocarbons

cfm           cubic feet per minute

C-Frame      cantilevered frame

CGA         Compressed Gas Association

CISPI         Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CFR          Code of Federal Regulations

CMD         Contracts Management Division

CMU         concrete masonry unit

COR         Contracting Officer's Representative

CPSC         Consumer    Products    Safety
              Commission

CPVC         chlorinated polyvinyl chloride

CRF          critical radiant flux

CTI           Ceramic Tile Institute; Cooling Tower
              Institute

CVTS         cabled video teleconference space

db            dry bulb

dB            decibels

dBA          decibels of  sound measured on an
              A-scale

DC           direct current

DDC         direct digital controls

DHHS         Department of  Health and  Human
              Services

DI            deionized water

OOP          dioctyl phthalate

DOT         U.S. Department of Transportation

DTD         Developmental Toxicology Division

EA           Environmental Assessment

EC AO         Environmental Criteria and Assessment
              Office
EBRD


EIS

EM

EMCS

EMF

EMS

EMT

EPA

ERDA


BSD

ETD

ฐF

ฐF db

FAA

FFL

FGCC

FM

FMSD


fpm

GC/MS

GDHS


GECD

gpm

GPS

GSA

GTD

HAZMAT
Ecosystem   Exposure   Research
Division

environmental impact statement

engineering memorandum

energy management control system

electromagnetic fields

energy management system

electrical metallic tubing

Environmental Protection Agency

Energy Research  and  Development
Administration

Emission Standards Division

Environmental Toxicology Division

degrees Fahrenheit

degrees Fahrenheit dry bulb

Federal Aviation Administration

carpet pill test

Federal Geodetic Control Committee

Factory Mutual

Facilities  Management and  Services
Division

feet per minute

gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer

geometric design  of  highways  and
streets

Global Emission and Control Division

gallons per minute

Global Positioning System

General Services Administration

Genetic Toxicology Division

hazardous materials
                                                   D-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                        July 2004
Appendix D

HCFC        hydrochlorofluorocarbon

HD           heavy duty

HEFRD       Human Exposure and Field Research
              Division

HEPA        high-efficiency particulate aerosol

HERL        Health Effects Research Laboratory

HFC          hydrofluorocarbon

HID          high-intensity discharge

HMSF        hazardous   materials/waste  storage
              facility

hp            horsepower

HP           high pressure

HPLC        high-performance    liquid
              chromatography

HRMD       Human   Resources    Management
              Division

HTW         high-temperature water

HVAC        heating,   ventilation,   and   air-
              conditioning

IAQ          indoor air quality

IBM          International Business Machines

IBC          International Building Code

ICC          International Code Council

ICS          Industrial Controls and Systems

ICP          inductively coupled plasma

ICSSC        Interagency  Committee  on  Seismic
              Safety in Construction

ID            inside diameter

IPCEA       Insulated  Power  Cable  Engineer's
              Association

"K" Rated     transformers specially constructed for
              use with nonlinear loads

kV           kilovolt

kVa          kilovolt - ampere
kwd          kilowatt demand

kwh          kilowatt hours

LAN          local area network

LCC          life cycle cost

LCCA        life cycle co st analysis

LEL          lower flammable/explosive limit

LEEDS       Leadership   in   Energy   and
              Environmental Design Green Building
              Rating System

LIMS         Laboratory Information Management
              Systems

low E glass    low emissivity glass

MBMA       Metal   Building    Manufacturers
              Association

MDF          main distribution frame

MEF          main entrance frame

ug/L          micrograms per liter

mg/L          milligrams per liter

MIL-F        Military Federal Specification

MRDD       Methods Research and  Development
              Division

MS           mass spectrometer

MSDS        material safety data sheets

N value       number of blows per linear foot

NAAQS       National   Ambient    Air   Quality
              Standards

NACE        NACE International

NAD          North American Datum

NAVD       North American Vertical Datum

NC           noise criteria

NCF          network control facility

NC/LC       noncombustible/limited combustible

NCMA       National    Concrete   Masonry
                                                   D-3

-------
July 2004
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
              Association

NCPD        National Contracts Payment Division

NDPD        National Data Processing Division

NEBB        National  Environmental   Balancing
              Bureau

NEC          National Electrical Code

NEHRP       National Earthquake Hazard Reduction
              Program

NEMA       National   Electrical   Manufacturers
              Association

NEPA        National Environmental Policy Act

NFPA        National Fire Protection Association

NGVD        National Geodetic Vertical Datum

NIOSH       National  Institute  of  Occupational
              Safety and Health

NOAA        National  Oceanic  and Atmospheric
              Administration

NRC          noise reduction coefficient

NSC          National Safety Code

NSF          National Sanitation Foundation

NSPC        National Standard Plumbing Code

NTD          Neurotoxicology Division

NUSF        net usable square feet

OAQPS       Office of Air Quality  Planning  and
              Standards

OAR          Office of Air and Radiation

OARM       Office    of   Administration   and
              Resources Management

OD           Office of the Director; outside diameter

ODF          ozone depletion  factor

OID          Owners Insurance Underwriters

ORD          Office of Research and Development

OSA          outside air ventilation systems
                                      Appendix D

OSHA         Occupational   Safety  and   Health
               Administration

PB            polybutylene

PBX           private branch exchange

pCi/L          picocuries per liter

PCI            Precast Concrete Institute

PCI-MNL      Precast Concrete Institute Manual

PDU           power distribution unit

ph             phase

plf            pounds per linear foot

POR           program of requirements

psf            pounds per square foot

psi            pounds per square inch

psig            pounds per square inch gauge

PTI            Post-Tensioning Institute

PURPA        Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act

PVC           polyvinyl chloride

PVDF         polyvinylidine fluoride

QATSD        Quality  Assurance  and  Technical
               Support Division

R (values)      thermal resistance

RCRA         Resource Conservation and Recovery
               Act

RD            relative humidity

RSD           Research Support Division

RTECS        Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical
               Substances

SCS           Soil Conservation  Service

SDR-PR       standard  dimension ratio  - pressure
               rated

SDWA        Safe Drinking Water Act

SEFA          Scientific Equipment and Furniture
               Association
                                                   D-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                        July 2004
Appendix D
SFPB
SFO
SHEMD

Sustainable Facilities Practices Branch
solicitation for offer
Safety, Health and Environmental

TSD
U-factor
UFAS

Technical Support Division
a coefficient of heat loss
Uniform Federal Accessibility
              Management Division

SHEMP       Safety,  Health  and  Environmental
              Management Program

SMACNA     Sheet  Metal   and  Air-Conditioning
              Contractors National Association

SNAP        Significant New Alternatives Policy

STC          sound transmission class

STL          sound transmission loss

TC           telecommunication closet

TIA          traffic  impact analysis

TM           technical memorandum
               Standards

UL            Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

UPS           uninterruptible power supply

UTP           unshielded twisted pair

VAV          variable air volume

VOA          volatile organic analysis

VCP           visual comfort probability

VCR          video cassette recorder

wb            wet bulb
END OF APPENDIX D
                                                   D-5

-------
July 2004
              Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Concrete Reinforcement 	3-1
Concrete, Requirements (General)  	3-1
  Coal Fly Ash, in Concrete  	3-1
  Codes	3-1
  Design and Construction  	3-1
  Inspection and Testing	3-3
Concrete Structures, Repair and Restoration	3-3
Condensers  	15-14
Conductors  	16-5
Confined Spaces  	1-10
Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume Hoods . .  . 15-27
Construction Materials  	1-5
Control Systems, See Temperature Control Systems
Conveying Systems, Building	14-1
Corrosive Atmosphere	16-24
Cooling Towers	15-11, 15-14
Countertops	10-4
Culture Water 	15-38
Curtains	9-6
Dead Loads	1-13
Decks
  Cementitious  	3-2
  Steel	5-1
Deionized Water System	15-37
Design Considerations
  Environmental	1-4
  Structural	1-10
Design Principles	1-1
Design Process  	1-1
Design Submittals  	1-2
Development Codes. See Codes, Development
Dewatering  	2-14
Disaster Evacuation System  	16-35
Distribution Systems. See Electrical; Natural Gas;
    Water
Doors	8-1
  Exit	8-2
  Exterior  	8-1
  Fire	8-1
  Identification	10-1
  Interior	8-1
  Laboratory	8-2
Drain, Waste and Vent Lines	15-34
Drainage. See Street Drainage
Draperies	9-6
Drinking Fountains  	15-38
                                             Index

Dry Filtration (Air) Systems  	15-33
Dry-Marker Boards	10-1
Ductbanks and Cable	16-3
Ducts	15-24
  Access Panels	15-25
  Fabrication	15-24
  Fire Dampers 	15-25
  Insulation	15-25
  Noise Control	13-1
Earthwork  	2-14
Effluent Cleaning	15-31
Electrical Service  Entrance	16-4
  Equipment  	16-5
  Metering	16-5
  Overhead Services	16-5
  Service Capacity  	16-5
  Underground Services 	16-5
Electrical Systems
  Distribution 	2-27, 16-3
    Redundancy  	16-4
  Installations 	16-1
  Interior	16-6
Electromagnetic Fields  	1-6
Elevators  	14-1
  Capture Floor	14-1
  Chemical Transport Use   	14-1
  Recall	14-1
  Signage  	14-1
  Smoke Detectors  	14-1
Emergency Eyewash Units   	15-36
Emergency Lighting  	16-14
Emergency Power System	16-16
  Emergency Generator 	16-17
  Emergency Loads	16-18
  Uninterruptible Power Supply	16-18
Emergency Safety Showers	15-36
Energy Conservation
  General	1-5
  HVAC (Control Schemes)	15-5, 15-10
  Lighting	16-1, 16-15
Energy Management Control Systems. See Automatic
    Temperature Control Systems.
Energy Metering  	15-11
Energy Star 	 1-4
Environmental Considerations
  Design Requirements	1-5

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                          July 2004
Index

  Electrical Systems 	16-3, 16-24
  Finishes  	9-1
  Siting	2-2
Environmental Justice	2-11
Environmental Rooms	10-5, 15-20
Equipment. See also specific equipment
    categories	11-1
  Ventilation, Equipment Rooms  	11-1, 15-3
Erosion and Sedimentation Control	2-23
Escalators  	13-3, 14-1
Evacuation System, Disaster	16-35
Evaporative/Adiabatic Cooling	15-4
Exhaust, Laboratory. See also Fume Hoods, Laboratory
  Plume Study	15-31
Exit Lighting and Markings.  See Lighting; Signage
Expansion  	1-5
Explosive Atmosphere	16-24
Exposed Concrete Flooring	9-5
Exterior Building Materials	1-11
Extreme Cold	16-24
Eyewash Units, Emergency.  See  Emergency Eyewash
    Units
Facility Siting  	2-11
Fan Control, Variable-Air-Volume	15-10
Fans/Motors	15-19
Final Finishing Material.  See Finishes, Interior
Finished, Ceilings.  See Ceilings, Finished
Finishes, Interior	9-1
Finishes, Wall.  See Wall Finishes, Paint, and Covering
Fire Alarm  System	16-25
Fire Barrier Walls  	13-2
Fire Department Access	1-21, 2-18
Fire Doors  	8-1
Fire Extinguishers,  Portable  	10-1, 13-6
Fire Protection	13-3
  Systems  	13-4
  System Size and  Zoning	13-4
  Water Supplies	13-3
Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls,
    Air-Handling Systems  	15-10
FireWalls  	13-2
Fire Zones  	16-30
Flame Spread and Smoke Limitations	9-2
Flammable Gas Systems  	15-40
Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets	15-32
Floodplain  and Wetlands Development	2-23
Floor Treatments. See also Carpet; Ceramic;
    Exposed Concrete; Vinyl 	9-3
Fluorescent Fixtures. See Lighting Fixtures
Foundations	1-16
Fuel Storage	15-16, 15-22
Fume Hoods, Laboratory.  See also specific
    hood types)
  Certification	15-26
  Effluent Cleaning	15-31
  Exhaust  	15-30
  Face Velocities	15-26
  Horizontal Sashes  	15-30
  Location	10-4
  Mainfolding	15-30
  Noise  	15-29
  Testing and Balancing	15-41
Furnishings
  Building	12-1
  Laboratory. See also Cabinets, Laboratory  .... 10-1
  Site	2-16
Gas. See Natural Gas; Nonflammable and
    Flammable Gas
Generators and Battery Units  	16-14
Geotechnical Investigation  	2-5
Glare (Lighting)	16-15
Glassware Washing Sinks	15-36
Glove Boxes  	15-31
Green Building Certification	1-4
Green Lights. See Energy Star
Grounding  	16-10
  Automatic Data Processing Power	16-23
Groundwater Investigation  	2-6
Grout	4-1
Halon Fire Extinguishing Systems	13-6
Handicapped Access 	1-8
  Electrical  	16-2
  Laboratory	1-9
  Toilet Facilities  	15-37
Hardscape Requirements	2-18
Harmonics	16-6
Hazard Segregation	2-13
Heat Generation and Distribution,  Central Plant . 15-20
Heating and Cooling Coils  	15-19
Heating and Cooling, Simultaneous  	15-9
Heating and Cooling Systems, Two-Pipe Combination
    	15-17

-------
July 2004
              Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Heating Equipment  	15-16
Heating Systems  	15-15
Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning. See
    HVAC
Heliports. See Airports and Heliports
High-Technology Equipment. See Equipment
Horizontal Sashes  	15-30
Hose Bibbs  	15-40
Humidity Control	15-9
HVAC Design Criteria  	15-2
  Energy Efficiency  	15-5
  Equipment Sizing	15-4
  Inside Design Temperatures	15-2
  Outside Design Temperatures 	15-3
HVAC Systems	15-13
  Air Conditioning  	15-13
  Chillers	15-13
  Condensers	15-14
  Cooling Towers	15-14
  Heating Equipment  	15-16
Illuminance Levels  	16-12
Interaction	1-8
Interior Finishes.  See Finishes, Interior
Intrusion Detection Systems  	16-33
Janitor Closets	1-20
Joints,  Building	1-15
Laboratory Air Volume/Exchange. See Air
    Volume/Exchange, Laboratory
Laboratory Cabinets. See Cabinets, Laboratory
Laboratory Casework.  See also Cabinets; Fume
    Hoods; Shelving	10-2
Laboratory Doors  	8-2
Laboratory Exhaust. See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Fume Hoods.  See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Power Requirements.  See Power
    Requirements, Laboratory
Laboratory Service Fittings	15-36
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary	15-39
Lamps  and Ballasts  	16-14
Land Resources	2-1
Landscaping	2-14
Lavatories. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Layout and Clearances, Equipment	11-1
Lead-Based Paint	9-1
LEED	1-4
Light Diffusers	16-15
                                             Index

Lighting Fixtures. See also Lamps and Ballasts
  Fire Safety 	16-14
  Selection  	16-13
Lighting Systems, Exterior  	16-15
  Building	16-15
  Parking Lot 	16-15
  Roadway  	16-15
  Signs (Electric)  	16-15
  Traffic Control	16-15
Lighting Systems, Interior	16-13
  Automatic Data Processing Areas  ....  16-15, 16-23
  Controls 	16-12
  Emergency (Battery Units)  	16-13
  Energy Conservation 	16-14
  Exit	16-35
Lightning  Protection Systems  	16-22
Liquid Chalk Boards	10-1
Liquid Nitrogen and Liquid Argon Distribution  . 15-41
Live Loads	1-13
Load Calculations
  HVAC  	15-5
  Structural Design  	1-11
Loading Facilities  	2-19
Loads, Building	1-13
  Dead Loads 	1-13
  Live Loads	1-14
  Seismic Loads  	1-15
  Snow Loads	1-14
  Wind Loads	1-14
Magnetic Boards	10-1
Masonry
  Accessories 	4-2
  Codes and Specifications	4-1
  Inspection and Testing	4-2
  Reinforced	4-2
  Unit 	4-2
Mechanical Equipment. See Equipment; Plumbing;
    and other specific systems
Metals, Miscellaneous	5-1
Metering.  See Electrical Metering; Energy Metering
Microwave Communications	16-25
Modules, Laboratory	1-16
  Electrical 	16-9
Moisture Transport  	7-1
Monumental Stairs	13-3
Monumentation	2-7

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                          July 2004
Index

Mortar	4-1
Motor Controllers and Disconnects	16-9
Natural Gas Distribution Systems  	2-27, 15-41
Noise Control 	13-1
  Air Handling and Air Distribution	15-18
  Fume Hoods	15-31
  Piping and Ducting  	13-1
Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas Systems . . . 15-40
Open Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Paint
  Accent  	9-6
  Colors, Wall and Ceiling	9-6
  Lead-Based 	9-1
  Reflectance  	9-5
Panel and Curtain Walls  	7-1
Panelboards	16-7
Parking Facilities	2-19
  Hazard Segregation	2-13
  Lighting	16-16
Partitions, Wood and Plastic. See also Panel and
    Curtain Walls; Spandrel Walls	6-1
Pedestrian Access  	2-20
Penetrations	13-3
Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods  	15-28
Piping
  Noise Control	13-1
  Plumbing 	13-1
Planning and Design, Site  	2-9
Plumbing	15-34
  Fixtures  	15-38
  Piping	15-34
  Safety Devices	15-36
Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust)  	15-33
Power Factors (Electrical)	16-2
Power Requirements, Laboratory  	16-12
Power Supply Lines, Overhead	16-3
Power Systems.  See also Electrical Systems
  Automatic Data Processing Power	16.11
  Emergency Power  	16-17
Pre-design Process	1-1
Pre-engineered Metal Buildings  	5-2
Primary Distribution  	15-3
Professional Qualifications, Site Designers	2-15
Pump sand Pumping Systems (H VAC) ..  15-18,15-21
Quality Assurance/Quality Control	1-24
Raceways	16-6, 16-24
Radioisotope Hoods  	15-29
Reception	1-18
Recording Systems  	16-24
Recreational Requirements (Site) 	2-18
Reflectance. See Paint
Reinforced Masonry. See Masonry
Restrooms  	1-20, 15-38
Retaining Walls	1-13
Room Numbering  	10-1
Room Air Change Rates 	15-2, 15-4
Safety Alarm System	16-31
Safety Showers, Emergency.  See Emergency Safety
    Showers
Saltwater Atmosphere	16-24
Satellite Dishes 	16-25
Security	1-23
  Systems  	16-32
Sedimentation Control. See Erosion and Sedimentation
    Control
Seismic Loads	1-15
Seismic Requirements (Electrical)	16-22
Service (Electrical) Entrance.  See Electrical Service
    Entrance
Service Fittings, Laboratory  	15-36
Setback Mechanism	15-18
Shafts	13-3
Shelving, Laboratory	10-3
Shoring and Underpinning	2-14
Shower Stalls. See also Emergency Safety
    Showers   	15-39
Signage
  Elevator	14-1
  Exit Markings   	16-35
  Exterior  	2-17, 16-16
  Interior	10-1
Sinks.  See  Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Site
  Development 	2-6
  Evaluation   	2-4
  Influences	2-1
  Investigation	2-3
  Planning and Design  	2-9
  Preparation	2-14
  Surveys  	2-3
Site Access Systems  	16-33

-------
July 2004
              Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Siting
  Building	2-12
  Facility	2-11
  Laboratory	2-12
Smoke Detection Controls.  See Fire and Smoke
    Detection and Protection Controls
Smoke Detectors, Elevator  	14-1
Snow Loads	1-14
Solid Waste Collection Systems 	2-28
Sound Dampening	13-2
Space Heaters 	15-16
Spandrel Walls  	7-2
Special Purpose Hoods 	15-29
Special Room Requirements	1-20
  Janitor Closets 	1-20
  Restrooms 	1-20
Sprinklers, See Automatic Sprinkler Protection
Standpipes and Hose Systems	13-6
Steam Distribution Systems	15-18
Steam Generation  	15-21
Steel Decks  	5-1
Steel Joists	5-1
Steel, Structural
  Codes and Standards 	5-1
  Inspection and Testing	5-2
Stormwater Management	2-22
  Stormawater Conveyance	2-23
  Stormwater Quality 	2-23
  Stormwater Retention and Detention	2-23
Street Drainage 	2-22
Structural Design Requirements 	1-13
Structural Steel. See Steel, Structural
Structural Support, Equipment  	11-1
Submittals 	1-2
Substations  	16-7
Sun Shading	8-3
Surveying	2-6
Switches	16-3
Tack Boards 	10-1
Telecommunications Systems 	2-28,  16-24
Television Broadcast Systems	16-25
Temperatures, Design
  Inside Design Temperature  	15-3
  Outside Design Temperatures 	15-4
                                              Index

Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning
    (HVAC Systems) 	15-41
Thermal and Moisture Requirements  	7-1
Thermal Resistance	7-1
Tile Flooring.  See Vinyl Tile; Ceramic Tile
Toilet Facilities	15-37
  Accessibility	15-38
Transformers	16-4
Transportation Systems	2-2
Trim and Incidental Finishes.  See Finishes, Interior
Underpinning. See Shoring and Underpinning
Uninterruptible Power Supply	16-19
Unit Masonry. See Masonry
UPS.  See Uninterruptible Power Supply
Utilities and Support  Services	2-24
Vacuum Systems	15-42
Variable-Air-Volume Hoods	15-28
Variable-Air-Volume Systems, Fan Control  . . . .  15-10
Vehicle Access and Circulation	2-18
Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement.  See also
    Transportation Systems  	2-18
Ventilated Enclosures (other than fume hoods) . .  15-31
Ventilation Control, Mechanical	15-10
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms	11-1, 15-5
Ventilation-Exhaust Systems	15-4
Ventilation Rates	15-2
  Equipment rooms	11-1, 15-3
  Laboratories	15-2,  15-26
Vertical Openings and Shafts  	13-2
  Atriums  	13-2
  Escalators	13-3
  Monumental Stairs	13-3
  Penetrations	13-3
  Shafts	13-3
Vibrating, Equipment, Support of	5-1
Vibration Isolation	13-1
Video Conference Rooms	16-24
Vinyl Flooring, Seamless	9-5
Vinyl Tile  	9-5
Wall Finishes, Paint and Covering  	9-2
Waste Heat Recovery Systems 	15-5
Waste, Laboratory. See Hazardous  Waste Handling;
    Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary
Waste, Solid.  See Solid Waste
Wastewater Collection Systems	2-26
Water Chillers	15-13

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                          July 2004
Index

Water Conservation	  1-6, 15-39
Water Distribution Systems
  Culture Water	15-38
  Deionized Water 	15-37
  Fire Protection	13-3
  HVAC  	15-17
  Industrial Non-Potable	15-38
  Potable	  2-24, 15-37
Water Metering	15-34
Water Supply	15-33
Waterfront Construction. See also Coastal
    Development  	2-14
Watershed Development	2-22
Wetlands Development. See Floodplain and
    Wetlands Development
Wind Loads	1-14
Window Covering	9-6
Windows	8-2
  Fixed Systems  	8-2
  Height  	8-2
  in Interior Partitions and Walls  	8-3
  Storefront and Curtain Wall Systems, Safety .... 8-2
  Sun Shading	8-3
Wood and Plastics.  See also Partitions	6-1

-------